Mercedes - E-Class Sedan - Owners Manual - 1999 - 1999

E-Class Sedan Vehicle V ehicle document wallet wallet Here you can nd comprehensive information about operating your vehicle and about services and guarantees in printed form. É21358442214ËÍ 2135844221 Order no. P213 1671 13 Part no. 213 584 42 21 Edition B-2022 Mercedes-Benz Digital Digit al – in the the vehicle vehicle Familiarize yourself with the contents of the Operator's Manual directly via the vehicle's multimedia system (menu item "Vehicle information"). Start with the quick guide or broaden your knowledge with practical tips. E-Class Sedan Operator's Manual Mercedes-Benz Front passenger passenger airbag w war arning ning & WARNING Risk of injury or death if the codriver airbag is enabled If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be struck by the codriver airbag during an accident. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. Observe the chapter "Children in the vehicle". Publication details details Int Inter ernet net Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and about Mercedes‑Benz AG can be found on the following websites: https://www.mbusa.com (USA only) https://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only) Documentation team Documentation team ©Mercedes‑Benz AG: Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Mercedes‑Benz AG. manufacturer er Vehicle manufactur Mercedes‑Benz AG Mercedesstraße 120 70372 Stuttgart Germany Airbag warning sticker for USA and Canada As at 17.02.21 Thank you you for for buying Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz Before you rst drive o , read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer operating lifespan of the vehicle, follow the instructions and warning notices in this Operator's Manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or injury to people. Damage to the vehicle resulting from the disregard of the instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. The standard equipment and product description of your vehicle may vary and depends on the following factors: R Model R Order R National version R Availability Your vehicle may therefore di er, in individual cases, from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. Mercedes-Benz reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: R Design R Equipment R Technical features The following documents are integral parts of the vehicle: R Digital Operator's Manual R Printed Operator's Manual R Maintenance Booklet R Equipment-dependent supplements R Supplementary documents Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. Ensure that all documents are in the vehicle or passed on in the event of sale or rental. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. A Daimler Company 2135844221 2135844221 2 Contents Symbols .......................................................... 5 At a glance ...................................................... 6 Cockpit ........................................................... 6 Indicator and warning lamps .......................... 10 Overhead control panel ................................. 12 Door operating unit and seat adjustment ....... 14 Emergencies and breakdowns ....................... 16 Digital Operat Digital Operator's or's Manual .............................. 18 Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual ........ 18 General Gener al notes notes ............................................... Protection of the environment ....................... Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ....................... Operator's Manual ........................................ Service and vehicle operation ........................ Operating safety ............................................ Declaration of conformity for vehicle installed radio components ........................... Diagnostics connection ................................. Quali ed specialist workshop ........................ Correct use of the vehicle ............................. 20 20 20 21 22 23 25 26 27 27 Notes for persons with electronic medical aids .............................................................. Problems with your vehicle ............................ Reporting safety defects ................................ Limited Warranty ........................................... QR code for rescue card ............................... Data storage ................................................. Copyright ...................................................... 27 28 28 29 29 29 34 Occupant safety safety ............................................ Restraint system ........................................... Seat belts ..................................................... Airbags ......................................................... PRE-SAFE® system ........................................ Safely transporting children in the vehicle ...... Notes on pets in the vehicle .......................... 35 35 37 41 48 49 62 Opening and closing ...................................... SmartKey ...................................................... Doors ............................................................ Trunk ............................................................ Side windows ................................................ Sliding sunroof .............................................. Roller sun blinds ............................................ 64 64 68 71 77 80 84 Anti-the protection ...................................... 85 Seats and stowing stowing ......................................... 89 Notes on the correct driver's seat position .... 89 Seats ............................................................ 90 Steering wheel .............................................. 99 Easy entry and exit feature .......................... 101 Memory function ......................................... 102 Stowage areas ............................................ 104 Sockets ....................................................... 115 Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior antenna .... 116 Installing and removing the oor mats ......... 118 Light and visibility ........................................ Exterior lighting ........................................... Interior lighting ............................................ Windshield wiper and windshield washer system ........................................................ Mirrors ........................................................ Area permeable to radio waves on the windshield ................................................... Infrared-re ective windshield function ......... 119 119 127 129 131 134 134 Climatee control Climat control ........................................... 135 Overview of climate control systems ............ 135 Operating the climate control system .......... 136 Driving and parking Driving parking ..................................... Driving ........................................................ DYNAMIC SELECT switch ............................ Automatic transmission ............................... Function of the 4MATIC ............................... Refueling ..................................................... Parking ....................................................... Driving and driving safety systems ............... Vehicle towing instructions .......................... Instr Ins trument ument display display and on-board on-board comput puter er ........................................................... Notes on the instrument display and onboard computer .......................................... Overview of instrument display .................... Overview of buttons on the steering wheel ... Operating the on-board computer ................ Overview of displays on the instrument display ........................................................ Head-up Display .......................................... 142 142 154 156 160 160 162 170 222 223 223 224 225 225 227 227 MBUX multimedia system system ............................ Overview and operation ............................... System settings .......................................... Navigation ................................................... Telephone ................................................... Mercedes me app ....................................... Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ....... Radio & media ............................................. Sound settings ............................................ 230 230 240 244 252 256 263 266 273 Maintenance and care Maintenance care ................................. ASSYST PLUS service interval display .......... Engine compartment ................................... Cleaning and care ....................................... 274 274 275 281 Breakdown Breakdo wn assistance assistance ................................. Emergency .................................................. Flat tire ....................................................... Battery (vehicle) .......................................... Tow starting or towing away ........................ Electrical fuses ............................................ 289 289 290 296 301 305 Contents 3 Wheels and tires tires ......................................... Notes on noise or unusual handling characteristics ................................................... Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires ............................................................ Notes on snow chains ................................. Tire pressure ............................................... Loading the vehicle ..................................... Tire labeling ................................................ De nition of terms for tires and loading ....... Changing a wheel ........................................ Emergency spare wheel ............................... 309 Tec echnical hnical data data ............................................. Notes on technical data .............................. Vehicle electronics ...................................... Regulatory radio identi cation and notes ..... Vehicle identi cation plate, VIN and engine number overview .............................. Operating uids ........................................... Vehicle data ................................................ 340 340 340 342 309 309 310 310 316 321 326 328 338 343 344 351 4 Contents Display messages Display messages and w war arning/indicat ning/indicator or lam lamps ps .......................................................... 353 Display messages ........................................ 353 Warning and indicator lamps ....................... 405 Indexx .......................................................... 422 Inde Symbols In this Operator's Manual, you will nd the following symbols: & DAN ANGER GER Danger due to not observing the warning notices Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others. # Observe the warning notices. + ENVIRONMENT ONMENTAL AL NOTE NOTE Environmental ENVIR damage due to failure to observe environmental notes Environmental notes include information on environmentally responsible behavior or environmentally responsible disposal. # Observe environmental notes. * NOTE Damage to property due to failure to observe notes on material damage Notes on material damage inform you of risks which may lead to your vehicle being damaged. # Observe notes on material damage. % These symbols indicate useful instructions or further information that could be helpful to you. # Instruction (/ page) Further information on a topic Display Display eld in the Instrument Display/media display 4 Highest menu level, which is to be selected in the multimedia system 5 Relevant submenus, which are to be selected in the multimedia system * Indicates a cause 5 6 At a glance – Cockpit At a glance – Cockpit 1 Steering wheel gearshi paddles → 158 G è ECO start/stop function → 151 2 Combination switch → 120 H c Active Parking Assist → 217 3 Instrument display → 224 I É Sets the vehicle level → 205 4 DIRECT SELECT lever → 156 J DYNAMIC SELECT switch → 155 5 Media display → 230 K PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps → 45 6 Start/stop button → 143 L Control panel for the MBUX multimedia system → 225 7 Calls up MBUX multimedia system applications → 233 M Adjusts the steering wheel manually → 99 8 Climate control systems → 136 N Adjusts the steering wheel electrically → 100 9 Glove box → 107 → 101 A £ Hazard warning light system → 121 B Stowage compartment → 107 C Touchpad → 233 On-board computer → 225 D 8 Controller for volume and switching sound on/o → 230 Cruise control → 178 → 182 E Ü Switches the MBUX multimedia system on/o → 230 F D Rear window roller sunblind → 85 ý Switches the steering wheel heater on/o O Control panel: H Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC P Diagnostics connection → 26 Q Opens the hood → 275 7 8 At a glance – Cockpit R ! Electric parking brake → 166 S Light switch → 119 10 At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps Instrument display At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps 1 #! Turn signal lights → 120 C ! ABS → 417 2 6 Restraint system → 407 D Ù Electric power steering → 408 3 å ESP® OFF → 417 E h Tire pressure monitoring system → 420 ÷ ESP® → 417 → 409 4 R Rear fog light → 120 F 8 Reserve fuel with fuel ller ap location indicator 5 K High beam → 120 G Fuel level → 224 L Low beam → 119 H Electric parking brake (red) → 413 → 413 J ü Seat belt → 407 K ; Check Engine → 409 L ä Suspension → 416 → 119 6 ÿ Coolant temperature → 409 7 Coolant temperature display → 224 8 ! Electric parking brake (yellow) → 413 9 é Recuperative Brake System, USA only → 413 → 413 A # Electrical malfunction → 409 B L Distance warning → 416 T Parking lights J Brakes (yellow), Canada only F USA only ! Canada only I Brakes (red) $ USA only J Canada only 11 12 At a glance – Overhead control panel At a glance – Overhead control panel 1 Sun visors 7 u Switches the rear interior lighting on/o → 127 → 127 2 p Switches the le -hand reading lamp on/o → 127 8 p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/o 3 S Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/o → 127 9 Eyeglasses compartment 4 G SOS button → 256 A 3 Opens/closes the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel → 80 5 c Switches the front interior lighting on/o → 127 3 Opens/closes the roller sunblind → 80 6 ; me button → 256 → 132 B Inside rearview mirror 13 14 At a glance – Door operating unit and seat adjustment At a glance – Door operating unit and seat adjustment 1 Adjusts the seats electrically → 93 C Opens the door → 68 2 w Switches the seat heating on/o → 97 D V Operates the memory function → 103 3 s Switches the seat ventilation on/o → 99 E Adjusts the head restraints → 94 95 4 & % Locks/unlocks the vehicle → 68 F Con gures the seat settings → 5 p Opens/closes the trunk lid → 71 G Adjusts the seat fore-and-a position → 92 6 Í Operates the outside mirrors → 131 H Adjusts the seat cushion length → 92 93 7 W Opens/closes the right side window → 77 I Adjusts the 4-way lumbar support → 8 W Opens/closes the rear right side window → 77 J Adjusts the seat backrest inclination → 92 9 T Child safety lock for the rear side windows → 62 K Adjusts the seat height → 92 → → A W Opens/closes the rear le side window 77 L Adjusts the seat cushion inclination 92 B W Opens/closes the le side window → 77 15 16 At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns 1 B-pillar with: → 121 information label on fuel type → 160 312 7 £ Hazard warning light system → 29 2 Safety vests → 289 3 ; me button → 256 Information label on tire pressure → → 256 QR code for accessing the rescue card → 29 → QR code for accessing the rescue card G SOS button 8 Fuel ller ap with: 344 9 TIREFIT kit → 292 → 299 A Tow-starting or towing away → 302 5 Tow-starting or towing away → 302 B First-aid kit (so sided) → 290 6 Flat tire → 290 C Warning triangle → 289 4 To check and re ll operating uids Starting assistance 17 18 Digital Operator's Manual Calling up the the Digital Digital Oper Operat ator's or's Manual Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info 5 Operator's Manual 5 Õ R R R R R R The Digital Operator's Manual describes the functions and operation of the vehicle and the multimedia system. # Select one of the following menu items in the Digital Operator's Manual: R Search: search for keywords in order to nd quick answers to questions about the operation of the vehicle. Quick start: here is where you nd the rst steps towards setting up your vehicle. Tips: nd information that prepares you for certain everyday situations with your vehicle. Animations: watch animations of the vehicle functions. Messages: receive additional information about the messages in the Instrument Display. Bookmarks: gain access to your personally saved bookmarks. Language: select the language for the Digital Operator's Manual. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Back Adds bookmarks Picture Contents section Directions of movement of contents section Menu Some sections in the Digital Operator's Manual, such as warning notes, can be expanded and collapsed. methods hods of calling up tthe he Digital Digital OperAdditional met ator's at or's Manual: Digital Operator's Manual Direct access: open the required content in the Direct Digital Operator's Manual by pressing and holding an entry on the tab bar in the multimedia system: Instrument Instr ument Display: Display: call up brief information as display messages in the instrument cluster Voice Control Control System: System: call up via the voice control system For safety reasons, the Digital Operator's Manual is deactivated while driving. 19 20 General notes Protection Prot ection of tthe he en envir vironment onment + ENVIR ENVIRONMENT ONMENTAL AL NO NOTE TE Environmental damage due to operating conditions and personal driving style The pollutant emission of the vehicle is directly related to the way you operate the vehicle. Operate your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner to help protect the environment. Please observe the following recommendations on operating conditions and personal driving style. Operating ating conditions: Oper # Make sure that the tire pressure is correct. # Do not carry any unnecessary weight (e.g. roof luggage racks once you no longer need them). # Adhere to the service intervals. A regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. # Always have maintenance work carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop. Per ersonal sonal driving driving sty style: le: # Do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. # Do not warm up the vehicle while stationary. # Drive carefully and maintain a suitable distance from the vehicle in front. # Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking. # Change gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. # Switch o the vehicle in stationary traffic, e.g. by using the ECO start/stop function. # Drive in a fuel-e cient manner. Observe the ECO display for an economical driving style. Environment Envir onmental al issues and rrecommendations ecommendations It is recommended that you re-use or recycle materials instead of just disposing of them. The relevant environmental guidelines and regulations serve to protect the environment and must be strictly observed. Genuine Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz parts par ts + ENVIR ENVIRONMENT ONMENTAL AL NOTE NOTE Environmental damage due to not using recycled reconditioned components Mercedes‑Benz AG o ers recycled reconditioned components and parts with the same quality as new parts. The same entitlement from the Limited Warranty is valid as for new parts. # Use recycled reconditioned components and parts from Mercedes‑Benz AG. General notes * NOTE Impairment of the operating e ciency of the restraint systems from installing accessory parts or from repairs or welding Airbags and Emergency Tensioning Devices, as well as control units and sensors for the restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle: R Doors R Door pillars R Door sills R Seats R Cockpit R Instrument cluster R Center console R Lateral roof frame # # # Do not install accessory parts such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. Have accessory parts retro tted at a quali ed specialist workshop. You could jeopardize the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system, may malfunction. Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and accessory parts that have been speci cally approved for your vehicle model. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to strict quality inspections. Each part has been specially developed, manufactured or selected for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and adapted to them. Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should be used. More than 300,000 di erent genuine MercedesBenz parts are available for Mercedes-Benz models. All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for necessary service and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts delivery centers provide for quick and reliable parts service. 21 Always specify the vehicle identi cation number (VIN) (/ page 343) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts. Operat Oper ator's or's Manual This Operator's Manual and the Digital Operator's Manual in the vehicle describe the following models and the standard and special equipment for your vehicle: R The models and the standard and special equipment available at the time of this Operator's Manual going to press. R The models and the standard and special equipment only available in certain countries. R The models and the standard and special equipment, which will only be available at a later date. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This is also the case for systems relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may di er from that in the descriptions and illustrations. 22 General notes The original purchase agreement for your vehicle contains a list of the equipment in your vehicle at the time of delivery. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The Operator's Manual, Supplement, further supplementary documents and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle. Service Ser vice and vehicle vehicle oper operation ation Vehicle operation operation outside the the US USA A or Canada When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe the following points: R Service points or replacement parts may not be available immediately. R Unleaded fuel may not be available for vehicles with a catalytic converter. Leaded fuel may cause damage to the catalytic converter. R The fuel may have an extremely low octane number. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage. Some Mercedes-Benz models are available in Europe through our European Delivery Program. For more information, please consult an authorized Mercedes‑Benz service center, or write to one of the following address: In the USA: A: the US Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes-Benz Drive Sandy Springs, GA 30328 In Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Maintenance Maint enance Your customer advisor con rms the service in the service report. Roadside Assist Assistance ance The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program o ers technical help in the case of a breakdown. Your calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) (USA) 1-800-387-0100 (Canada) You can nd further information in the MercedesBenz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" section in the Service and Warranty booklet (Canada). You will nd both in the vehicle document wallet. Changee of address Chang address or cchang hangee of oowner wnership ship In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Noti cation of address change" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) on the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service (Canada) on 1-800-387-0100. We General notes can then reach you in a timely fashion, if necessary. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all literature in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. If you have purchased a used vehicle, please send us the "Notice of Purchase of Used Car" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. & WARNING Risk of accident or injury due to incorrect modi cations on electronic component parts Operating Oper ating safety safety Possible danger danger due to to subst substances ances hazar hazardous dous to health In compliance with Proposition 65 ("Prop65"), the following detachable label has been added to each vehicle sold in California: & WARNING Risk of accident due to malfunctions or system failures To avoid malfunctions or system failures: # Always have the prescribed service and maintenance work as well any required repairs carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop. Modi cation of electronic components, their so ware or wiring could impair their function and/or the function of other networked component parts or safety-relevant systems. This can endanger the operating safety of the vehicle. # Never tamper with the wiring and electronic component parts or their so ware. # You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop. Observe the "On-board electronics" section in "Technical data". 23 24 General notes & WARNING Risk of re due to ammable materials on hot parts of the exhaust system Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # When driving on unpaved roads or o road, regularly check the vehicle underside. # Remove trapped plants or other ammable material, in particular. # If there is damage, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to driving too fast and due to impacts to the vehicle underbody or suspension components In the following situations, in particular, there is a risk of damage to the vehicle: R The vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a high curb or an unpaved road R The vehicle is driven too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a curb, speed bump or pothole R A heavy object strikes the underbody or suspension components In situations such as these, damage to the body, underbody, suspension components, wheels or tires may not be visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, may no longer absorb the resulting force as intended. If the underbody paneling is damaged, ammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can collect between the underbody and the underbody paneling. These materials may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # Have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. or # If driving safety is impaired while continuing your journey, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, while paying attention to road and tra c conditions, and contact a quali ed specialist workshop. Vehicles wit withh a 48 V on-board on-board electrical electrical syst system em & DAN ANGER GER Risk of fatal injury by touching damaged high-voltage components Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system contain individual high-voltage components. These high-voltage components are under high voltage. General notes If you modify component parts of these highvoltage components or touch damaged component parts, you may be electrocuted. High voltage components may be damaged in an accident, although the damage may not be visible. # Never perform modi cations to component parts of high-voltage components. # Never touch damaged component parts of high-voltage components. # Never touch component parts of highvoltage components a er an accident. Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system contain high voltage components. These components are marked with a high voltage label: All work on high voltage components must be carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop. Declaration Declar ation of confor conformity mity for for vehicle vehicle installed installed radio components components USA: "Radio based devices of this vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause 25 undesired operation.Changes or modi cations not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment." Canada: "This vehicle contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada’s licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference. (2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the devices." "Les émetteurs/récepteurs dans cette véhicule sont conforme aux CNR d’Innovation, Sciences et Développement économique Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : 1) Ces appareils ne doivent pas produire de brouillage; 2) Ces appareils doivent accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement." 26 General notes Diagnostics Diagnos tics connection The diagnostics connection is a technical interface in the vehicle. It is used, for example, in the context of repair and maintenance work or for reading out vehicle data by a specialist workshop. Diagnostic devices should therefore only be connected by a quali ed specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of accident due to connecting devices to the diagnostics connection If you connect devices to the diagnostics connection of the vehicle, the function of vehicle systems and operating safety may be impaired. # For safety reasons, we recommend that you only use and connect products approved by your authorized MercedesBenz Center. & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. # Always install the oor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always su cient room for the pedals. # Do not use loose oor mats and do not place oor mats on top of one another. * NOTE Battery discharging from using devices connected to the diagnostics connection Using devices at the diagnostics connection drains the battery. # Check the charge level of the battery. # If the charge level is low, charge the battery, e.g. by driving a considerable distance. Please also note the information about the 12 V battery and short-distance trips in the "Driving and Parking" chapter (/ page 147). General notes Connecting and using another device with the diagnostics connection can have the following e ects: R Malfunctions in the vehicle system R Permanent damage to vehicle components Please refer to the warranty terms and conditions for this matter. Moreover, connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions inspection during the main inspection. Quali ed specialis specialistt work workshop shop An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a qualied specialist workshop. It has the necessary special skills, tools and quali cations to correctly carry out the work required on your vehicle. This particularly applies to safety-relevant works. Always have the following work carried out on your vehicle at a quali ed specialist workshop: R Safety-relevant works R Service and maintenance work R Repair work R Modi cations as well as installations and conversions R Work on electronic components R Vehicles with with 48 V on-board on-board electr electrical ical system: system: work on the high-voltage component of the 48 V on-board electrical system Mercedes‑Benz recommends a Mercedes‑Benz service center. Correct Corr ect use of the the vvehicle ehicle If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. 27 Observe the following information in particular when driving your vehicle: R The safety notes in this Operator's Manual, vehicle-speci c supplements and further supplementary documents R Technical data for the vehicle R Tra c rules and regulations R Laws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles Notes for for persons persons wit withh electr electronic onic medical aids Mercedes-Benz AG cannot, despite carefully developing vehicle systems, completely rule out the interaction of vehicle systems with electronic medical aids such as cardiac pacemakers. In addition, there are components installed in the vehicle that, regardless of the operating status of the vehicle, can generate magnetic elds on a par with permanent magnets. These elds can be found, for example, in the area around the multimedia and sound system or also in the area of the seats, depending on the vehicle equipment. 28 General notes For this reason, the following can occur in isolated cases, depending on the aids used: R Medical aids malfunctioning R Adverse health e ects Observe the notes and warnings of the manufacturer of the medical aids; if in doubt, contact the device manufacturer and/or your doctor. If there is continuing uncertainty concerning the possibility of medical aids malfunctioning, MercedesBenz AG recommends using only few electrical vehicle systems and/or maintaining a distance from the components. Only have repairs and maintenance work in the area of the following components carried out by a quali ed specialist workshop: R Vehicle components carrying live voltage R Transmission antenna R Multimedia system and sound system If you have any queries or suggestions, consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Problems Pr oblems with with your your vvehicle ehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may a ect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the problem diagnosed and recti ed. If the problem is not resolved to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem again with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if necessary, contact us at one of the following addresses: In the the USA: USA: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Assistance Center One Mercedes-Benz Drive Sandy Springs, GA 30328 In Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. Customer Relations Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Repor eporting ting safe safety ty defects defects USA only: USA The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Tra c and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Tra c Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it nds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to the https:// www.safercar.gov/; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590,: USA. General notes You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from: https://www.safercar.gov Canada only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under subsection 18.4 (4) of the Motor Vehicle Safety Regulations. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc. If Transport Canada received similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it nds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer or Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc. To contact Transport Canada, you may call the Defect Investigations and Recalls Division toll-free in Canada at 1-800-333-0510 or 819-994-3328in the Gatineau-Ottawa area or internationally; you may also go to the following websites for more information: R R English: https://www.tc.gc.ca/recalls French: https://www.tc.gc.ca/rappels Limited Limit ed Warr Warranty anty * NO NOTE TE Damage to the vehicle arising from violation of these operating instructions. Damage to the vehicle can arise from violation of these operating instructions. This damage is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New‑ or Used-Vehicle Warranty. # Follow the instructions in these operating instructions on proper operation of your vehicle as well as on possible vehicle damage. QR code for for rrescue escue card QR codes are attached in the fuel ller ap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly nd the appropriate rescue card for 29 your vehicle. The current rescue card contains the most important information about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric lines. Further information can be obtained at https:// www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code. Dataa stor Dat storage age Data pr Data processing ocessing in the the vehicle vehicle Electronic control Electronic control units Electronic control units are installed in your vehicle. Control units process data which, for example, they receive from vehicle sensors, generate themselves or exchange between themselves. Some control units are required for the safe operation of your vehicle, some assist you when driving, such as driver assistance systems, while others enable convenience or infotainment functions. The following provides you with general information regarding data processing in the vehicle. Additional information regarding exactly which data in your vehicle are collected, saved and transmitted to third parties, and for what purpose, 30 General notes can be found in the information directly related to the functional characteristics in question in their respective Operator's Manual. This information is also available online and, depending on the vehicle equipment, digitally. ersonal sonal data Per Every vehicle is identi ed by a unique vehicle identi cation number. Depending on the country, this vehicle identi cation number can be used by, for example, governmental authorities to determine the identity of the owner. There are other possibilities to use data collected from the vehicle to identify the owner or driver, such as the license plate number. Therefore, data generated or processed by control units may be attributable to a person or, under certain conditions, become attributable to a person. Depending on which vehicle data are available, it may be possible to make inferences about, for example, your driving behavior, your location, your route or your use patterns. Legal req Legal requir uirements ements reg regar arding ding the the disclosur disclosuree of data If legally required to do so, manufacturers are, in individual cases, legally obliged to provide governmental entities, upon request and to the extent required, data stored by the manufacturer. For example, this may be the case during the investigation of a criminal o ense. Governmental entities are themselves, in individual cases and within the applicable legal framework, authorized to read out data from the vehicle. In the case of an accident, information that can help with an investigation can, therefore, be taken from the airbag control unit, for example. Operational dataa in tthe he vehicle vehicle Operational dat This is data regarding the operation of the vehicle, which have been processed by control units. This includes the following data, for example: R Vehicle status information such as the speed, longitudinal acceleration, lateral acceleration, number of wheel revolutions or the fastened seat belts display R Ambient conditions, such as temperature, rain sensor or distance sensor Generally, the use of these data is temporary; they will not be stored beyond the period of operation and will only be processed within the vehicle itself. Control units o en contain data memories for vehicle keys, for example. Their use permits the temporary or permanent documentation of technical information about the vehicle's operating state, component loads, maintenance requirements and technical events or malfunctions. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following data are stored: R Operating status of system components, such as ll levels, tire pressure or battery status R Malfunctions or faults in important system components, such as lights or brakes R System reactions in special driving situations, such as airbag deployment or the intervention of stability control systems R Information on events leading to vehicle damage In certain cases, it may be required to store data that would have otherwise been used only temporarily. This may be the case if the vehicle has detected a malfunction, for example. General notes If you use services, such as repair services and maintenance work, stored operational data as well as the vehicle identi cation number can be read out and used. They can be read out by service network employees, such as workshops and manufacturers or third parties, such as breakdown services. The same is true in the case of warranty claims and quality assurance measures. In general, the readout is performed via the legally prescribed port for the diagnostics connection in the vehicle. The operational data that are read out document technical states of the vehicle or of individual components and assist in the diagnosis of malfunctions, compliance with warranty obligations and quality improvement. To that end, these data, in particular information about component loads, technical events, malfunctions and other faults may be transmitted along with the vehicle identi cation number to the manufacturer. Furthermore, the manufacturer is subject to product liability. For this reason the manufacturer also uses operational data from the vehicle, for example, for recalls. These data can also be used to examine the customer's warranty and guarantee claims. Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service outlet or at your request as part of repair or maintenance work. R Convenience Convenience and infotainment infotainment functions You can store convenience settings and individual settings in the vehicle and change or reset them at any time. Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following settings, for example: R Seat and steering wheel positions R Suspension and climate control settings R Individual settings, such as interior lighting R Depending on the selected equipment, you can import data into vehicle infotainment functions yourself. Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following data, for example: R Multimedia data, such as music, lms or photos for playback in an integrated multimedia system R 31 Address book data for use in connection with an integrated hands-free system or an integrated navigation system Entered navigation destinations Data about the use of Internet services These data for convenience and infotainment functions may be saved locally in the vehicle or they may be located on a device which you have connected to the vehicle, such as a smartphone, USB ash drive or MP3 player. If you have entered these data yourself, you can delete them at any time. This data is transmitted from the vehicle to third parties only at your request. This applies, in particular, when you use online services in accordance with the settings that you have selected. Smartphone integration ation (e.g. Android Android A Aut utoo or Smar tphone integr Apple CarPlay®) If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can connect your smartphone or another mobile end device to the vehicle. You can then control them by means of the control elements integrated in the vehicle. Images and audio from the smart- 32 General notes phone can be output via the multimedia system. Certain information is simultaneously transferred to your smartphone. Depending on the type and integration, this includes position data, day/night mode and other general vehicle statuses. For more information please consult the Operator's Manual of the vehicle/infotainment system. This integration allows the use of selected smartphone apps, such as navigation or music player apps. There is no further interaction between the smartphone and the vehicle; in particular, vehicle data is not directly accessible. The type of additional data processing is determined by the provider of the app being used. Which settings you can make, if any, depends on the speci c app and the operating system of your smartphone. Online services ser vices Wireless ireless ne netw twor orkk connection If your vehicle has a wireless network connection, it enables data to be exchanged between your vehicle and additional systems. The wireless network connection is made possible by the vehicle's own transmitter and receiver or by a mobile end device that you have brought into the vehicle, for example, a smartphone. Online functions can be used via the wireless network connection. This includes online services and applications/apps provided to you by the manufacturer or by other providers. Manuf Manufactur acturer's er's services ser vices Regarding the manufacturer's online services, the individual functions are described by the manufacturer in a suitable place, for example, in the Operator's Manual or on the manufacturer's website, where the relevant data protection information is also given. Personal data may be used for the provision of online services. Data are exchanged via a secure connection, such as the manufacturer's designated IT systems. Any personal data which are collected, processed and used, other than for the provision of services, is done so exclusively on the basis of legal permission. This is the case, for example, for a legally prescribed emergency call system, a contractual agreement or when consent has been given. You can have services and functions, some of which are subject to a fee, activated or deactiva- ted. This excludes legally prescribed functions and services, such as an emergency call system. Third par ty ser services vices Third party If you use online services from other providers (third parties), these services are the responsibility of the provider in question and subject to that provider's data protection conditions and terms of use. As a general rule, the manufacturer has no in uence on the content exchanged. For this reason, when services are provided by third parties, please ask the service provider in question for information about the type, extent and purpose of the collection and use of personal data. Dataa prot Dat protection ection rights rights Depending on your country or the equipment and range of functions of your vehicle as well as the services you use and the services on o er, you are entitled to di erent data protection rights. Further information on data protection and your data protection rights can either be found on the manufacturer's website or you will receive this information as part of the various services and General notes service o ers. There you will also nd the contact information for the manufacturer and its data protection o cers. At a workshop, for example, with the support of a specialist and possibly for a fee, you can have data read out which is stored only locally in the vehicle. MBUX multimedia system/Mer system/Mercedes cedes me connect If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX multimedia system or Mercedes me connect, additional data about the vehicle's operation, the use of the vehicle in certain situations, and the location of the vehicle may be compiled by the MBUX multimedia system or Mercedes me connect. For additional information, please refer to the "MBUX multimedia system" section and/or the Mercedes me connect Terms and Conditions. Event Ev ent data data rrecor ecorders ders USA US A only: only: This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: R How various systems in your vehicle were operating R Whether or not the driver and front passenger seat belts were buckled/fastened R How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal and R How fast the vehicle was traveling This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which accidents and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and accident location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, 33 could combine EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the special equipment, such as law enforcement, can read the information by accessing the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data may be used in civil and criminal matters as a tool in accident reconstruction, accident claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval (CDR) tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel. MBUSA will not share EDR data with others without the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the lessee. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA or 34 General notes its subsidiaries and a liates; or, as required by law. Warning: The EDR is a component of the Restraint System Module. Tampering with, altering, modifying or removing the EDR component may result in a malfunction of the Restraint System Module and other systems. State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that con ict with federal regulation are pre-empted. This means that in the event of such con ict, the federal regulation governs. As of December 2016, 17 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs. Copyr Cop yright ight Free and open sour source ce so ware ware Information on license for free and open-source so ware used in your vehicle can be found on the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet and with updates on the following website: https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource Regist egister ered ed trademarks trademarks R R R R R R R R R R Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. DTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. Dolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarks of DOLBY Laboratories. ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered trademarks of Daimler AG. HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation. iPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. Burmester® is a registered trademark of Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH. Microso ® and Windows Media® are registered trademarks of Microso Corporation. SIRIUS® is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio Inc. HD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiquity Digital Corporation. R R Gracenote® is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc. ZAGAT Survey® and related brands are registered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC. Occupant safety Res estr traint aint system system Protection Prot ection provided provided by by tthe he res restr traint aint syst system em The restraint system includes the following components: R Seat belt system R Airbags R Child restraint system R Child seat securing systems The restraint system can help prevent the vehicle occupants from coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an accident. In the event of an accident, the restraint system can also reduce the forces to which the vehicle occupants are subjected. A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly. Depending on the detected accident situation, Emergency Tensioning Devices and/or airbags supplement the protection o ered by a correctly worn seat belt. Emergency Tensioning Devices and/or airbags are not deployed in every accident. In order for the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information: R Fasten seat belts correctly. R Sit in an almost upright seat position with their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the oor, if possible. R Always secure persons under 5 (1.50 m) tall in an additional restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and airbag generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also not possible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the airbag deploying. 35 Reduced rres estr traint aint system system protection protection & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to modi cations to the restraint system Vehicle occupants may no longer be protected as intended if alterations are made to the restraint system. # Never alter the parts of the restraint system. # Never tamper with the wiring or any electronic component parts or their so ware. If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only: for details, contact our Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1‑800‑367‑6372). Res estr traint aint syst system em functionality When the vehicle is switched on, a self-test is performed, during which the 6 restraint system 36 Occupant safety warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a few seconds a er the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are then functional. Malfunctioning res restr traint aint system system A malfunction has occurred in the restraint system if: R The 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the vehicle is switched on R The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. Function of the the rres estr traint aint syst system em in an accident How the restraint system works is determined by the severity of the impact detected and the type of accident anticipated: R Frontal impact R Rear impact R Side impact R Rollover The activation thresholds for the components of the restraint system are determined based on the evaluation of the sensor values measured at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the components of the restraint system must take place in good time at the start of the collision. Factors which can only be seen and measured a er a collision has occurred do not play a decisive role in the deployment of an airbag. Nor do they provide an indication of airbag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed signi cantly without an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are a ected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be deployed even though the vehicle su ers only minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal members are hit, this may result in su ciently high levels of vehicle deceleration. Depending on the detected deployment situation, the components of the restraint system can be activated or deployed independently of each other: R Emergency Tensioning Device: frontal impact, rear impact, side impact, rollover R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: frontal impact R Knee airbag: frontal impact R Side airbag: side impact R Window curtain airbag: side impact, rollover, frontal impact R PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side: side impact The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o . If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the Occupant safety journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct (/ page 45). & WARNING Risk of burns from hot air bag components The air bag parts are hot a er an air bag has been deployed. # Do not touch the air bag parts. # Have a deployed air bag replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop as soon as possible. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a quali ed specialist workshop a er an accident. Take this into account, particularly if an Emergency Tensioning Device is triggered or an airbag deployed. If the Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered or an airbag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released: R The bang will not generally a ect your hearing. R In general, the powder released is not hazardous to health but may cause short-term breathing di culties to persons su ering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing di culties. Airbags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling or environmental protection measures. National guidelines regarding waste disposal must be observed. In California, see https://dtsc.ca.gov/. Using the search function, you will nd information on perchlorate, for example. Seat belts Protection provided Protection provided by by the the seat belt Always fasten your seat belt correctly before starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly. 37 & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrectly fastened seat belt If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction suddenly. # Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Always observe the instructions about the correct driver's seat position and adjusting the seat (/ page 89). In order for the correctly worn seat belt to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information: R The seat belt must not be twisted and must t tightly and snugly across the body. R The seat belt must be routed across the center of the shoulder and as low down across the hips as possible. 38 R R R R R R Occupant safety The shoulder section of the seat belt should not touch your neck nor be routed under your arm or behind your back. Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. Push the lap belt down as far as possible across your hips and pull tight with the shoulder section of the belt. Never route the lap belt across your abdomen. Pregnant women must also take particular care with this. Never route the seat belt across sharp, pointed, abrasive or fragile objects. Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Never allow babies and children to travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant. Never secure objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Always observe the instructions for loading the vehicle when securing objects, luggage or loads (/ page 104). Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, are ever placed between a person and the seat. The seat belts on the following seats are equipped with a special seat belt retractor: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats Activate or deactivate the special seatbelt retractor (/ page 53). If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 50). Limitations Limit ations of tthe he protection protection provided provided bbyy the the seat belt & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position The seat belt does not o er the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you could slip beneath the seatbelt and become injured. # Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder. & WARNING Risk of injury or death when additional restraint systems are not used for persons with a smaller stature Persons under 5 (1.50 m ) tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without a suitable additional restraint system. # Always secure persons under 5 (1.50 m) tall in a suitable restraint system. Occupant safety & WARNING Danger of injury or death due to blocked seat belt anchorage The restraint e ect of the seat belt is impaired if objects between the front seat and the door are blocking the movable seat belt anchorage on the front seat. # Before starting a journey, make sure that there are no objects between the front seat and the door. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to damaged or modi ed seat belts Seat belts cannot provide protection in the following situations: R The seat belt is damaged, has been modied, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed R The seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty R Modi cations have been made to the Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt anchorage or seat belt retractor Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modi ed or damaged seat belts could tear or fail in the event of an accident, for example. Modi ed Emergency Tensioning Devices could accidentally trigger or fail to function as intended. # Never modify the seat belt system, for example the seat belt, seat belt buckle, Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt anchorage and seat belt retractor. # Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn and clean. # Always have the seat belts checked immediately a er an accident at a qualied specialist workshop. Only use seat belts which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. 39 & WARNING Risk of injury or death from deployed pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices that have been deployed are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protective function. # Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices immediately replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a quali ed specialist workshop a er an accident. * NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it may become trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. # Always ensure that an unused seat belt is fully retracted. 40 Occupant safety Fast astening ening and adjusting adjusting seat belts If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap cannot be pulled out any further. To adjust adjust tthe he seat belt height: height: press and hold the belt guide release and slide seat belt outlet 3 into the desired position. # To engag engagee the the seat belt outlet: outlet: let go of the belt guide release and ensure that seat belt outlet 3 locks into position. % A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly. Observe the notes on fastening the seat belt (/ page 37). # * NO NOTE TE Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front passenger seat is unoccupied and a seat belt is buckled # Always engage seat belt tongue 2 of the seat belt into seat belt buckle 1 of the corresponding seat. When the front passenger seat is unoccupied and the seat belt tongue of the seat belt is engaged in the seat belt buckle, components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side, e.g. the Emergency Tensioning Device. # Only buckle the seat belts as intended. % Observe the notes on stowage areas (/ page 104). Information on installing a child restraint system and on children traveling in the vehicle can be found in the "Children in the vehicle" section (/ page 53). Seat belt adjustment adjustment function Vehicles wit withh PRE-SAFE PRE-SAFE®: A er a front seat belt has been fastened, the automatic seat belt adjustment may apply a certain tightening force. Do not hold the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can activate and deactivate the seat belt adjustment function using the multimedia system (/ page 40). Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating seat belt adjustment adjustment via the multimedia syst system em Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Belt Adjustment. Occupant safety Releasing seat belts # Press the release button in the seat belt buckle and guide the seat belt back with the seat belt tongue. Seat belt war warning ning function for for the the dr driv iver er and fr front ont passeng passenger er The ü seat belt warning lamp in the Instrument Display is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts correctly. The ü seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds every time the vehicle is started. In addition, a warning tone may sound. When the driver's and front passenger's doors are closed and the driver and front passenger have fastened their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out. In the following cases, the seat belt warning lights up during a journey if: R The vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) and the driver's or front passenger seat belt is not fastened. R The driver or front passenger unfastens their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. Airbags Over Ov ervie view w of airbags 41 The installation location of an airbag is identi ed by the AIRBAG symbol. When enabled, an airbag can provide additional protection for the respective vehicle occupant. Potential protection provided by each airbag: R Knee airbag: thigh, knee and lower leg R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: head and ribcage R Side airbag: ribcage, also pelvis for front seat occupants R Window curtain airbag: head * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # 1 2 3 4 5 6 Driver's knee airbag Driver's airbag Front passenger airbag Front passenger knee airbag Window curtain airbag Side airbag Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. & WARNING Risk of injury or death if the codriver airbag is enabled If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be struck by the codriver airbag during an accident. 42 Occupant safety NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-speci c information (/ page 59). Also, always observe the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat. Infor Information mation on automatic automatic front front passeng passenger er airbag shut shutoo The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o . If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct (/ page 45). * NOTE Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front passenger seat is unoccupied In an accident, the components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side if: R There are heavy objects on the front passenger seat. R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the front passenger seat and the front passenger seat is unoccupied. # # Store objects in a suitable place. Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Depending on the detected accident situation, the window curtain airbag on the front passenger side may deploy. The airbag is deployed regardless of whether the front passenger seat is occupied. Protectiv Prot ectivee capacity of tthe he airbags Depending on the accident situation, an airbag may supplement the protection o ered by a correctly fastened seat belt. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot perform its intended protective function. Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the following: R Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant women must take particular care to ensure that the lap belt never lies across the abdomen. R Adopt the correct seat position and keep as far away as possible from the airbags. R Observe the following information. # Always make sure that there are no objects between the airbag and vehicle occupant. Occupant safety To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment of an airbag, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information in particular: R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat correctly; the driver's seat and front passenger seat should be moved as far back as possible. When doing so, always observe the information on the correct driver's seat position (/ page 89). R Only hold the steering wheel by the steering wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. R Always lean against the seat backrest when the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards or against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbags. R The occupants must always keep their feet on the oor. Do not put your feet on the cockpit, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbag. R If children are traveling in the vehicle, observe the additional notes (/ page 50). R Always store and secure objects correctly. Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an airbag from functioning correctly. Each vehicle occupant must always make sure of the following in particular: R There are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an airbag. R There are no objects between the seat, door and door pillar (B-pillar). R There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks. R There are no accessory parts, such as mobile navigation devices, mobile phones or cup holders, within the deployment area of an airbag, e.g. on the cockpit, on the door, on the side window or on the side trim. In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning straps or retaining straps must be routed or attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an airbag. Always comply with the accessory manufacturer's installation instructions and, in particular, the notes on suitable places for installation. R 43 There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place. Limitations Limit ations of the the protection protection provided provided bbyy airbags & WARNING Risk of injury due to modi cations to the cover of an airbag If you modify the cover of an airbag or a x objects such as stickers to it, the airbag may no longer function correctly. # Never modify the cover of an airbag and do not a x objects to it. The installation location of an airbag is identi ed by the AIRBAG symbol (/ page 41). & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to the use of unsuitable seat covers Due to unsuitable seat covers, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as intended. 44 Occupant safety In addition, the operation of the automatic front passenger airbag shuto could be restricted. # You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the corresponding seats by Mercedes-Benz. & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctioning sensors in the door The function of the airbags can be impaired due to modi cations or incorrect work performed on the doors or door trim, or if the doors are damaged. # Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. # Always have work on the doors or door trim carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed airbag A deployed airbag no longer o ers any protection. # Have the vehicle towed to a quali ed specialist workshop in order to have the deployed airbag replaced. Have deployed airbags replaced immediately. Status of tthe he front front passenger passenger fr front ont airbag Function of the the aut automatic omatic front front passeng passenger er airbag shut shutoo The automatic front passenger airbag shuto is able to detect whether the front passenger seat is occupied by a person or a child restraint system. The front passenger airbag and front passenger knee airbag are enabled or disabled accordingly. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects under the co-driver seat Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can interfere with the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shuto or damage the system. # Do not store any objects under the codriver seat. # When the co-driver seat is occupied, make sure that no objects are trapped under the co-driver seat. When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-speci c information (/ page 59). Also, always observe the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 59). A person on the front passenger seat must observe the following information: R Fasten seat belts correctly (/ page 37). R Sit in an almost upright seat position with their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the oor, if possible. The front passenger airbag may otherwise be disabled by mistake, for example, in the following situations: R The front passenger transfers their weight by supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest. Occupant safety R The front passenger sits in such a way that their weight is raised from the seat surface. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to a disabled front passenger airbag The front passenger airbag is disabled when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: R The classi cation of the person in the front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. R The front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible. R The person is seated correctly. # Both before and during the journey, ensure that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct. 45 Function of tthe he P PASSEN ASSENGER GER AIR BA BAG G indicator indicator lamps lamps If the front passenger seat is occupied, the classication of the person or child restraint system on the front passenger seat takes place a er the front passenger airbag shuto self-test. The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the status of the front passenger airbag. Always observe the notes on the function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (/ page 45). Self-tes Self-t estt of automatic automatic front front passeng passenger er airbag shuto When the vehicle is switched on, a self-test is performed during which the two PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up simultaneously. 46 Occupant safety The status of the front passenger airbag is displayed via the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps a er the self-test: R ON is lit: the front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident. The indicator lamp goes out a er 60 seconds. R ON and OFF ar aree not not lit: the front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident. R OFF is lit: the front passenger airbag is disabled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is o , only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front passenger airbag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be o . If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp and the 6 restraint system warning lamp light up simultaneously, the front passenger seat may not be used. Also in this case, do not install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat. Have the automatic front passenger airbag shuto checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. Status display If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation. A er inst installing alling a rearw rearwar ard-f d-facing acing child child res restr traint aint syst system em on the the front front passeng passenger er seat: seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit continuously. & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the co-driver airbag is enabled If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the co-driver seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o , the co-driver airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. # # Always ensure that the co-driver airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-speci c information (/ page 59). Depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be o . In this case, do not install the rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. Instead, install the rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. A er inst installing alling a forw forwar ard-f d-facing acing child child rres estr traint aint syssystem on tthe he front front passeng passenger er seat: seat: depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be o . Always observe the following information. Occupant safety & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect positioning of the forward-facing child restraint system If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat that is positioned too close to the cockpit, in the event of an accident, the child could: R come into contact with the vehicle interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example R be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o . # Always move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment. While doing so, always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet. If necessary, # adjust the seat belt outlet and the front passenger seat accordingly. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-speci c information (/ page 59). person is sitting on tthe If a person he front front passeng passenger er seat: seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be o , depending on the person's stature. A person on the front passenger seat must always observe the following information: R If the front passenger seat is occupied by an adult or a person with a stature corresponding to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be o . This indicates that the front passenger airbag is enabled. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously, an adult or person with a build corresponding to that of an adult must not use the front passenger seat. Instead, they should use a rear seat. R 47 If the front passenger seat is occupied by a person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is either lit continuously or remains o , depending on the classi cation. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o : move the front passenger seat as far back as possible, or the person of smaller stature should use a rear seat. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously: the person of smaller stature should not use the front passenger seat. & WARNING Risk of injury or death when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit a er the self-test, the front passenger airbag is disabled. 48 Occupant safety If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: R The classi cation of the person in the front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. R The person is seated properly with a correctly fastened seat belt. R The front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Child restraint system on the front passenger seat (/ page 59) PRE-SAFE® syst PRE-SAFE system em Function of PRE-S PRE-SAFE AFE® (anticipat (anticipator oryy occupant prot protection) ection) PRE-SAFE® is able to detect certain critical driving situations and implement pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. PRE-SAFE® can implement the following measures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat. R Closing the side windows. R Vehicles with with sliding sunroof: sunroof: Closing the sliding sunroof. R Vehicles with with memory memor y function: Moving the front passenger seat to a more favourable seat position. R Vehicles with with multicontour multicontour seat: seat: Increasing the air pressure in the seat side bolsters of the seat backrest. R PRE-SAFE® Sound: provided that the multimedia system is switched on, generating a brief noise signal to stimulate the innate protective mechanism of a person's hearing. * NOTE Damage caused by objects in the footwell or behind the seat The automatic adjustment of the seat position may result in damage to the seat and/or the object. # Stow objects in a suitable place. Rever ersing sing the the PRE-SAFE PRE-SAFE® syst system em measur measures es If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed. You will need to perform certain settings yourself. # If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced, move the seat backrest back slightly. The locking mechanism releases. Function of PRE-S PRE-SAFE AFE® PL PLUS US (anticipator (anticipatoryy occupant protection protection plus) PRE-SAFE® PLUS can detect certain impacts, particularly an imminent rear impact, and take pre- Occupant safety emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. These measures cannot necessarily prevent an imminent impact. PRE-SAFE® PLUS can implement the following measures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat. R Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle is stationary. This brake application is canceled automatically when the vehicle pulls away. If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed. System System limits The system will not initiate any action in the following situations: R When backing up The system will not initiate any braking application in the following situations: R Whilst driving or R When entering or exiting a parking space while using Active Parking Assist Function of PRE-SAFE PRE-SAFE® Im Impulse pulse Side If an imminent side impact is detected, PRESAFE® Impulse Side can pre-emptively move the front seat vehicle occupant's upper body towards the center of the vehicle. It does this by rapidly in ating an air cushion in the outer seat side bolster of the seat backrest on the side on which the impact is anticipated. This increases the distance between the door and the vehicle occupant. If PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side has been deployed or is faulty, the PRE-SAFE Impulse Side Inoperative See Operator's Manual(/ page 354) display message appears. Safel Saf elyy tr transpor ansporting ting childr children en in the the vehicle vehicle Always observe Always observe when cchildr hildren en are are traveling traveling in the the vehicle % Also strictly observe the safety notes for the speci c situation. In this way you can recog- 49 nize potential risks and avoid dangers if children are traveling in the vehicle (/ page 50). Be diligent diligent Bear in mind that negligence when securing a child in the child restraint system may have serious consequences. Always be diligent in securing a child carefully before every journey. Never allow babies and children to travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant. To improve protection for children younger than 12 years old or under 5 (1.50 m) in height, Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the following information: R Always secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle. R The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child. R The vehicle seat must be suitable for installing a child restraint system. Accident statistics show that children secured on the rear seats are generally safer than children secured on the front seats. For this reason, 50 Occupant safety Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat. The gener generic ic ter term m child child res restr traint aint system system The generic term child restraint system is used in this Operator's Manual. A child restraint system is, for example: R A baby car seat R A rearward-facing child seat R A forward-facing child seat R A child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guide Mercedes-Benz recommends using a child booster seat with a backrest. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child. Observee laws laws and leg legal al rreq equir uirements ements Observ Always observe the legal requirements when using a child restraint system in the vehicle. Observe st Observe standar andards ds for for cchild hild res restr traint aint systems systems All child restraint systems must meet the following standards: R U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 R Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2 Con rmation that the child restraint system complies with the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint system. This con rmation can also be found in the installation instructions that are included with the child restraint system. Detecting Det ecting rrisk isks, s, av avoiding oiding danger danger Securing systems Securing systems ffor or child child rres estr traint aint systems systems in the vvehicle ehicle Only use the following securing systems for child restraint systems: R The LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings R The vehicle's seat belt system R The Top Tether anchorages Installing an LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is preferred. Simply attaching to the securing rings on the vehicle can reduce the risk of installing the child restraint system incorrectly. When securing a child with the integrated seat belt of the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system, always comply with the permissible gross weight for the child and child restraint system (/ page 54). A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 40 lbs (18 kg) in weight or until they reach a height where a three-point seat belt can be fastened properly without a booster seat. Mercedes-Benz recommends a suitable child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guide. Adv dvant antag agee of a rrearw earwar ard-f d-facing acing child child rres estr traint aint syssystem It is preferable to transport a baby or a small child in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system. In this case, the child sits in the opposite direction to the direction of travel and faces backwards. Occupant safety Babies and small children have comparatively weak neck muscles in relation to the size and weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cervical spine during an accident can be reduced in a rearward-facing child restraint system. Alwayss secure secure a cchild hild res restr traint aint system system correctly correctly Alway & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect installation of the child restraint system The child can then not be protected or restrained as intended. # Be sure to comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use. # Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system always rests on the sitting surface of the seat. # Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system. # Use child restraint systems only with the original cover designed for them. # & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to unsecured child restraint systems in the vehicle If the child restraint system is incorrectly installed or not secured, it can come loose. The child restraint system could be ung around and hit vehicle occupants. # Always install child restraint systems correctly, even when not in use. # Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. R Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions as well as the vehicle-speci c information: Installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on the right and le rear seats (/ page 54). Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat (/ page 58). Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat (/ page 59). Observe the speci c instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 59). If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 45). Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system. Also secure Top Tether if present. - Always replace damaged covers with genuine covers. R R 51 52 Occupant safety Do not not modify the the child child rres estr traint aint system system & WARNING Risk of injury due to modi cations to the child restraint system The child restraint system can no longer function properly. This poses an increased risk of injury. # Never modify a child restraint system. # Only a x accessories which have been specially approved for this child restraint system by the child restraint system's manufacturer. Only use child Only child res restr traint aint syst systems ems which which ar aree in pr proper oper wor working king condition & WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by the use of damaged child restraint systems Child restraint systems or their retaining systems that have been subjected to stress in an accident may not be able to perform their intended protective function. It may be the case that the child cannot be properly restrained. # Always immediately replace child restraint systems that have been damaged or involved in an accident. # Have the securing systems for the child restraint systems checked at a quali ed specialist workshop before installing a child restraint system again. Avoid direct direct sunlight & WARNING Risk of burns when the child seat is exposed to direct sunlight If the child restraint system is exposed to direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up excessively. Children could su er burns from these parts, particularly the metallic parts of the child restraint system. # Always make sure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. # # # Cover the child restraint system with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool before securing a child into it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Observee when st Observ stopping opping or parking parking & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children le unattended in the vehicle If children are le unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. Occupant safety In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # # # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children. & WARNING Danger to life due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle If people, particularly children, are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious injury or danger to life. # Never leave persons, children in particular, unattended in the vehicle. Notes on automatic front passenger airbag shuto (/ page 44). Over Ov ervie view w of suitable suitable seats in the the vehicle vehicle for for instalinstalling a cchild hild res restr traint aint system system R Le /right /right rear seat Preferred securing system: ® LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing system ¯ Also secure Top Tether if present (/ page 56). Center Center rear rear seat Securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt ¯ Also secure Top Tether if present (/ page 56). Alternative securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt Activ ctivating ating or deactivating deactivating tthe he special seat belt re retr tract actor or of the the seat belt Also secure Top Tether if present (/ page 56). Fr Front ont passenger passenger seat Securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt Be sure to observe: R If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 45). 53 & WARNING Risk of injury or death if a seat belt is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion If the seat belt is released while the vehicle is in motion, the special seat belt retractor is deactivated and the child restraint system is no longer correctly secured. The seat belt is drawn in slightly by the inertia reel and cannot be immediately closed again. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. 54 # Occupant safety Activate the special seat belt retractor again and correctly secure the child restraint system. When enabled, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belts of the front passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured. The seat belts on the following seats are equipped with a special seat belt retractor: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats Installing hild res restr traint aint system system Installing a cchild # When installing a child restraint system, always observe the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions as well as the information in this Operator's Manual. # Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat belt outlet. # Engage the seat belt tongue in the seat belt buckle. Activ ctivating ating the the special seat belt retr retract actor or Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia reel retract it again. When the special seat belt retractor is activated, you will hear a ratcheting sound. # Push the child restraint system down until the seat belt sits tightly. # Deactivating tthe Deactivating he special seat belt retr retract actor or Press the release button of the seat belt buckle. # Hold the seat belt tongue and guide back to the seat belt outlet. # Installing Inst alling a LATCH-type LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child child rres estr traint aint system system on tthe he le and right right rear rear seats Installing a LATCH-type Installing LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child child rres estr traint aint system system on tthe he le and right right rear rear seats & WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest may fold forwards, even when you are driving. R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pushed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury. R Objects or loads in the trunk or cargo compartment will not be restrained by the seat backrest. # Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip. Occupant safety If the le and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the display on the instrument cluster. If the center seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock veri cation indicator will be visible. & WARNING Risk of injury or death if the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system together is exceeded. Too much load may be placed on the LATCHtype (ISOFIX) child restraint system and the child may not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident, for example. # If the child and the child restraint system together weigh more than the permissible gross mass of 73 lb (33 kg ), only use a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with which the child is secured with the vehicle seat belt. # Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available. Always comply with the information about the mass of the child restraint system: R In the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used R On a label on the child restraint system, if present Regularly check that the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system is still complied with. When installing a child restraint system, observe the following: O Always observe the correct use of the seats and consider their suitability for attaching a child restraint system. O Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used. O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards. 55 ® When installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system, also observe the following: O When using a baby baby car seat in weight weight gr group oup 0/0+ and a rrearw earwar ard-f d-facing acing child child rres estr traint aint system weight eight group group I on a rear rear seat: seat: system in w adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system. O When using a forw forwar ard-f d-facing acing cchild hild res restr traint aint syst system em in w weight eight group group I: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. In addition, the backrest of the child restraint system must lie as at as possible against the backrest of the vehicle seat. A er the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immediately and adjust all head restraints correctly. O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint systems in weight group II or III. Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use. 56 Occupant safety O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate. * NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the center seat during installation of the child restraint system # # # # 1 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting bracket Before every journey, make sure that the LATCHtype (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged correctly in both mounting brackets in the vehicle. Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped. Remove and stow away covers 1. Attach the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system to both mounting brackets in the vehicle. A er removing the child seat, reattach covers 1. Fast astening ening a Top Top Tet Tether her & WARNING Risk of injury or death if the rear seat backrests are not locked a er Top Tether belts are installed The rear seat backrests may fold forwards when you are driving. As a result, child restraint systems will no longer be able to perform their intended protec- Occupant safety 57 tive function. This may also cause additional injuries. # Always lock rear seat backrests a er installing Top Tether belts. # Observe the lock veri cation indicator. If the le and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the display on the instrument cluster. If the center seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock veri cation indicator will be visible. ¯ If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt: The risk of injury may be reduced by Top Tether. The Top Tether belt enables an additional connection between the child restraint system attached with LATCH-type (ISOFIX) (le and right rear seats) or the seat belt (all rear seats) and the vehicle. # # # # # If necessary, slide head restraint 1 upwards (/ page 95). Fold up cover 2 of Top Tether anchorage 3. Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) or beltsecured child restraint system with Top Tether. In doing so, comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. # # # Guide Top Tether belt 4 under head restraint 1 between the two head restraint bars. Hook Top Tether hook 5 of Top Tether belt 4 into Top Tether anchorage 3 without twisting. Tension Top Tether belt 4. In doing so, comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Fold down cover 2 of Top Tether anchorage 3. If necessary, slide head restraint 1 downwards (/ page 95). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt 4. 58 Occupant safety Securing the Securing the cchild hild rres estr traint aint system system with with the the seat belt Securing the Securing the cchild hild res restr traint aint syst system em with with the the seat belt on tthe he rrear ear seat & WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest may fold forwards, even when you are driving. R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pushed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury. R Objects or loads in the trunk or cargo compartment will not be restrained by the seat backrest. # Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip. If the le and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the display on the instrument cluster. If the center seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock veri cation indicator will be visible. When installing belt-secured cchild hild res restr traint aint sy syssinstalling a belt-secured tem, observe observe the the follo following: wing: O Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used. O Also secure Top Tether if present (/ page 56). O When using a weight weight categor categoryy 0/0+ baby baby car seat and a w weight eight cat categor egoryy I rearw rearwar arddfacing child child res restr traint aint system system on a rrear ear seat: seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system. O When using a weight weight categor categoryy I forw forwar arddfacing child child res restr traint aint system: system: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. O O O O A er the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immediately and adjust all head restraints correctly. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat. If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint systems in weight category II or III. Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use. The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly. The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate. Occupant safety O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards. The seat belts on the following seats are equipped with a special seatbelt retractor: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats When enabled, the special seatbelt retractor ensures that the seat belts of the front passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured (/ page 53). # Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat surface of the rear seat. # Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forward from the seat belt outlet. Notes on rrearw earwar ard-f d-facing acing and forw forwar ard-f d-facing acing cchild hild res estr traint aint systems systems on the the front front passeng passenger er seat & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the co-driver airbag is enabled If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the co-driver seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o , the co-driver airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. # Always ensure that the co-driver airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. # NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. Observe the speci c instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 59). 59 Always observe the status of the front passenger airbag on the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp: R When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag must always be disabled. This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously (/ page 45). R If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o , the front passenger airbag is enabled. The front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident. Securing the Securing the child child rres estr traint aint system system with with the the seat belt on tthe he fr front ont passenger passenger seat When installing a belt-secured child restraint system on the front passenger seat, always observe the following: O Observe the notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 59). O Observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. 60 Occupant safety O When using a forward-facing child restraint system in weight category I: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. A er the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immediately and adjust all head restraints correctly. O The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat. O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint systems in weight category II or III. Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate. O Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system. # The seat belt on the front passenger side is equipped with a special seatbelt retractor. When enabled, the special seatbelt retractor ensures that the seat belt does not slacken once the child seat is secured (/ page 53). # & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could a ect the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shuto . # Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system. # Always make sure that the child restraint system is correctly installed. # # # # # Set the front passenger seat as far back as possible and move the seat into the highest position if possible. Fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment. Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position. Set the seat backrest to the most vertical position possible. Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the front passenger seat accordingly. Occupant safety Child safety safety locks # Activating ctivating or deactivating deactivating tthe he child child safe safety ty lock lock ffor or the rear rear doors # & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children le unattended in the vehicle If children are le unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children. & WARNING Danger to life due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle If people, particularly children, are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious injury or danger to life. # Never leave persons, children in particular, unattended in the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children le unattended in the vehicle If children are traveling in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. # Always activate the installed child safety locks if children are traveling in the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # # 61 There are child safety locks for the rear doors and the rear side windows. The child safety lock on the rear doors secures each door separately. The doors can no longer be opened from the inside. 62 Occupant safety Activating ctivating and deactivating deactivating the the child child safety safety lock for the the rear rear side windows R Indicator lamp 1 is o : via the switch on the corresponding rear door or driver's door Notes on pets pets in tthe he vehicle vehicle & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to animals le unsecured or unattended in the vehicle # # Press the lever in direction 1 (activate) or 2 (deactivate). Make sure that the child safety locks are working properly. # To activat activate/deactiv e/deactivat ate: e: press button 2. The rear side window can be opened or closed in the following cases: R Indicator lamp 1 is lit: via the switch on the driver's door If you leave animals in the vehicle unattended or unsecured, they could possibly press buttons or switches. An animal may: R Activate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example R Switch systems on or o and endanger other road users Unsecured animals may be thrown around in the vehicle in the event of an accident or sudden steering and braking maneuvers and injure vehicle occupants in the process. Occupant safety # # Never leave animals in the vehicle unattended. Always correctly secure animals while driving, e.g. using a suitable animal carrier. 63 64 Opening and closing SmartKey Smar tKey Overvie Over view w of Smar SmartKe tKeyy functions & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children le unattended in the vehicle If children are le unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. # # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children. * NOTE Damage to the SmartKey caused by magnetic elds # Keep the SmartKey away from strong magnetic elds. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Vehicle SmartKey with panic alarm 1 Locks 2 Indicator lamp 3 Unlocks 4 Opens/closes the trunk lid 5 Panic alarm % If indicator lamp 2 does not light up a er pressing the Ü or ß button, the battery is weak or possibly discharged. Replace the battery as soon as possible. Replace the SmartKey battery (/ page 66). The SmartKey locks and unlocks the following components: R Doors R Fuel ller ap R Trunk lid If the vehicle is not opened within approximately 40 seconds a er unlocking, it locks again. Antithe protection is activated again. Do not keep the SmartKey together with electronic devices or metal objects. This can a ect the SmartKey's functionality. Opening and closing Activating/deactiv ctivating/deactivating ating tthe he acoustic acoustic locking locking veri eri cation signal Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Acoustic Lock. Arming/disar Ar ming/disarming ming tthe he panic alarm Req equir uirements: ements: R The vehicle is switched o . # or # To activat activate: e: press button 1 for approximately one second. A visual and audible alarm is triggered. Press the start/stop button. A SmartKey belonging to the vehicle must be detected in the vehicle. Changing the the unlocking unlocking settings settings Possible unlocking functions of the SmartKey: Central unlocking R Unlocking the driver's door and fuel ller ap R To switch switch betw between een settings: settings: press the Ü and ß buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the indicator lamp ashes twice. Options if the unlocking function for the driver's door and fuel ller ap has been selected: R To unlock unlock the the vvehicle ehicle centr centrally ally:: press the Ü button twice. R Vehicles with with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door, only the driver's door and the fuel ller ap are unlocked. # # To deactiv deactivat ate: e: brie y press button 1 again. 65 Deactivating Deactiv ating the the function of tthe he Smar SmartKey tKey Vehicles with with KEYLESS-GO: if you deactivate the function of the SmartKey, the KEYLESS-GO functions are also deactivated. Access or drive authorization by KEYLESS-GO is then no longer possible with that particular SmartKey. Activate the function of the SmartKey so that all its functions will again be available. You can also deactivate the function of the SmartKey to reduce the energy consumption of the SmartKey if you do not use the vehicle or a SmartKey for an extended period of time. # To deactiv deactivat ate: e: press the ß button on the SmartKey twice in quick succession. The SmartKey indicator lamp ashes twice brie y and lights up once. # To activ activat ate: e: press any button on the SmartKey. % When the vehicle is started with the SmartKey in the marked space of the center console, the function of the SmartKey is automatically activated (/ page 144). 66 Opening and closing Remo emoving/inser ving/inserting ting the the emergency emergency key Remo emoving ving the the emergency emergency key % You can use the intermediate position of emergency key 2 to attach the SmartKey to a key ring. + ENVIRONMENT ONMENTAL AL NO NOTE TE Environmental ENVIR damage due to improper disposal of batteries Replacing the the SmartKe Smar tKeyy battery battery & DAN ANGER GER Risk of fatal injuries due to swallowing batteries # # # Press release button 1. Emergency key 2 is pushed out slightly. Pull out emergency key 2 until it engages in the intermediate position. Press release button 1 again and fully remove emergency key 2. Inser ting tthe Inserting he emergency emergency key # Press release button 1. # Insert emergency key 2 to the intermediate position or fully until it engages. Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. Swallowing batteries may cause severe internal burns to occur within two hours. There is a risk of fatal injury. # Keep batteries out of the reach of children. # If the cap and/or the battery compartment does not close securely, do not use the SmartKey any longer and keep out of the reach of children. # If batteries are swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. # Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a quali ed specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. Req equir uirements: ements: R You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop. # Remove the emergency key (/ page 66). Opening and closing Problems Pr oblems with with the the SmartKey Smar tKey,, troubleshoo troubleshooting ting You can no long longer er lock lock or unlock unlock tthe he vehicle vehicle Possible causes: R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. # # # # # # # # Press release knob 2 down fully and slide cover 1 in the direction of the arrow. Fold out cover 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove. Remove battery compartment 3 and take out the discharged battery. Insert the new battery into battery compartment 3. Observe the positive pole marking in the battery compartment and on the battery when doing this. Push in battery compartment 3. Re-attach cover 1 and push it until it engages. # # # Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 64). Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary (/ page 66). Use the replacement SmartKey. Use the emergency key to lock or unlock (/ page 71). Have the SmartKey checked at a quali ed specialist workshop. There is interf There interfer erence ence from from a pow power erful ful radio radio signal source source Possible causes if the function of the SmartKey is impaired: R High voltage power lines R Mobile phones R Electronic devices (notebooks, tablets) 67 R Shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate systems or automatic barriers # Make sure that there is su cient distance between the SmartKey and the potential source of interference. You have have lost lost a SmartKey Smar tKey # Have the SmartKey deactivated at a quali ed specialist workshop. # If necessary, have the mechanical lock replaced as well. 68 Opening and closing Doors Unloc nlocking/opening king/opening the the door doorss from from the the inside # # To unlock unlock a rear rear door: door: pull the rear door handle. The locking pin pops up when the rear door is unlocked. To open a rear rear door: door: pull the rear door handle again. Centrallyy loc Centrall locking king and unlocking unlocking the the vehicle vehicle from from the inside To unlock: unlock: press button 1. To lock: lock: press button 2. % The buttons are also on the front passenger door. This does not lock or unlock the fuel ller ap. The vehicle is not unlocked: R If you have locked the vehicle using the SmartKey R If you have locked the vehicle using KEYLESSGO # # Locking/unloc Loc king/unlocking king the the vehicle vehicle wit withh KEYLESS-GO Req equir uirements: ements: The SmartKey is outside the vehicle. R The distance between the SmartKey and the vehicle does not exceed 3 (1 m). R The driver's door and the door on which the door handle is used are closed. R # To unlock unlock and open a front front door: door: pull door handle 2. Locking pin 1 pops up when the door is unlocked. Opening and closing % Further information on convenience closing (/ page 79). If you open the trunk lid from outside, it is automatically unlocked. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle caused by unintentionally opening the trunk lid R R # When using an automatic car wash When using a high pressure cleaner Deactivate the function of the SmartKey in these situations. Problems Pr oblems with with KEYLESS-GO, troubleshoo troubleshooting ting You can no longer longer lock lock or unlock unlock the the vvehicle ehicle using KEYLESS-GO Possible causes: R The function of the SmartKey has been deactivated. R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. or # Make sure that the SmartKey is at a minimum distance of 10 (3 m) away from the vehicle. Observe the notes: On washing the vehicle in a car wash (/ page 281) R On using a high pressure cleaner (/ page 282) 69 R # # # # To unlock unlock the the vvehicle: ehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle. To lock lock tthe he vvehicle: ehicle: touch sensor surface 1 or 2. Convenience Convenience closing: touch recessed sensor surface 2 until the closing process has been completed. # # # # Activate the function of the SmartKey (/ page 65). Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 64). Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary (/ page 66). Use the replacement SmartKey. Use the emergency key to lock or unlock (/ page 71). 70 # Opening and closing Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a quali ed specialist workshop. In the following situations, there is a danger of being locked out when the function is activated: R While the vehicle is being tow-started or pushed R If the vehicle is being tested on a roller dynamometer There is interf There interfer erence ence from from a power powerful ful radio radio signal sour source ce Possible causes if the function of KEYLESS-GO is impaired: R High voltage power lines R Mobile phones R Electronic devices (notebooks, tablets) R Shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate systems or automatic barriers # Make sure that there is su cient distance between the SmartKey and the potential source of interference. Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating the the automatic automatic loc locking king ffeaeature The vehicle is locked automatically when the vehicle is switched on and the wheels are turning faster than walking pace. Power closing function & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the doors close automatically # # To activat activate: e: press and hold button 2 for approximately ve seconds until an acoustic signal sounds. To deactivat deactivate: e: press and hold button 1 for approximately ve seconds until an acoustic signal sounds. Body parts or objects can become trapped, causing injuries. # Ensure that no body parts or objects are in the closing area. # Automatic closing of the doors can be canceled by pulling the outer or inner door handle. If you push the door into the lock to the rst detent position, the power closing function will automatically pull the door into the lock. Opening and closing Locking/unloc Loc king/unlocking king the the driv driver's er's door with with tthe he emerg emergency ency key % If you wish to lock the vehicle entirely using the emergency key, rst press the button for locking from the inside while the driver's door is open. Then proceed to lock the driver's door using the emergency key. # # # # Insert the emergency key as far as it will go into opening 1 in the cover. Pull and hold the door handle. Pull the cover on the emergency key as straight as possible away from the vehicle until it releases. Release the door handle. # # # 71 To unloc unlock: k: turn the emergency key counterclockwise to position 1. To loc lock: k: turn the emergency key clockwise to position 1. Carefully press the cover onto the lock cylinder until it engages and is seated rmly. Trunk Opening the the trunk trunk lid & DAN ANGER GER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the vehicle is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch o the vehicle before opening the trunk lid. # Never drive with the trunk lid open. # Remove the emergency key (/ page 66). 72 Opening and closing * NOTE Damage to the trunk lid by obstacles above the vehicle Vehicles with with trunk trunk lid convenience convenience closing The trunk lid swings upwards when it is opened. # Therefore, make sure that there is su cient clearance above the trunk lid. # # # # If the trunk lid is stopped in an intermediate position, pull it upwards. Release it as soon as it begins to open. With the trunk lid opening height restriction activated, manually pull the stopped trunk lid upwards. If an obstacle obstructs the trunk lid during the automatic opening process, blockage detection will stop the trunk lid. The automatic blockage detection function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. Pull the trunk lid handle. Vehicles with with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: ACCESS: Make a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper (/ page 75). Closing the the trunk trunk lid # Pull remote operating switch 1 until the trunk lid opens. or # Press and hold the p button on the SmartKey. & WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured su ciently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Opening and closing # # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around. Before the journey, secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. Notes on closing the the tr trunk unk lid: your vehicle is equipped with automatic SmartKey recognition. If a SmartKey belonging to the vehicle is detected in the vehicle, the trunk lid will not be locked and will pop open again. Note that the trunk lid will not be locked if the following situation occurs: R You have locked the vehicle and close the trunk lid while a SmartKey belonging to the vehicle is inside the vehicle. and R A second SmartKey belonging to the vehicle is not detected outside the vehicle. Automatic SmartKey recognition is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # # Before locking, ensure that at least one SmartKey belonging to the vehicle is outside the vehicle. To close the the tr trunk unk lid: pull the trunk lid downwards using the handle recess and push it closed. Vehicles with with trunk trunk lid convenience convenience closing & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during automatic closing of the trunk lid Parts of the body could become trapped. There may be people in the closing area. # Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process. # Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: R Press the p button on the SmartKey. R Press or pull the remote operating switch on the driver's door. R Press the closing or locking button on the trunk lid. R 73 Pull the trunk lid handle. Vehicles with with HANDS-FREE A ACCESS: CCESS: it is also possible to stop the closing process by making a kicking movement below the rear bumper. # To close tthe he tr trunk unk lid: pull the trunk lid handle. Release it as soon as it begins to close. # If the trunk lid is stopped in an intermediate position, push it downwards. The trunk lid will continue to close. 74 Opening and closing SmartKey must be in the vicinity of the vehicle. Vehicles wit withh HANDS-FREE ACCESS ACCESS # With the trunk lid completely open, make a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper (/ page 75). # Push remote operating switch 1 until the trunk lid is fully closed. # Press closing button 1 on the trunk lid. Vehicles with with KEYLESS-GO # Press locking button 2 on the trunk lid. If a SmartKey is detected outside the vehicle, the trunk lid will close and the vehicle will be locked. # With the trunk lid completely open, press and hold the p button on the SmartKey. The Trunk lid aut automatic omatic rev rever ersing sing function The trunk lid is equipped with automatic blockage detection with a reversing function. If an obstacle obstructs the trunk lid during the automatic closing process, it will automatically open again. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function The reversing function will not react: To so , light and thin objects, e.g. ngers R Towards the end of the closing procedure R Opening and closing In these situations in particular, the reversing function cannot prevent someone being trapped. # Ensure that no body parts are in the closing area. # If someone is trapped, use one of the following options: R Press the p button on the SmartKey. R Press the remote operating switch on the driver's door. R Press the closing or locking button on the trunk lid. R Pull the trunk lid handle. HANDS-FREE ACCESS ACCESS function % A warning tone sounds while the trunk lid is opening or closing. & WARNING Risk of burns caused by a hot exhaust system The vehicle exhaust system can become very hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system. # Always ensure that you only make a kicking movement within the detection range of the sensors. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle caused by unintentionally opening the trunk lid R With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open, close or interrupt trunk lid movement by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper. The kicking movement triggers the opening or closing process alternately. Observe the notes when opening (/ page 71) and closing (/ page 72) the trunk lid. R # or When using an automatic car wash When using a high pressure cleaner Deactivate the function of the SmartKey in these situations. 75 76 # Opening and closing Make sure that the SmartKey is at a minimum distance of 10 (3 m) away from the vehicle. When making the kicking movement, make sure that you are standing rmly on the ground. You could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice. Observe the following notes: R The SmartKey is behind the vehicle. R Stand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the vehicle while performing the kicking movement. R Do not come into contact with the bumper while making the kicking movement. R Do not carry out the kicking movement too slowly. R The kicking movement must be towards the vehicle and back again. 1 Detection range of the sensors If several consecutive kicking movements are not successful, wait ten seconds. System limits System The system may be impaired or may not function in the following cases: R The sensors are dirty, e.g. due to road salt or snow. R The kicking movement is made using a prosthetic leg. The trunk lid could be opened or closed unintentionally, in the following situations: R A person's arms or legs are moving in the sensor detection range, e.g. when polishing the vehicle or picking up objects. R Objects are moved or placed behind the vehicle, e.g. the hose of a fuel dispenser, a charging cable, or luggage R Clamping straps, tarps or other coverings are pulled over the bumper. R A protective mat with a length reaching over the trunk sill down into the detection range of the sensors is used. R The protective mat is not secured correctly. Deactivate the function of the SmartKey (/ page 65) or do not carry the SmartKey about your person in such situations. Switching Switc hing separat separatee trunk trunk locking locking on or o If you centrally unlock the vehicle while separate locking is activated, the trunk will remain locked. Opening and closing Unloc nlocking king and opening the the tr trunk unk from from inside with the emergency emergency release release Requir equirements: ements: R The 12 V vehicle battery is connected and charged. 77 Side windows Opening and closing the the side windows & WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window. # If someone is trapped, release the button immediately or pull it in order to close the side window again. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when closing a side window To switch switch on: slide the switch to position 1. To switch switch o : slide the switch to position 2. % If an accident has been detected, the trunk will unlock even if separate locking is switched on. # # # Press emergency release button 1 brie y. When closing a side window, body parts could be trapped in the closing area in the process. # When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. 78 Opening and closing If someone is trapped, release the button immediately or press the button in order to reopen the side window. When the vehicle is switched o , you can continue to operate the side windows. This function is available for around four minutes or until a front door is opened. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when children operate the side windows Aut utomatic omatic rever reversing sing function of the the side windows If an obstacle impedes a side window during the closing process, the side window will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. # Children could become trapped if they operate the side windows, particularly when unattended. # Activate the child safety lock for the rear passenger compartment side windows. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Requir equirements: ements: R The power supply or the vehicle has been switched on. 1 Closes 2 Opens The buttons on the driver's door take precedence. # To star startt automatic automatic operation: operation: press the W button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it. # To interr interrup uptt automatic automatic operation: operation: press or pull the W button again. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite there being reversing protection on the side window The reversing function does not react: R To so , light and thin objects, e.g. ngers. R During resetting. The reversing function cannot prevent someone from becoming trapped in these situations. Opening and closing # # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. If someone becomes trapped, press the W button to open the side window again. Convenience Conv enience opening (ventilating (ventilating the the vehicle vehicle bef befor oree star starting ting a jour journe ney) y) & WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window. # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. Req equir uirements: ements: R The SmartKey is in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. # Press and hold the Ü button on the SmartKey. The following functions are performed: R The vehicle is unlocked. R The side windows are opened. R The sliding sunroof is opened. R The panoramic sliding roof is opened. R The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is switched on. % If the roller sunblind of the panoramic sliding sunroof is closed, the roller sunblind is opened rst. # To interr interrup uptt convenience convenience opening: release the Ü button. # To continue convenience convenience opening: press and hold the Ü button again. 79 Convenience closing (closing tthe Convenience he vehicle vehicle fr from om outside) & WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during convenience closing When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof. # When the convenience closing feature is operating, monitor the entire closing process and make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. Req equir uirements: ements: R The SmartKey is in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. # Press and hold the ß button on the SmartKey. The following functions are performed: R The vehicle is locked. R The side windows are closed. Opening and closing 80 The sliding sunroof is closed. The panoramic sliding roof is closed. # To interr interrup uptt conv convenience enience closing: release the ß button. # To continue convenience convenience closing: press and hold the ß button again. % Convenience closing also functions with KEYLESS-GO (/ page 68). R R Resol esolving ving problems problems with with tthe he side windows & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatally injured if reversing protection is not activated If you close a side window again immediately a er it has been blocked, the side window will close with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active and body parts may become trapped. # Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. # has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (follow-up adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function. To stop the closing process, release the button or press the button again to reopen the side window. A side window window cannot cannot be closed and yyou ou cannot see the the cause. # Check to see whether any objects are in the window guide. # Adjust the side windows. Adjusting djusting the the side windows windows If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again immediately: # Immediately a er this, pull and hold the corresponding button again until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (re-adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function. If the side window is obstructed again and reopens again immediately: # Immediately a er this, pull and hold the corresponding button again until the side window The side windows cannott be opened or closed windows canno using the the conv convenience enience opening ffeatur eature. e. Possible causes: R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. # # Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 64). Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary (/ page 66). Sliding sunroof sunroof Opening and closing the the sliding sunr sunroof oof % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. Opening and closing & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the sliding sunroof is being opened and closed Body parts may become trapped in the range of movement. # During opening and closing, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement. # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or # Brie y press the button in any direction during automatic operation. The opening or closing process will be stopped. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the sliding sunroof is operated by children Children operating the sliding sunroof could get caught in the moving parts, particularly if unattended. # # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the roller sunblind is being opened and closed Body parts may become trapped between the roller sunblind and frame or sliding roof. # When opening or closing, make sure that no body parts are in the roller sunblind's range of movement. # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or # Brie y press the button in any direction during automatic operation. The opening or closing process will be stopped. 81 * NOTE Malfunction due to snow and ice Snow and ice may cause the sliding sunroof to malfunction. # Open the sliding sunroof only if it is free of snow and ice. * NOTE Damage caused by protruding objects Objects that protrude from the sliding sunroof may damage the seals. # Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof. * NOTE Damage to the sliding sunroof when a roof luggage rack is installed When a roof luggage rack is installed, raising or opening the sliding sunroof may be restricted. # Check whether the sliding sunroof can be raised or opened when a roof luggage rack is installed. 82 # Opening and closing If in doubt, do not raise or open the sliding sunroof. 1 To raise 2 To open 3 To close/lower Use the 3 button to operate the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblind. The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel can be operated only when the roller sunblind is open. # Check whether the sliding sunroof can be raised or opened when a roof luggage rack is installed. # To star startt automatic automatic operation: operation: press the 3 button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it. # To interr interrup uptt automatic automatic operation: operation: brie y press the 3 button in any direction. The opening/closing process will be stopped. Vehicles with with a panorama panorama roof roof with with pow power er tilt/ sliding panel: The automatic raising feature is available only when the sliding sunroof is closed or raised. Vehicles without without a panorama panorama rroof oof with with pow power er tilt/ sliding panel: The automatic opening and raising features are available only when the sliding sunroof is closed. Aut utomatic omatic rever reversing sing function of the the sliding sunroof If an obstacle obstructs the sliding sunroof during the closing process, the sliding sunroof will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite the reversing function being active In particular, the reversing function does not react: R To so , light and thin objects, e.g. ngers. R Towards the end of the closing procedure. R During resetting. # # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. Opening and closing or # # Brie y press the button in any direction during automatic operation. The closing process will be stopped. Automatic utomatic rever reversing sing function of the the roller roller sunblind If an obstacle obstructs the roller sunblind during the closing process, the roller sunblind will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function In particular, the reversing function does not react to so , light and thin objects, e.g. ngers. # When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement. Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or # Brie y press the button in any direction during the automatic closing process. The closing process will be stopped. Automatic utomatic functions of tthe he sliding sunr sunroof oof % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. Rain closing function when driving driving Vehicles with with a panorama panorama roof roof with with power power tilt/ sliding panel: If it starts to rain, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered while the vehicle is in motion. Automatic utomatic low lower ering ing function Vehicles with with a panorama panorama roof roof with with power power tilt/ sliding panel: If the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it will automatically be lowered slightly at higher speeds. At low speeds, it will be raised again automatically. 83 & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped by automatic lowering of the sliding sunroof At higher speeds, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered slightly at the rear. # Make sure that nobody reaches into the sliding sunroof's range of movement while the vehicle is in motion. # If somebody becomes trapped, brie y push the sliding sunroof button forwards or backwards. % By pushing or pulling the 3 button, you can interrupt the automatic functions "Rain closing function when driving" and "Automatic lowering". 84 Opening and closing Rectifying problems problems with with the the sliding sunr sunroof oof & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatal injuries when the sliding sunroof is closed again If the sliding sunroof is closed again immediately a er it has been blocked or reset, it will close with increased force. # Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or # Brie y press the button in any direction during the automatic closing process. The closing process will be stopped. The sliding sunroof sunroof cannot cannot be closed and you you cannot not see the the cause. % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: # Immediately a er automatic reversing, pull and hold the 3 button down again to the point of resistance until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof will be closed with increased force. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and opens again slightly: # Repeat the previous step. The sliding sunroof will be closed again with increased force. without a panorama panorama rroof oof with with power power tilt/ Vehicles without sliding panel: The sliding sunroof sunroof is no nott operating operating smoot smoothly hly.. # Reset the sliding sunroof. Rese esetting tting the the sliding sunroof sunroof # Push the 3 button up to the point of resistance repeatedly until the sliding sunroof is fully open. # Press the 3 button for another second. # Close the sliding sunroof. Vehicles wit withh a panorama panorama roof roof wit withh power power tilt/ sliding panel: The sliding sunroof sunroof or tthe he roller roller sunblind is not not oper operating ating smoothly smoothly.. # Reset the sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind. Rese esetting tting the the sliding sunr sunroof oof and tthe he rroller oller sunblind # Pull and hold the 3 button little by little until the sliding sunroof is fully closed. # Pull and hold the 3 button little by little until the roller sunblind is fully closed. # Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the sliding sunroof. Roller sun blinds Extending tthe Extending he rear rear side window window roller roller sunblinds * NOTE Damage to the inertia reel due to it snapping back If suddenly snapped back, the inertia reel may be damaged. Opening and closing # # Always move the roller sun blind by hand. Do not drive with the roller sun blind hooked in and rear side windows opened at the same time. Extending or retr Extending retracting acting tthe he rear rear-windo -window w rroller oller sunblind & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when extending or retracting the roller sunblind Body parts may become trapped in the roller sunblind's range of movement. # Ensure there are no body parts in the range of movement. # If someone becomes trapped, brie y press the button again. The opening or closing process will brie y be stopped. The roller sunblind will then return to its starting position. * NOTE Damage caused by objects # Pull the roller sunblind out by tab 1 and hook it onto brackets 2 at the top of the window. 85 Objects can cause the roller sunblind to malfunction. # Do not store objects on the rear shelf. # Ensure that the roller sunblind can move freely. # To eext xtend end or re retr tract act:: press button 1. Anti-the Anti-t he prot protection ection Function of the the immobilizer The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct SmartKey. 86 Opening and closing The immobilizer is automatically activated when the vehicle is switched o , and deactivated when the vehicle is switched on. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the vehicle if a valid SmartKey has been le inside the vehicle. % In the event the engine cannot be started (yet the vehicle’s battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). ATA (anti-the (anti-the alarm alarm system) system) Function of the the AT ATA A system system If the ATA system is armed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered in the following situations: R When a door is opened R When the trunk lid is opened R When the hood is opened R R When the interior motion sensor is triggered (/ page 87) When the tow-away alarm is triggered (/ page 87) The ATA system is armed automatically a er approximately ten seconds in the following situations: R A er locking the vehicle with the SmartKey R A er locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO Indicator lamp 1 ashes when the ATA system is armed. The ATA system is deactivated automatically in the following situations: R A er unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey R A er unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO R A er pressing the start/stop button with the SmartKey in the marked space (/ page 144) Opening and closing % When the Mercedes‑Benz emergency call system is active and the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a message is automatically sent to the Customer Assistance Center (/ page 264). % In the case of severe battery discharging, the anti-the alarm system is automatically deactivated to facilitate the next engine start. Deactivating the ATA Deactivating the # Press the Ü, ß or p button on the SmartKey. or # Press the start/stop button with the SmartKey in the stowage compartment (/ page 144) An audible and visual alarm is triggered if an alteration to your vehicle's angle of inclination is detected while the tow-away alarm is armed. The tow-away alarm is automatically armed a er approximately 60 seconds: R A er locking the vehicle with the SmartKey R A er locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO The tow-away alarm is only armed when the following components are closed: R Doors R Trunk lid Function of the the tow tow-awa -awayy alarm The tow-away alarm is automatically deactivated: R A er pressing the Ü or p button on the SmartKey R A er pressing the start/stop button with the SmartKey in the marked space (/ page 144) R A er unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO R When using HANDS-FREE ACCESS % This function may not be available in all countries. Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle (/ page 168). Deactivating the Deactivating the alar alarm m using KEYLESS-GO # Grasp the outside door handle with the SmartKey outside the vehicle. 87 Arming/disar Ar ming/disarming ming the the tow tow-awa -awayy alarm Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Arm or disarm Tow-away Protection. The tow-away alarm is armed again in the following cases: R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again. % If quick access is unavailable, select the Vehicle submenu in the Settings main menu to arm or disarm the tow-away alarm. Function of tthe he int inter erior ior motion motion sensor % This function may not be available in all countries. When the interior motion sensor is activated, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if movement is detected in the vehicle interior. 88 Opening and closing The interior motion sensor is activated automatically a er approximately ten seconds: R A er locking the vehicle with the SmartKey R A er locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO The interior motion sensor is only activated when the following components are closed: R Doors R Trunk lid The interior motion sensor is automatically deactivated: R A er pressing the Ü or p button on the SmartKey R A er pressing the start/stop button with the SmartKey in the marked space (/ page 144) R A er unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO R When using HANDS-FREE ACCESS The following situations can lead to a false alarm: R When there are moving objects such as mascots in the vehicle interior R When a side window is open R R When a sliding sunroof is open When a panoramic sliding sunroof is open Arming/deactiv Ar ming/deactivating ating the the int inter erior ior motion motion sensor Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Activate or deactivate Interior Motion Sensor. The interior motion sensor is activated again in the following cases: R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again. % If quick access is unavailable, select the Vehicle menu under Settings to activate or deactivate the interior motion sensor. Seats and stowing Notes on tthe he correct correct driv driver's er's seat position R & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion R R You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion # Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. R R R R Ensure the following when adjusting the steering wheel 1, seat belt 2 and driver's seat 3: R You are sitting as far away from the driver's airbag as possible, taking the following points into consideration: R You are sitting in an upright position R Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion 89 Your legs are not fully extended and you can depress the pedals properly The back of your head is supported at eye level by the center of the head restraint You can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent You can move your legs freely You can see all the displays on the instrument cluster clearly You have a good overview of the tra c conditions Your seat belt sits snugly against your body and passes across the center of your shoulder and across your hips in the pelvic area 90 Seats and stowing Seats Adjus djusting ting the the fr front ont seat manually manually and electr electrically ically (wit (without hout Seat Comfor Comfortt Pack Packag age) e) & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. You can adjust the seats when the vehicle is switched o . & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seat When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. # When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat. Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Children in the vehicle". & WARNING Risk of accident due to the driver's seat not being engaged The driver's seat may move unexpectedly while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Always make sure that the driver's seat is engaged before starting the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion # Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Seats and stowing Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. # While moving the seats, make sure that hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system. & WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being installed or being adjusted incorrectly If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. # Always drive with the head restraints installed. # Before driving o , make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-a position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position The seat belt does not o er the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you could slip beneath the seatbelt and become injured. # Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder. 91 & WARNING Risk of injury due to excessive strain on the grab handle If you apply your full body weight to the grab handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may be damaged or become loose from its anchorage. # Use the grab handles only to stabilize the seating position or to assist in getting in and out of the seat. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects under the co-driver seat Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can interfere with the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shuto or damage the system. # Do not store any objects under the codriver seat. # When the co-driver seat is occupied, make sure that no objects are trapped under the co-driver seat. 92 Seats and stowing Adjus djusting ting the the front front seat manually manually and electr electrically ically (with (with Seat Comf Comfor ortt Pack Packag age) e) * NOTE Damage to the seats when moving the seats back The seats may be damaged by objects when moving the seats back. # When moving the seats back, make sure that there are no objects in the footwell, under or behind the seats. 1 Seat backrest inclination 2 Seat height 3 Seat fore-and-a position # # To adjust adjust tthe he seat for ore-and-a e-and-a position: li lever 3 and slide the seat into the desired position. Make sure that the seat is engaged. 1 2 3 4 5 Seat backrest inclination Seat height Seat cushion inclination Seat fore-and-a position Seat cushion length Seats and stowing # # # To adjust adjust the the seat for ore-and-a e-and-a position: li lever 4 and slide the seat into the desired position. Make sure that the seat is engaged. To adjust adjust the the seat cushion lengt length: h: li lever 5 and slide the front section of the seat cushion forwards or backwards. Adjusting djusting the the front front seat electr electrically ically # Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 103). Adjusting djusting the the 4-wa 4-wayy lumbar support 1 2 3 4 5 6 Head restraint height Seat backrest inclination Seat height Seat cushion length Seat cushion inclination Seat fore-and-a position 1 2 3 4 Higher So er Lower Firmer 93 Seats and stowing 94 # Use buttons 1 to 4 to adjust the contour of the backrest. Head res restr traints aints Adjus djusting ting the the fr front ont seat head res restr traints aints manually & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion # Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. & WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being installed or being adjusted incorrectly If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. # Always drive with the head restraints installed. # Before driving o , make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-a position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head. # # # # To raise: raise: pull the head restraint up. To lower lower:: press release knob 1 in the direction of the arrow and push the head restraint down. To move move fforw orwar ards: ds: pull the head restraint forwards. To move move bac backw kwar ards: ds: press release knob 2 and push the head restraint backwards. Seats and stowing Adjus djusting ting the the head res restr traints aints of tthe he rear rear seats mec mechanically hanically Installing/remo Installing/r emoving ving the the rear rear seat head res restr traints aints # Removing emoving The head restraints can be removed only in vehicles with folding rear seat backrests. # 95 Push release knob 1 in the direction of the arrow and pull out the head restraint. Inst Installing alling Insert the head restraint such that the notches on the bar are on the le when viewed in the direction of travel. # Push the head restraint down until it engages. # Fold the rear seat backrest back until it engages. Con guring guring the seat settings settings Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort # # To raise: raise: pull the head restraint up. To lower lower:: press release knob 1 in the direction of the arrow and push the head restraint down. # # Release the rear seat backrest and fold it forwards slightly (/ page 107). Pull the head restraint upwards as far as it will go. 5 Seat Comfort Adjus djusting ting the the bac backr kres estt cont contour our in the the lumbar region of the the seat bac backr kres estt (lumbar) # Select Lumbar. # Select the settings Z for the desired seat. # Adjust the air cushions. Adjus djusting ting the the bac backr kres estt side bolst bolsters ers # Select Side Bolsters. 96 # Seats and stowing Adjust the air cushion for the desired seat. Setting tthe Setting he seat heating balance # Select Seat Heating Balance. # Adjust the heat distribution for the desired seat. Setting Se tting automatic automatic seat adjustment adjustment & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat a er calling up a driver pro le Selecting a user pro le may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the position saved under the user pro le. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process. # Make sure that when the position of driver's seat is being adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of movement. If there is a risk of someone becoming trapped, stop the adjustment process immediately: # a) Tap the warning message on the media display. % This setting is available only for individual user pro les. For the guest pro le, automatic seat adjustment cannot be switched on or o . b) Press a memory position button or a seat adjustment switch on the driver's door. The adjustment process will be stopped. Adjus djusting ting the the driv driver's er's seat position to to body size The vehicle will calculate a suitable driver's seat position on the basis of the driver's body size and set this directly. # To set set tthe he unit of measurement measurement:: select cm or ft/in. # Set the size using the scale. # Select Start Positioning. The driver's seat position will be adjusted to the body size that has been set. % If the driver's seat position calculated by the vehicle is not practical or comfortable, it can be changed manually at any time via the buttons. The exterior mirrors are not set via this function. Instead, they have to be set manually via the switches. or # Req equir uirements: ements: R Adapting the driver's seat position to body size: automatic seat adjustment has been switched on. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Automatic Seat Adjustment Switc Switching hing automatic automatic seat adjustment adjustment on/o When the active user pro le is changed while the vehicle is stationary, the driver's seat, outside mirrors and seat contour will automatically be adapted to the driver. # Select On or Off. Seats and stowing % You can also con gure these settings via the Mercedes me portal for your user pro le. By synchronizing the pro les in the vehicle and the Mercedes me connect pro les, you can carry over these settings for your vehicle. Further information about synchronizing user pro les . Setting Setting the the easy entr entryy and eexit xit feature feature Switch the function on or o . % If you use an individual user pro le and have set your body size, this information is carried over for the easy entry and exit feature. This causes the driver's seat to automatically move into the correct position . # Over Ov ervie view w of massage massage progr programs ams R R Hot Relaxing Back Combination of heat and massage. It starts by massaging the back. In addition, warm pressure points become noticeable, starting in the pelvic area. Hot Relaxing Shoulder Combination of heat and massage. It starts by massaging the R R R R R shoulders. In addition, warm pressure points become noticeable, starting in the pelvic area. Activating Massage Activating massage with upward-moving massage waves. Classic Massage Relaxing back massage. Wave Massage Regenerating massage via massage waves across the back and in the seat cushion. Mobilizing Massage Mobilizing massage with upward-moving massage waves. Can promote slower, deeper respiration. This can improve the supply of oxygen to cells and the brain. Active Workout, Backrest and Active Workout, Cushion: These programs require your cooperation. Alternating between tensing and releasing helps to improve blood ow to your muscles. Press against a pressure point as soon as you feel it. 97 Selecting the the massage massage progr program am ffor or the the front front seats Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Massage # Select a massage program (/ page 97). # Start the program for the desired seat ;. # To se sett the the massage massage intensity intensity:: switch High Intensity on or o . Rese esetting tting seat settings settings Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat Comfort # Select Î for the desired seat. # Con rm the prompt. Switching Switc hing the the seat heating on/o & WARNING Risk of burns due to repeatedly switching on the seat heating Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot. 98 Seats and stowing In particular, the health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be a ected or they may even su er burn-like injuries. # Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heating. Req equir uirements: ements: R The power supply is switched on. To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated a er it has been switched on repeatedly. * NOTE Damage to the seats caused by objects or documents when the seat heating is switched on When the seat heating is switched on, overheating may occur due to objects or documents placed on the seats, e.g. seat cushions or child seats. This could cause damage to the seat surface. # Make sure that no objects or documents are on the seats when the seat heating is switched on. Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are o , the seat heating is switched o . % The seat heating will automatically switch down from the three heating levels a er 8, 10 and 20 minutes until the seat heating is switched o . # Seats and stowing Setting Se tting the the panel heating 99 Steer eering ing wheel Adjus djusting ting the the st steer eering ing wheel manually Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Panel Heating When the seat heating is switched on, the armrests and the center console can be heated. # Switch the function for the desired seats on or o . & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion Switching Switc hing the the seat vventilation entilation on/o Req equir uirements: ements: R The power supply is switched on. # Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired blower setting has been reached. Depending on the blower setting, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are o , the seat ventilation is switched o . # Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. & WARNING Risk of entrapment for children when adjusting the steering wheel Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel. 100 Seats and stowing # # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Locking Locking Fold release lever 1 up as far as it will go. # Check and make sure that the steering column is locked by moving the steering wheel. # Adjusting djusting the the steer steering ing wheel electr electrically ically The steering wheel can be adjusted when the power supply is disconnected. 1 To adjust the distance to the steering wheel 2 To adjust the height # # # To unlock: unlock: push release lever 1 down as far as it will go. Adjust height 2 and distance 3 to the steering wheel. Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 103). Seats and stowing 101 Switching Switc hing the the st steer eering ing wheel heater heater on/o Requir equirements: ements: R The power supply or the vehicle has been switched on. When you switch the vehicle o , the steering wheel heater will switch o . Easy entry entr y and exit exit feature feature Using the the easy entry entr y and eexit xit ffeature eature & WARNING Risk of accident when pulling away during the adjustment process of the easy entry and exit feature You could lose control of the vehicle. # Always wait until the adjustment process is complete before driving o . & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the easy entry and exit feature # Turn the lever in the direction of arrow 1 or 2. If indicator lamp 3 lights up, the steering wheel heater is switched on. You and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. # Ensure that no one has a body part in the sweep of the steering wheel or driver's seat. If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the steering wheel: # Move the adjustment lever of the steering wheel. The adjustment process will be stopped. If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the driver's seat: # Press the seat adjustment switch. The adjustment process will be stopped. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Vehicles with with memor memoryy function: You can stop the adjustment process by pressing one of the memory function position switches. 102 Seats and stowing & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if children activate the easy entry and exit feature‑ Children could become trapped if they activate the easy entry‑ and exit feature, particularly when unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. If the easy entry and exit feature is active, the steering wheel will move upwards and the driver's seat will move back in the following situations: R You switch o the vehicle when the driver's door is open. R You open the driver's door when the vehicle is switched o . % The steering wheel will then move upwards only if it is not already as high as it will go. The driver's seat will then move backwards only if it is not already at the rear of the seat adjustment range. The steering wheel and the driver's seat will move back to the last drive position in the following cases: R You switch the power supply or the vehicle on when the driver's door is closed R You close the driver's door when the vehicle is switched on. The last drive position will be saved when: You switch o the vehicle. R Vehicles with with memor memoryy function: You call up the seat settings via the memory function. R Vehicles with with memory memor y function: You save the seat settings via the memory function. R Vehicles with with memory memor y function: Press one of the memory function position buttons to stop the adjustment process. Setting Se tting tthe he easy entry entr y and exit exit ffeature eature Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Automatic Seat Adjustment 5 Easy Entry/Exit # Activate or deactivate the function. Memoryy function Memor Function of tthe he memory memor y function & WARNING Risk of an accident if the memory function is used while driving If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. # Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary. Seats and stowing 103 & WARNING Risk of entrapment when adjusting the seat with the memory function When the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. # During the adjustment process of the memory function, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. # If someone becomes trapped, press a preset position button or seat adjustment switch immediately. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Operating Oper ating the the memory memor y function Storing oring You can use the memory function when the vehicle is switched o . Seat adjustments for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function. You can save settings for the following systems: R Seat, backrest and head restraint R Steering wheel R Outside mirrors R Head-up Display & WARNING Risk of entrapment if the memory function is activated by children Children could become trapped if they activate the memory function, particularly when unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # # Set the desired position for all systems. Brie y press the V memory button and then press preset position button 4, T or U within three seconds. An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are stored. 104 Seats and stowing # To call up: press or brie y hold preset position button 4, T or U. A er releasing the button, all systems are moved into the stored position. Stowag agee areas areas Notes on loading the the vehicle vehicle & DAN ANGER GER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the vehicle is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch o the vehicle before opening the trunk lid. # Never drive with the trunk lid open. & WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured su ciently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around. # Before the journey, secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over. & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open storage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # # # # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. Always make sure that objects do not protrude from storage spaces, parcel nets or storage nets. Close the lockable storage spaces before starting a journey. Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk. Vehicles with with aut automatic omatic front front passenger passenger airbag shuto shuto : Objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shuto or damage the system. Please observe the notes on the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shuto (/ page 44). Seats and stowing 105 & WARNING ‑ Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the vehicle is moving The cup holder cannot secure containers while the vehicle is moving. If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is moving, the container may be ung around and liquids may be spilled. The vehicle occupants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You could be distracted from tra c conditions and you may lose control of the vehicle. # Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary. # Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size. # Close the container, particularly if the liquid is hot. * NOTE Damage to the cup holder When the rear armrest is folded back the cup holder could become damaged. # Only fold the rear armrest back when the cup holder is closed. * NOTE Damage to the rear armrest due to body weight When folded out, the rear armrest can be damaged by body weight. # Do not sit or support yourself on the rear seat armrest. * NOTE Damage to the handle in the trunk oor If the handle in the trunk is le protruding, the handle may be damaged. # Before closing the trunk lid, detach the handle and press it down closed again. * NOTE Damage to the stowage compartment under the ashtray due to intense heat The stowage compartment under the ashtray is not heat resistant and could be damaged if you rest a lit cigarette on it. # Make sure that the ashtray is fully engaged. & WARNING ‑ Risk of re and injury from hot cigarette lighter You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter. In addition, ammable materials may ignite if: R you drop the hot cigarette lighter R a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example # Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. 106 Seats and stowing # # Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of burns from the tailpipe and tailpipe trims The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. # Always be particularly careful around the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area. # Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them. The driving characteristics of your vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. You should bear the following in mind when loading the vehicle: R Never exceed the permissible gross mass or the gross axle weight rating for the vehicle (including occupants). The values are speci ed on the vehicle identi cation plate on the vehicle's B-pillar. R The load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. R Always place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. R Secure the load using the tie-down eyes and distribute the load evenly. Notes on driving with a roof load R Evenly distribute the roof load, and place heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 104). R Drive attentively, and avoid suddenly pulling away, braking and steering as well as rapid cornering. R When transporting roof loads and when the vehicle is fully loaded or fully occupied, select drive programs ; and A. These are designed to focus on stability (/ page 154). % For more information on stowage compartments and stowage areas, please refer to the Digital Operator's Manual. Seats and stowing 107 Stowag agee spaces in the the vvehicle ehicle int inter erior ior Over Ov ervie view w of the the front front stow stowag agee com compar partments tments Through-loading Thr ough-loading featur featuree in the the rear rear bench bench seat (EASY (EASY-PAC -PACK K Quic Quickf kfold) old) Folding the the rear rear seat backr backres estt forw forwar ards ds & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant. # When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. 1 Stowage spaces in the doors 2 Stowage compartment in the armrest with USB ports and stowage space, e.g. for an MP3 player 3 Stowage compartment in the front center console with a USB port 4 Glove box & WARNING Risk of accident and injury if the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged Rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest can fold forwards. R As a result, the vehicle occupant is pressed against the seat belt. The seat belt cannot perform its intended protective function and could cause additional injuries. R Objects or loads in the trunk cannot be restrained by the seat backrest. # Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip. If the le and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster. If the center seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock veri cation indicator will be visible. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children. If you no longer require the folded-down seat backrest as a loading area, fold the backrest back into place. Req equir uirements: ements: R The area into which the seat backrest is folded is clear. 108 Seats and stowing R R R The rear seat backrest head restraints are fully inserted. To fold the center seat backrest forwards: the center seat backrest has been unlocked. The armrest on the second row of seats is folded back and the cup holders are empty. # Pull release lever 1. The corresponding seat backrest will fold forwards. Folding tthe he center center seat bac backr kres estt fforw orwar ards ds the le and right right seat backr backres ests ts forw forwar ards ds Folding the You can fold the center and outer seat backrests forwards separately. # # Vehicles with with a memory memor y function: If at least one section of the rear seat backrest is folded forwards, the corresponding front seat will move forwards slightly, if necessary, to avoid a collision. If necessary, fully insert the head restraints in the rear seat backrest. # # Pull release catch 3 for seat backrest 2 forwards. Fold the corresponding seat backrest forwards. Seats and stowing 109 Folding back back the the rear rear seat backr backrest est matically return to the most recent original position. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats Locking Locking the the rrelease elease catch catch of the the cent center er rear rear seat bac backr krest est When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant. # When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. Req equir uirements: ements: R The le and center seat backrests are engaged and joined together. You can lock the center seat backrest release catch if you want to secure the trunk against unauthorized access. The center seat backrest can then be folded forwards only together with the le seat backrest. * NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt when folding back the seat backrest The seat belt could become trapped and thus damaged when the seat backrest is folded back. # Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped when folding back the seat backrest. # Vehicles with with a memory memor y function: If at least one section of the seat backrest is folded back, the corresponding front seat will auto- Center seat bac Center backr krest est:: if the seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock veri cation indicator 2 will be visible. # Fold the corresponding seat backrest 1 back until it engages. ight seat backr backres ests: ts: if the seat backLe and rright rest is not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster. 110 Seats and stowing Att ttac aching hing the the par parcel cel net & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly # # Fold the center and le seat backrests forwards. To lock lock or unloc unlock: k: slide catch 1 upwards or downwards. Over Ov ervie view w of tthe he tie-do tie-down wn eyes eyes Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 104). 1 Tie-down eyes (vehicles with through-loading feature in the rear bench seat) If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open storage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. # Always make sure that objects do not protrude from storage spaces, parcel nets or storage nets. # Close the lockable storage spaces before starting a journey. Seats and stowing 111 # Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. The parcel net is available for all vehicles except hybrid vehicles. # # Vehicles without a through-loading feature in the rear bench seat: hook the rings into the parcel net hooks 1. Place the rings into the hooks on the trunk oor. EASY-PAC EASY -PACK K tr trunk unk box Adjusting djusting the the height of the the EASY-PAC EASY-PACK K trunk trunk box to any any position & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped and injured when raising the oor # # Vehicles with through-loading feature in the rear bench seat: fold up the tie-down eyes. Hook parcel net 1 into the front and rear tiedown eyes. Your hands may become trapped on the frame of the EASY-PACK trunk box and objects may be thrown upwards. # Ensure that your hands are not in the range of movement of the oor. # If someone becomes trapped, carefully push the center of the oor downward. # Remove all objects from the oor before raising it. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when pressing the EASY-PACK trunk box in Your hands may become trapped when you are pressing the trunk box into the retracted position. Children, in particular, may injure themselves when doing so. # Ensure that your hands are not in the range of movement of the EASY-PACK trunk box. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. * NOTE Damage to the extended EASYPACK trunk box The EASY-PACK trunk box may be damaged when it is extended. # Do not place any objects on or press down on the EASY-PACK trunk box frame. 112 Seats and stowing # Do not close the trunk lid when the EASY-PACK trunk box is extended. onto the trunk oor when the load reaches approximately 11 lbs (5 kg). * NOTE Damage to the EASY-PACK trunk box by objects Objects that are sharp-edged, pointed, fragile, rounded or heavy and objects that roll can damage the EASY-PACK trunk box and be thrown out. # Do not transport objects that are sharpedged, pointed, rounded or fragile and objects that roll in the EASY-PACK trunk box. # Always stow and secure such objects outside of the box in the trunk. # Always observe the maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK trunk box. # Do not use the EASY-PACK trunk box when the rear seats are folded forwards. The maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK trunk box is 22 lbs (10 kg). To prevent the box from being overloaded, the box oor will lower To stor store: e: push the box in completely using handle 2 until it locks in place. % Observe the notes on cleaning the EASYPACK trunk box (/ page 286). # Installing alling and remo removing ving tthe he EASY EASY-PAC -PACK K trunk trunk box Inst Inst Installing alling # # # To remov remove: e: pull handle 2 on the box. To increase increase tthe he load capacity capacity:: push the center of oor 1 downwards to the desired position and box size. To reduce reduce the the load capacity: capacity: press button 3. Seats and stowing 113 Removing emoving Attac ttaching hing a roof roof lugg luggag agee rrack ack & WARNING Risk of accident due to exceeding the maximum roof load The vehicle center of gravity and the usual driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics alter. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired. # Never exceed the maximum roof load and adjust your driving style. # # # # Turn rotating catches 6 outward. Insert retainers 2 of box 1 into outer holes 3. Raise box 1 and press hooks 5 into the anchorages of rear shelf 4. Turn rotating catches 6 inward. You will nd information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section. # # # Turn rotating catches 6 outward. Lower box 1 and pull it out of the anchorages on rear shelf 4. Pull box 1 back out of openings 3. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted headroom clearance If the vehicle height is greater than the maximum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged. 114 Seats and stowing # # # Observe the signposted headroom clearance. If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter. Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment. * NOTE Vehicle damage from non-approved roof luggage racks The vehicle could be damaged by roof luggage racks that have not been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. # Use only roof luggage racks tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. # Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that the sliding sunroof can be fully raised when the roof luggage rack is installed. # Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that the trunk lid can be fully # opened when the roof luggage rack is installed. Position the load on the roof luggage rack in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion. * NOTE Damage to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel due to nonapproved roof luggage racks The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel may be damaged by the roof luggage rack if you attempt to open it when using a roof luggage rack not tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. # When a roof luggage rack is installed, open the panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel only if this has been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel may be raised to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior. * NOTE Damage to the covers The covers may be damaged and scratched when being opened. # Do not use metallic or hard objects. # Carefully fold covers 1 upwards in the direction of the arrow. Seats and stowing 115 # # # Secure the roof luggage rack to the fastening points beneath covers 1. Comply with the installation instructions of the roof luggage rack manufacturer. Secure the load on the roof luggage rack. Using the the 115 V socket socket in the the rrear ear passenger passenger compar compartment tment & DAN ANGER GER Risk of fatal injuries due to a damaged connecting cable or a damaged socket Sockets Sockets Using the the 12 V socket Req equir uirements: ements: R Only connect devices up to a maximum of 180 W (15 A). Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has a 12 V socket in the storage compartment in the front center console. In addition, depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has a 12 V socket in the storage compartment in the rear passenger compartment center console. Example: 12 V socket in the storage compartment in the front center console # # Brie y press the trim element of the cover on the front. The cover opens in the direction of the arrow. Li up cap 1 of the socket and insert the plug of the device. If you have connected a device to the 12 V socket, leave the cover of the storage compartment open. You could receive an electric shock if the connecting cable or the 115 V power socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged or wet. # Use only connecting cables that are dry and free of damage. # When the vehicle is switched o , make sure that the 115 V power socket is dry. # Immediately have the 115 V power socket checked or replaced at a quali ed specialized workshop if it is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim. # Never plug the connecting cable into a 115 V power socket that is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim. 116 Seats and stowing USB port por t in tthe he rear rear passenger passenger compar compartment tment & DAN ANGER GER Risk of death due to using the socket incorrectly You can charge a USB device, such as a mobile phone, at the USB ports using a suitable charging cable. When the vehicle is switched on, the devices can be charged with 5 V (up to 3 A). In particular, you could receive an electric shock: R If you touch the inside of the socket R If you insert unsuitable devices or objects into the socket # # Wir ireless eless char charging ging of the the mobile phone and connection with with tthe he ext exter erior ior ant antenna enna Notes on wirelessl wirelesslyy char charging ging the the mobile phone Do not touch the inside of the socket. Only connect suitable devices to the socket. Make sure that no liquids get into the 115 V socket. When the 115 V socket is not in use, keep the socket ap closed. Requir equirements: ements: R Only connect devices with a suitable plug which conforms to the standards speci c to the country you are in. R Only connect devices up to a maximum of 150 W. R Do not use multiple socket outlets. & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly # # Open socket ap 3. Insert the plug of the device into 115 V socket 1. When the on-board electrical system voltage is su cient, indicator lamp 2 lights up. If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Seats and stowing 117 # # # # Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets. Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk/cargo compartment. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of re from placing objects in the mobile phone storage compartment Placing other objects in the mobile phone storage compartment could constitute a re hazard. # Apart from a mobile phone, do not place any other objects in the mobile phone storage compartment, especially those made of metal. * NOTE Damage to objects caused by placing them in the mobile phone storage compartment If objects are placed in the mobile phone storage compartment, these may be damaged by electromagnetic elds. # Do not place credit cards, storage media, ski passes or other objects sensitive to electromagnetic elds in the mobile phone storage compartment. * NOTE Damage to the mobile phone stowage compartment caused by liquids R R R R If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment, the compartment may be damaged. # Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment. R Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's exterior antenna via the charging module. R The charging function and wireless connection of the mobile phone to the vehicle's exterior antenna are only available if the vehicle is switched on. Small mobile phones may not be able to be charged in every position of the mobile phone stowage compartment. Large mobile phones which do not rest at in the mobile phone stowage compartment may not be able to be charged or connected with the vehicle's exterior antenna. The mobile phone may heat up during the charging process. This depends on the applications (apps) currently running. The mobile phone can be cooled in the mobile phone stowage compartment when the air conditioning system is switched on. The cooling output in the mobile phone stowage compartment is highest when the controller in the glove box is closed. To ensure more e cient charging and connection with the vehicle's exterior antenna, remove the protective cover from the mobile 118 Seats and stowing R phone. Protective covers which are designed for wireless charging are excluded. When charging, the mat should be used if possible. Charging Char ging a mobile phone wir wirelessly elessly Req equir uirements: ements: R The mobile phone is suitable for wireless charging (Qi-compatible mobile phone). A list of Qi-compatible mobile phones can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benzmobile.com. Place the mobile phone as close to the center of mat 1 as possible with the display facing upwards. When the charging symbol is shown in the multimedia system, the mobile phone is being charged. Malfunctions during the charging process are shown in the central display. % The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm water. # # # Always install the oor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always su cient room for the pedals. Do not use loose oor mats and do not place oor mats on top of one another. Installing Inst alling and remo removing ving tthe he oor mats & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. # # To inst install: all: press studs 1 onto holders 2. To rremov emove: e: pull the oor mat o holders 2. Light and visibility 119 Exterior Exter ior lighting Infor Inf ormation mation about lighting syst systems ems and your your responsibility Light switch Operating Oper ating tthe he light switch 5 L Low beam/high beam 6 R Switches the rear fog light on/o When low beam is activated, the T indicator lamp for the parking lights will be deactivated and replaced by the L low-beam indicator lamp. # Always park your vehicle safely using su cient lighting, in accordance with the relevant legal stipulations. The various lighting systems of the vehicle are only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible for correct vehicle illumination in accordance with the prevailing light and visibility conditions, legal requirements and tra c situation. * NOTE Battery discharging by operating the standing lights Operating the standing lights over a period of hours puts a strain on the battery. # Where possible, switch on the right X or le W parking light. 1 2 3 4 W Le -hand standing lights X Right-hand standing lights T Parking lights and license plate lamp à Automatic driving lights (preferred light switch position) If the battery is insu ciently charged, the standing lights or parking lights will be switched o automatically to facilitate the next engine start. 120 Light and visibility The exterior lighting (except standing and parking lights) will switch o automatically when the driver's door is opened. R Observe the notes on surround lighting (/ page 127). Aut utomatic omatic dr driving iving lights function When the vehicle is switched on, the parking lamps, low beam and daytime running lamps are switched on automatically depending on the ambient light. Switching tthe Switching he rear rear fog fog lights on or o Operating Oper ating the the combination switc switchh for for the the lights Req equir uirements: ements: R The light switch is in the L or à position. # Press the R button. Please observe the country-speci c laws on the use of rear fog lamps. & WARNING Risk of accident when the low beam is switched o in poor visibility When the light switch is set to Ã, the low beam may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility such as spray. # In such cases, turn the light switch to L. The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You are responsible for vehicle lighting. 1 2 3 4 High beam Turn signal light, right High-beam asher Turn signal light, le # Use the combination switch to activate the desired function. Light and visibility 121 Switching on high beam Switching # Turn the light switch to the L or à position. # Push the combination switch beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow 1. When the high beam is activated, the L indicator lamp for low beam will be deactivated and replaced by the K indicator lamp for high beam. Switching Switching o high beam Move the combination switch back to its starting position. # High-beam asher # Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow 3. Turn urn signal light # To indicate indicate brie brie y: push the combination switch brie y to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow 2 or 4. The corresponding turn signal light will ash three times. # To indicate indicate continuously: continuously: push the combination switch beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow 2 or 4. Vehicles with Active Lane Change Assist: R A turn signal indicator activated by the driver may continue to operate for the duration of the lane change. R If the driver indicated directly beforehand but a lane change was not immediately possible, the turn signal indicator may activate automatically. Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating the the hazard hazard war warning ning lights Press button 1. The hazard warning lights will switch on automatically if: R The airbag has been deployed. # 122 Light and visibility Adap daptiv tivee functions, MUL MULTIBEAM TIBEAM LED Intellig Int elligent ent Light Syst System em function (Canada) The MULTIBEAM LED headlamps adapt to the driving and weather situation and provide extended functions for improved illumination of the road. The system comprises the following functions: R Active headlamps (/ page 122) R Cornering light (/ page 122) R Highway mode (/ page 123) R Enhanced fog light function (/ page 123) R Bad weather light (/ page 123) R City lighting (/ page 123) The system is active only when it is dark. Active ctive headlam headlamps ps function R R The headlamps follow the steering movements. Relevant areas are better illuminated during a journey. The functions are active when the low beam is switched on. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the course of the lane in which you are driving will also be evaluated and the active headlamps function will adjust the light in advance. Corner ing light function Cornering The cornering light improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the turning direction, enabling better visibility on tight curves, for example. It can be activated only when the low beam is switched on. The function is active in the following cases: R At speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) when the turn signal light is switched on or the steering wheel is turned R At speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 43 mph (70 km/h) and when the steering wheel is turned Light and visibility 123 Roundabout and int inter ersection section function: the cornering light will be activated on both sides based on an evaluation of the vehicle's current GPS position. It will remain active until a er the vehicle has le the roundabout or the intersection. Highwayy mode function (Canada) Highwa Highway mode increases the range and brightness of the cone of light, enabling better visibility. The function will be active if a highway journey is detected by means of: R The vehicle's speed R The multifunction camera R The navigation system The function is not active in the following cases: R At speeds below 50 mph (80 km/h) Enhanced fog fog light function (Canada) The enhanced fog light function reduces selfblinding and improves the illumination of the edge of the road. The function is automatically activated under the following conditions: R At speeds below 43 mph (70 km/h) and when the rear fog light is switched on. The function is automatically deactivated under the following conditions: R When speeds greater than 62 mph (100 km/h) are reached. R When the rear fog light is switched o . Function of the the bad w weat eather her light (Canada) The bad weather light reduces re ections in rainy conditions by dimming individual LEDs in the headlamps. The driver and other road users are blinded less as a result. The city lighting function (Canada) City lighting improves the illumination of roadsides in urban areas using a broad distribution of light. The function is active in the following cases: R At low speeds R In illuminated parts of urban areas Switching the Int Intellig elligent ent Light System System on/o Switching the (Canada) Req equir uirements: ements: R The vehicle is switched on. 124 Light and visibility Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Intelligent Light System # Switch the function on or o . Adap daptiv tivee Highbeam Assist Adap daptiv tivee Highbeam Assist Assist function & WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not react to: Road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians R Road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists R Road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier R On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognize other road users with their own lighting, or may recognize them too late. In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users. # Always observe the road and tra c conditions carefully and switch o the high beam in good time. Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or tra c conditions. Detection may be restricted in the following cases: R In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow R If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and tra c conditions. Adaptive Highbeam Assist automatically switches between the following types of light: R Low beam R High beam At speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h): If no other road users are detected, the high beam will switch on automatically. R Light and visibility 125 The high beam will switch o automatically in the following cases: R At speeds below 16 mph (25 km/h) R If other road users are detected R If street lighting is su cient % The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel. Switching Adap daptiv tivee Highbeam Assist Assist on/o Switching A Switching Switching on Turn the light switch to the à position. # Switch on the high beam using the combination switch. If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, the _ indicator lamp will light up on the central display section of the instrument display. # Switching hing o Switc Switch o the high beam using the combination switch. # Adaptiv daptivee Highbeam Assis Assistt Plus Adaptiv daptivee Highbeam Assis Assistt Plus function (Canada) & WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not react to: R Road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians R Road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists R Road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus may fail to recognize other road users with their own lighting, or may recognize them too late. In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users. # Always observe the road and tra c conditions carefully and switch o the high beam in good time. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into account road, weather or tra c conditions. Detection may be restricted in the following cases: R In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow R If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and tra c conditions. 126 Light and visibility ULTRA RANGE Highbeam increases the brightness of the cone of light to the legally permitted maximum. Partial high beam does not include other road users in the high beam area. It does not blind them but enables full high beam illumination for the driver apart from the excluded vehicles. At speeds below 16 mph (25 km/h) or when there is su cient street lighting: R The partial high beam and the high beam will be switched o automatically. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus automatically switches between the following types of light: R Low beam R Partial high beam R High beam R ULTRA RANGE Highbeam At speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h): R If no other road users are detected, the high beam will switch on automatically. R If other road users are detected, the partial high beam will switch on automatically. At speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h): If no other road users are detected on a straight road, ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will be switched on automatically. R If other road users are detected, the partial high beam will switch on automatically. R R If highly re ective signs are detected, ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will be switched o automatically. % The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel. Switching Adaptiv tivee Highbeam Assist Assist Plus on/o Switching Adap (Canada) Switc Switching hing on # Turn the light switch to the à position. # Switch on the high beam using the combination switch. When the high beam is switched on automatically in the dark, the _ indicator lamp will light up on the central display section of the instrument display. Switching Switching o # Switch o the high beam using the combination switch. Light and visibility 127 Switching Switc hing the the da daytime ytime running running lamps lamps on/o Switching Switc hing the the surr surround ound lighting on/o Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Daytime Run. Lights # Switch the function on or o . Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Locator Lighting When Locator Lighting is active, the exterior lighting lights up for 40 seconds a er the vehicle is unlocked. When you start the vehicle, the surround lighting is deactivated and the automatic driving lights are activated. # Activate or deactivate the function. Setting Se tting the the eext xter erior ior lighting switc switch-o h-o dela delayy time Req equir uirements: ements: R The light switch is in the à position. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Exterior Lighting Delay # Set the switch-o delay time. When the vehicle engine is switched o , the exterior lighting will be activated for the set time. Inter Int erior ior lighting Adjusting djusting the the int inter erior ior lighting Front over overhead head contr control ol panel 1 2 3 4 5 p Front le reading lamp S Automatic interior lighting control c Front interior lighting u Rear interior lighting p Front right reading lamp # To switc switchh on/o : press button 1 – 5 accordingly. 128 Light and visibility Control Contr ol panel in tthe he grab grab handle Adjusting djusting the the brightness brightness # Select Brightness. # Adjust the brightness. Activ ctivating ating the the brightness brightness for for zones # Select Brightness. # Select Brightness Zones. # Switch the function on or o . or # Set the brightness for the desired zones. 1 p Rear reading lamp # To switch switch on/o : press button 1. Adjus djusting ting the the ambient lighting Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort Setting the color Setting the # Select Color. # Set the desired color. 5 Ambient Lighting Activating ctivating multi-color lighting # Select Color. # Select Multi-color. # Select a color combination. Activ ctivating ating multi-color animation # Select Color. # Select Multi-color Animation. The chosen color combination will change at prede ned intervals. Activ ctivating ating welcome welcome lighting # Select Color. # Select Welcome. When the vehicle is unlocked, a special ambient lighting sequence will run. Activ ctivating ating dependency on air conditioning setsettings # Select Color. # Select Climate. If changes are made to the temperature setting in the vehicle, the color of the ambient lighting will change brie y. Switching the Switching the inter interior ior lighting switc switch-o h-o delay time on/o Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Interior Lighting Delay # Switch the switch-o delay time on or o . When this function is active, the interior lighting lights up for a short time a er the vehicle is locked. Light and visibility 129 Windshield wiper and windshield washer washer system system Switching Switc hing tthe he windshield wipers wipers on/o Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position 1 - 5. # Single wipe/washing: wipe/washing: push the button on the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1. R í Single wipe R î Wiping with washer uid % Observe the notes on washing the vehicle in a car wash (/ page 281). # Replacing the the windshield wiper blades & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windshield wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced 1 2 3 4 5 g Windshield wipers o Ä Intermittent wiping, normal Å Intermittent wiping, frequent ° Continuous wiping, slow ¯ Continuous wiping, fast If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch o the windshield wipers and vehicle before changing the wiper blades. Moving Mo ving the the wiper arms arms int intoo the the replacement replacement position # Switch the vehicle on and then o again immediately. # Within around 15 seconds, press and hold the î button on the combination switch for approximately three seconds (/ page 129). The wiper arms will move into the replacement position. Remo emoving ving tthe he wiper blades # Fold the wiper arms away from the windshield. 130 Light and visibility Installing tthe Installing he wiper blades Switch on the vehicle. Press the î button on the combination switch. The wiper arms will return to their original positions. # Switch o the vehicle. % Check the condition of the wiper blades regularly and replace them in the event of visible damage or ongoing smearing. # # # # # Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade away from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1 as far as it will go. Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the removal position. Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 4. # # # # Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1. Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the locking position. Make sure that the wiper blade is seated correctly. Fold the wiper arms back onto the windshield. Light and visibility 131 Maintenance Maint enance display % The duration until the color changes varies depending on the usage conditions. Mirrors Mirrors Operating Oper ating tthe he outside mirrors mirrors & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion # Remove protective lm 1 from the maintenance displays on the tips of the newly installed wiper blades. When the color of the maintenance displays changes from black to yellow, replace the wiper blades. You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion # Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. & WARNING Risk of accident due to misjudgment of distance when using the front-passenger mirror The outside mirror on the front passenger side re ects objects on a smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact closer than they appear. # Therefore, always look over your shoulder to check the actual distance between you and the road users traveling behind you. 132 Light and visibility Folding the the outside mirr mirror orss in/out Adjusting djusting the the outside mirrors mirrors # Press button 3 or 4 to select the outside mirror to be adjusted. # Press button 2 to adjust the position of the mirror glass. Engaging the Engaging the outside mirrors mirrors Vehicles without electrically folding outside mirrors: manually move the outside mirror into the correct position. # Vehicles with electrically folding outside mirrors: press and hold button 1. You will hear a click and the mirror will audibly click into place. The outside mirror will now be set to the correct position. # # Brie y press button 1. Rese esetting tting the the outside mirr mirrors ors % If the battery has been disconnected or completely discharged, the outside mirrors must be reset. Only then will the automatic mirror folding function work properly. # Brie y press button 1. Aut utomatic omatic anti-glare anti-glare mirror mirrorss function & WARNING Risk of acid burns and poisoning due to the anti-glare mirror electrolyte Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte is hazardous to health and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. # If you come into contact with electrolyte, observe the following: R Immediately rinse the electrolyte from your skin with water and seek medical attention. R If electrolyte comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. R If the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately. R Immediately change out of clothing which has been contaminated with electrolyte. R If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. Light and visibility 133 The inside rearview mirror and the outside mirror on the driver's side will automatically go into antiglare mode if light from a headlamp hits the sensor on the inside rearview mirror. System em limits Syst The system will not go into anti-glare mode if: R The vehicle is switched o . R Reverse gear is engaged. R The interior lighting is switched on. The front-passenger outside mirror will move back to its original position when: R You shi the transmission to another transmission position. R You are traveling at a speed greater than 9 mph (15 km/h). R You press the button for the outside mirror on the driver's side. Storing oring the the parking parking position of tthe he frontfrontpassenger passenger outside mirror mirror using rever reverse se gear gear Stor oring ing Front-passeng ont-passenger er outside mirror mirror par parking king position function The parking position makes parking easier. The front-passenger outside mirror will swivel downwards in the direction of the rear wheel on the front passenger's side when: R The parking position is stored (/ page 133). R The front-passenger mirror is selected. R Reverse gear is engaged. # # # Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button 2. Engage reverse gear. Move the front-passenger outside mirror into the desired parking position using button 1. 134 Light and visibility Calling up # Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button 2. # Engage reverse gear. The front-passenger outside mirror will move to the stored parking position. Area permeable Area permeable to to radio radio waves waves on tthe he windshield Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating the the automatic automatic mirr mirror or foldfolding function Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Switch Automatic Folding on or o . Radio-controlled equipment, e.g. toll systems, can be mounted only on areas of the windshield that are permeable to radio waves 1. The area permeable to radio waves 1 is best visible from outside the vehicle when the windshield is illuminated with an additional light source. Infrar Infr ared-r ed-ree ective windshield function The infrared-re ective windshield is coated and reduces the build-up of heat in the vehicle interior. The coating shields the vehicle interior from radio waves. Climate control 135 6 Vehicles with control panel for dual-zone auto- Over Ov ervie view w of climate climate contr control ol systems systems Notes on climate climate control control An interior air lter in combination with the pre lter in the engine compartment must always be used so that the air conditioning system, pollution level monitoring and the air ltration work correctly. Use lters recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Always have maintenance work carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop. Over Ov ervie view w of tthe he air conditioning control control panel The indicator lamps on the buttons indicate that the corresponding function is activated. Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control with/without stationary heater (example) 1 w Sets the temperature, le 2 _ Sets the air distribution 3 H Sets the air ow or switches o climate control 4 à Sets climate control to automatic mode (/ page 137) 5 ¬ Defrosts the windshield matic climate control (without stationary heater): t calls up the air conditioning menu Vehicles with control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control (with stationary heater, plug-in hybrid) or control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control (with/without stationary heater, plug-in hybrid): ! calls up the air conditioning menu, switches residual heat on/o (/ page 138) 7 ¤ Switches the rear window heater on/o 8 Vehicles with control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control without stationary heater: 0 switches synchronization on/o (/ page 137) Vehicles with control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control without stationary heater: ¿ switches the A/C function on/o (/ page 136) Vehicles with a stationary heater: & switches the stationary heater on/o Plug-in hybrid: & activates/deactivates "Immediate pre-entry climate control" 136 Climate control 9 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/o (/ page 138) A Vehicles with control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control: ¿ switches the A/C function on/o (/ page 136) Vehicles with control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control: _ adjusts the air distribution, right B w Sets the temperature, right Rear operating operating unit in vvehicles ehicles with with contr control ol panel for 3-zone automatic automatic climate climate control control If climate control is switched o , the windows may fog up more quickly. Switch climate control o only brie y. Switching the Switching the A/C function on/o using tthe he air conditioning control control panel The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidi es the vehicle's interior air. # Press the ¿ button. 1 Sets the temperature 2 Display 3 Sets the air ow Operating the Operating the climate climate contr control ol system system Switching Switc hing climat climatee control control on/o # # To switch switch on: set the air ow to level 1 or higher using the H button. To switch switch o : set the air ow to level 0 using the H button. Switch o the A/C function only brie y; otherwise, the windows may fog up more quickly. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is not indicative of a malfunction. Calling up the the air conditioning menu Calling up the the air conditioning menu using tthe he multimedia system system # Select one of the temperature displays at the lower edge of the media display. Climate control 137 Calling up the the air-conditioning air-conditioning menu using the the button butt on on tthe he climate climate contr control ol panel # Press the ! button on the climate control panel. Activating/deactiv ctivating/deactivating ating the the A/C function via the the multimedia syst system em The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidi es the vehicle's interior air. # Call up the air-conditioning menu (/ page 136). # Select First Row of Seats. # Select A/C. Setting Se tting climate climate contr control ol to to automatic automatic mode In automatic mode, the set temperature is controlled and maintained at a constant level by the air supply. # Press the à button. # To switch switch ttoo manual mode: press the H or _ button. Climatee sty Climat style le Climatee sty Climat style le function The following climate styles are available in automatic mode: R FOCUS: high air ow, slightly cooler setting R MEDIUM: medium air ow, standard setting R DIFFUSE: low air ow, slightly warmer and dra -free setting Setting Setting the the climate climate ssty tyle le # Call up the air conditioning menu (/ page 136). # Select First Row of Seats or Second Row of Seats. # Call up the CLIMATE MODE menu. # Select a climate style. Setting Se tting tthe he air distr distribution ibution # # Call up the air conditioning menu (/ page 136). Select a row of seats. To se sett the the air distr distribution: ibution: select ¯, P or O. # Set the air ow. % Several air distribution options can be selected at the same time, for example to set the climate control for the windshield and the footwells simultaneously. The ¯ climate control for the windshield can only be selected for the rst seat row. # Activating/deactiv ctivating/deactivating ating tthe he climate climate contr control ol synchronization hronization function via tthe he air conditioning control trol panel Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronization function. The temperature and air distribution settings for the driver's side will be adopted automatically for the front passenger side. # Press the 0 button. The synchronization function will be deactivated if the settings for one of the other climate control zones are changed. 138 Climate control Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating tthe he climate climate contr control ol synchronization hronization function via tthe he multimedia syst system em Switching Switc hing air-r air-recir ecirculation culation mode on/o Press the g button. The interior air will be recirculated. Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating ionization Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronization function. The driver's settings for temperature, air quantity and air distribution are adopted automatically for all climate zones. # Call up the air conditioning menu (/ page 136). # Select First Row of Seats. # Select SYNC. Air-recirculation mode automatically switches to fresh air mode a er a while. % If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the windows may fog up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only brie y. Ionization improves the quality of the vehicle's interior air. Ionization of the interior air is odorless. # Call up the air conditioning menu (/ page 136). # Select Air Quality. # Select IONIZATION. Switching Switc hing the the rresidual esidual heat on or o Fragrance agrance system system Remo emoving ving condensation from from tthe he windows Req equir uirements: ements: R The vehicle is parked. Setting Se tting tthe he fragr fragrance ance system system Windows indows ffogg ogged ed up on tthe he inside # Press the à button. # If the windows continue to fog up: press the ¬ button. Windows indows ffogg ogged ed up on tthe he outside # Switch on the windshield wipers. # Press the à button. # It is possible to make use of the residual heat from the engine to continue heating or ventilating the front compartment of the vehicle for approximately 30 minutes. # To switch switch on: press the ! button. Residual heat is switched o automatically. Req equir uirements: ements: R Automatic climate control is activated. R The glove box is closed. The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fragrance throughout the vehicle interior from a acon located in the glove box. # Call up the air conditioning menu (/ page 136). # Select Air Quality. Climate control 139 # # Select AIR FRESHENER. Keep pressing until the desired intensity is reached. + ENVIRONMENT ONMENTAL AL NO NOTE TE Environmental ENVIR damage due to improper disposal of full acons Inserting removing ving the the acon of the the fragr fragrance ance Inser ting or remo syst system em & WARNING Risk of injury from liquid perfume If children open the acon, they could drink the liquid perfume or it could come into contact with their eyes. # Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle. # Consult a doctor immediately if liquid perfume has been drunk. # If liquid perfume comes into contact with your eyes or skin, rinse your eyes with clean water. # If symptoms continue, consult a doctor. Full acons must not be disposed of with household waste. # Full acons must be taken to a harmful substance collection point. 1 Cap 2 Flacon # # To insert insert:: slide the acon into the holder as far as it will go. To rremov emove: e: pull out the acon. If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfumes, observe the manufacturers' safety notices on the perfume packaging. 140 Climate control Dispose of the genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfume acon when it is empty and do not re ll it. Re llable acon # Unscrew the cap of the empty acon. # Fill the acon with a maximum of 0.5 . oz. (15 ml). # Screw the cap back on to the acon. Always re ll the empty re llable acon with the same perfume. Observe the separate information sheet with the acon. Infor Inf ormation mation on the the windshield heater heater The windshield heater is switched on automatically if the ¬ button is activated. A er the vehicle is started, the windshield heater will be switched on automatically as required. Air vents vents Adjusting djusting the the front front air vents vents & WARNING Risk of burns or frostbite due to being too close to the air vents Very hot or very cold air can ow from the air vents. # Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a su cient distance from the air vents. # If necessary, direct the air ow to another area of the vehicle interior. To guarantee the ow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, comply with the following: R Always keep the vents and ventilation grilles in the vehicle interior clear. R Keep the air inlet free of deposits (/ page 281). # # To open or close: turn controller 2 to the le or right as far as it will go. To adjust adjust tthe he air direction: direction: hold air vent 1 in the center and move it up or down or to the le or right. Climate control 141 Adjus djusting ting the the rrear ear air vents vents # # Close the air vent when you heat the vehicle. At high outside temperatures, open the air vent and switch on the A/C function. The automatic climate control must be switched on to cool the glove box. # # To open or close: turn controller 2 to the le or right as far as it will go. To set set the the air ow dir direction: ection: hold air vent 1 in the center and move it up or down or to the le or right. Opening or closing tthe he air vvent ent in tthe he glove glove box * NOTE NOTE Damage to temperature-sensitive objects in the glove box Temperature-sensitive objects stored in the glove box may be damaged by the air vent located inside it. 1 Air vent controller 2 Air vent # To open or close: turn controller 1 to the right or le . 142 Driving and parking Driving Driving Notes on MercedesMercedes-AMG AMG vehicles vehicles Observe the notes on the following topics in the Supplement, otherwise you may fail to recognize dangers. % The availability of certain functions depends on the equipment and model of the vehicle. R Emotion Start R AMG performance exhaust system R AMG ceramic high-performance composite brake system R RACE START R DRIFT MODE R AMG adaptive sport suspension system + R AMG steering-wheel buttons Switching Switc hing on the the power power suppl supplyy or the the vehicle vehicle & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children le unattended in the vehicle If children are le unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children. Req equir uirements: ements: R The SmartKey is in the vehicle and is recognized. R The brake pedal is not depressed. Driving and parking 143 # To switch switch on the the power power supply supply:: press button 1 once. You can, for example, activate the windshield wipers. The power supply is switched o again if the following conditions are met: R You open the driver's door. R You press button 1 twice more. To switch switch on the the vehicle: vehicle: press button 1 twice. Indicator and warning lamps go on in the instrument cluster. The vehicle is switched o again if one of the following conditions is met: R You do not start the vehicle within 15 minutes and the transmission is in position j or the electric parking brake is applied. R You press button 1 once. # Star arting ting the the vehicle vehicle Star arting ting the the vehicle vehicle with with the the star start/st t/stop op button button & DAN ANGER GER Risk of fatal injuries caused by exhaust gases Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases, such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never run the vehicle and, if present, the stationary heater indoors without su cient ventilation. & WARNING Risk of re due to ammable material in the engine compartment or the exhaust system Flammable materials may ignite. # Therefore, check regularly that there are no ammable materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system. Requir equirements: ements: R The SmartKey is in the vehicle and is recognized. Shi the transmission to position j or i. Depress the brake pedal and press button 1 once. # If the vehicle does not start: switch o nonessential consumers and press button 1 once. # If the vehicle still does not start and the display message Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual appears in the instrument display: start the vehicle with the SmartKey in the marked space (emergency operation mode) (/ page 144). % You can switch o the vehicle while driving. To do this, press button 1 for about three seconds or by pressing button 1 three times within three seconds. Be sure to observe the safety notes under "Driving tips" (/ page 147). # # 144 Driving and parking Observe any information regarding display messages that can be displayed on the instrument display. Star arting ting the the vehicle vehicle wit withh the the SmartKe Smar tKeyy in tthe he marked (emergency oper operation ation mode) marked space (emergency If the vehicle does not start and the Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual message appears in the instrument display, you can start the vehicle in emergency operation mode. # # Make sure that marked space 2 is empty. Remove SmartKey 1 from the key ring. # # Place SmartKey 1 in marked space 2. The vehicle will start a er a short time. When you remove SmartKey 1 from marked space 2, the vehicle can be driven. For further engine starts however, SmartKey 1 must be located in marked space 2 during the entire journey. Have SmartKey 1 checked at a quali ed specialist workshop. the vehicle If the vehicle does no nott start: start: # Place SmartKey 1 in marked space 2 and leave it there. # Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle using the start/stop button. % You can switch on the power supply or the vehicle with the start/stop button. Observe any information regarding display messages that can be displayed on the instrument display. Starting ar ting the the vvehicle ehicle via Remot Remotee Online Ser Services vices Cooling or heating the the vvehicle ehicle inter interior ior before before star starting ting the the jour journey ney Ensure the following before starting the engine: R The legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R It is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked. R The fuel tank is su ciently full. R The starter battery is su ciently charged. Charging the start starter er batter batteryy bef befor oree star starting ting the the Charging the jour journey ney You can receive a message on your smartphone when the state of charge of the starter battery is low. You can then start the vehicle with the smartphone to charge the battery. The vehicle is automatically switched o a er ten minutes. Ensure the following before starting the vehicle: R The legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. Driving and parking 145 R R It is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked. The fuel tank is su ciently full. Starting ar ting the the vvehicle ehicle (R (Remot emotee Online) & WARNING Risk of crushing or entrapment due to unintentional starting of the engine Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during service or maintenance work. # Always secure the engine against unintentional starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work. Req equir uirements: ements: R Park position j is selected. R The anti-the alarm system is not activated. R The panic alarm is not activated. R The hazard warning light system is switched o . R The hood is closed. R The doors are closed and locked. R The windows and sliding sunroof are closed. # # Start the vehicle using the smartphone. A er every engine start, the engine runs for ten minutes. Breaking-in Br eaking-in notes notes You can carry out a maximum of two consecutive starting attempts. You must start the engine with the SmartKey before trying to start the vehicle again with the smartphone. You can switch o the vehicle at any time as follows: R Via the smartphone app R By pressing the Ü or ß button on the SmartKey % Further information can be found in the smartphone app. Securing the Securing the vvehicle ehicle agains againstt star starting ting befor beforee carrying out maint maintenance enance or repair repair wor work: k: # Switch on the hazard warning light system. or # Unlock the doors. or Open a side window or the sliding sunroof. To preserve the engine during the rst 1,000 miles (1,500 km): R Drive at varying road speeds and engine speeds. R Do not drive at speeds greater than 85 mph (140 km/h). R Drive the vehicle in drive program A or ;. R Shi to the next highest gear at the very latest when the needle reaches the last third before the red area in the tachometer. R Do not shi down manually in order to brake. R Avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at full throttle. R Do not depress the accelerator pedal past the pressure point (kickdown). R Only increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed a er 1,000 miles (1,500 km). 146 Driving and parking This also applies when the engine or parts of the drivetrain have been replaced. Please also observe the following breaking-in notes: R In certain driving and driving safety systems, the sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven a er the vehicle has been delivered or a er repairs. Full system e ectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in process. R Brakepads, brake discs and tires that are either new or have been replaced only achieve optimum braking e ect and grip a er several hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for the reduced braking e ect by applying greater force to the brake pedal. Notes on optimized optimized acceleration acceleration If all necessary requirements and activation conditions are ful lled, the best possible acceleration can be achieved from a standstill. Do not use the optimized acceleration on public roads. Individual wheels could spin and you could lose control of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and/or accident. Be sure to observe the safety notes and information on ESP® (/ page 172). Pulling away away with with optimized optimized acceleration acceleration & WARNING Risk of skidding and having an accident from wheels spinning When you use optimized acceleration, individual wheels could spin and you could lose control of the vehicle. If ESP® is deactivated, there is a risk of skidding and accident. # Make sure that no persons or obstacles are in the close vicinity of your vehicle. Req equir uirements: ements: R The vehicle has been broken in (/ page 145). R The vehicle and tires are in good condition. R You are on a high-grip roadway. R The engine and transmission are at normal operating temperature. * NOTE Increased wear due to optimized acceleration When pulling away with optimized acceleration, all components of the drivetrain are subjected to a very high load. This can lead to increased component wear. # Do not always pull away with optimized acceleration. # # # # # # Engage the h drive position (/ page 158). Move the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position. Select the sportiest available drive program B or C(/ page 155). Deactivate ESP® (/ page 174). Depress and hold the brake pedal rmly with your le foot. With your right foot, fully depress the accelerator pedal. Driving and parking 147 # # A er no more than ve seconds, take your le foot quickly o the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceleration. Switch on ESP® once the acceleration procedure is complete. Ending optimized optimized acceleration acceleration Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. # Reactivate the ESP®. % A er you pull away with optimized acceleration, components of the drivetrain can become very hot, which means that optimized acceleration values may be reached again only a er a few minutes. # Notes on driving driving & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. # Always install the oor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always su cient room for the pedals. # Do not use loose oor mats and do not place oor mats on top of one another. & WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect footwear Incorrect footwear includes, for example: R Shoes with platform soles R Shoes with high heels R Slippers There is a risk of an accident. Always wear suitable footwear so that you can operate the pedals safely. # & WARNING Risk of accident if the vehicle is switched o while driving If you switch o the vehicle while driving, safety functions are restricted or no longer available. This may a ect the power steering system and the brake force boosting, for example. You will need to use considerably more force to steer and brake, for example. # Do not switch o the vehicle while driving. & DAN ANGER GER Risk of fatal injuries caused by exhaust gases Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases, such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never run the vehicle and, if present, the stationary heater indoors without su cient ventilation. 148 Driving and parking & WARNING Risk of skidding and of an accident due to shi ing down on slippery road surfaces If you shi down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking e ect, the drive wheels may lose traction. # Do not shi down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking e ect. & DAN ANGER GER Risk of fatal injury due to poisonous exhaust gases If the tailpipe is blocked or su cient ventilation is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehicle. This is the case, for example, if the vehicle gets stuck in the snow. # Keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle free from snow when the vehicle or the stationary heater is running. # Open a window on the side of the vehicle facing away from the wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to being under the in uence of alcohol and drugs while driving Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can a ect your re exes, perceptions and judgment. The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. # Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs. This increases the braking distance and the brake system can even fail. # Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. # Do not depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time while driving. * NOTE Engine damage due to excessively high engine speeds The engine will be damaged if you drive with the engine in the overrevving range. # Do not drive with the engine in the overrevving range. * NOTE Wearing out the brake linings by continuously depressing the brake pedal # & WARNING Risk of accident due to the brake system overheating If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when driving, the brake system may overheat. # Do not depress the brake pedal continuously whilst driving. To use the braking e ect of the engine, shi to a lower gear in good time. Driving and parking 149 * NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and engine when pulling away # # Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. Pull away immediately. Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature. * NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel The engine is not running smoothly and is misring. Non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter. # Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. # Have the cause recti ed immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. * NOTE Reduced battery life due to frequent short-distance trips The 12 V battery may not be su ciently charged when the vehicle is used only for short-distance trips. This reduces the life of the battery. # Drive longer distances regularly to charge the battery. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted headroom clearance If the vehicle height is greater than the maximum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged. # Observe the signposted headroom clearance. # If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter. # Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment. Notes on dr driving iving with with a roof roof load, tr trailer ailer or fully laden vehicle vehicle When driving with a loaded roof luggage rack or trailer as well as with a fully laden or fully occupied vehicle, the vehicle's driving and steering characteristics change. You should bear the following in mind: R Do not exceed the permissible roof load and towing capacity. Also observe the technical data in the printed Operator's Manual. R Evenly distribute the roof load, and place heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 104). R Drive attentively, and avoid suddenly pulling away, braking and steering as well as rapid cornering. Notes driving iving on salt-treat salt-treated ed roads roads Notes on dr The braking e ect is limited on salt-treated roads. 150 Driving and parking Therefore, observe the following notes: Due to salt build-up on the brake discs and brakepads, the braking distance can increase considerably or result in braking only on one side R Maintain a much greater safe distance to the vehicle in front R To remove salt build-up: Brake occasionally while paying attention to the tra c conditions R Carefully depress the brake pedal at the end of the journey and when starting the next journey R hydroplaning oplaning Notes on hydr Hydroplaning can take place once a certain amount of water has accumulated on the road surface. Observe the following notes during heavy precipitation or in conditions in which hydroplaning may occur: R Reduce speed R Avoid tire ruts R R Avoid sudden steering movements Brake carefully % Also observe the notes on regularly checking wheels and tires (/ page 309). Notes on dr driving iving thr through ough w wat ater er on the the road road surface Water which has entered into the vehicle can damage the engine, electrics and transmission. Water can also enter the air intake of the engine and cause engine damage. Observe the following if you must drive through water: R The water, when calm, may only reach the lower edge of the vehicle body. R Drive at a maximum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h); water can otherwise enter the vehicle interior or engine compartment. R Vehicles traveling in front, or oncoming vehicles, can create waves which may exceed the maximum permissible depth of the water. The braking e ect of the brakes is reduced a er fording. Brake carefully while paying attention to the tra c conditions until braking power has been fully restored. ECO EC O star start/st t/stop op function ECO star ECO start/st t/stop op function % Depending on the engine, the ECO start/stop function is not available in all drive programs. Observe the status display in the instrument display for this. The engine is switched o automatically in the following situations if all vehicle conditions for an automatic engine stop are met: R You brake the vehicle to a standstill in transmission position h or i. R Vehicles with with a 48 V on-boar on-boardd electr electrical ical syssystem: you depress the brake pedal when traveling at a low speed. If the system has detected one of the following situations, the engine will not stop: R You stop at a stop sign and there is no vehicle in front of you. Driving and parking 151 R R The vehicle that stopped in front of you starts up again. You maneuver, turn the steering wheel sharply or engage reverse gear. % If the system detects an intelligent stop inhibitor, for example, a stop sign, the engine will not stop. If you activate the HOLD function or engage the park position j, the engine can be switched o in spite of an intelligent stop inhibitor. The engine restarts automatically in the following cases: R You engage transmission position h or k. R You depress the accelerator pedal. R An automatic vehicle engine start is required. R You release the brake pedal. R Vehicles with with a 48 V on-board on-board electrical electrical sy sysstem: You release the brake pedal on a downhill gradient and the vehicle does not roll. - The vehicle rolls on a downhill gradient and does not automatically enter glide mode at 15 mph (20 km/h). ECO start/stop function symbols in the instrument display: R The è symbol (green) appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: the engine was switched o by the ECO start/stop function. R The ç symbol (yellow) appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: not all vehicle conditions for an engine stop have been met. R Neither the è nor ç symbol appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: an intelligent stop inhibitor was detected, e.g. a stop sign. R The s symbol appears: the ECO start/stop function is deactivated or there is a malfunction. If the engine was switched o by the ECO start/ stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warning tone sounds and the engine is not restarted. In addition, the following display message appears in the instrument display: Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting If you do not switch o the vehicle, it is automatically switched o a er three minutes. Deactivating activating the the ECO ECO st star art/st t/stop op Deactivating or activating function 152 Driving and parking The ECO display will show you when you have driven economically: R The three segments will ll up completely at the same time R The edges around all three segments will light up Press button 1. If indicator lamp 2 lights up, the ECO start/ stop function is activated. % Depending on the model and the vehicle equipment, the button may also be located at a di erent position in the center console. # ECO EC O display display function The ECO display summarizes your driving characteristics from the start of the journey to its completion and assists you in achieving the most economical driving style. You can in uence consumption by doing the following: R Driving with particular care. R Following the gearshi recommendations. The lettering in the segment will light up brightly, the outer edge will light up and the segment will ll up when the following driving style is adopted: R 1 Steady speed R 2 Gentle deceleration and rolling R 3 Moderate acceleration The lettering in the segment will be gray, the outer edge will be dark and the segment will empty when the following driving style is adopted: R 1 Fluctuations in speed R 2 Heavy braking R 3 Sporty acceleration The additional range achieved as a result of your driving style in comparison with a driver with a very sporty driving style will be shown on the center of display 4. The range displayed does not indicate a xed reduction in consumption. ECO EC O Assist Assist function (vehicles (vehicles with with 48 V on-board electr electrical ical system) system) ECO Assist analyzes data for the vehicle's expected route. This allows the system to optimally adjust the driving style for the route ahead, save fuel and recuperate. ECO Assist is displayed on the Assistance menu(/ page 225). Driving and parking 153 The segments of distance display 2 show the distance to the event ahead as follows: R A few segments light up: the event ahead is near. R Many segments light up: the event ahead is further away. 1 Event ahead 2 Distance display for the event ahead 3 "Foot o the accelerator" prompt Displayable route events 1 When the vehicle nears the event, ECO Assist will calculate the optimal speed for maximum fuel economy and recuperative energy based on the distance, speed and gradient. The Foot off the Accelerator message 3 appears in the Instrument Display. The rst segments in front of the vehicle will turn green. The remaining segments will initially stay white. If you take your foot o the accelerator pedal in good time, the remaining segments on the display will successively turn green until the event shown is reached. The drivetrain will be set for maximum fuel economy. Recuperation will charge the battery. Recuperation will be adapted to the selected drive program. The event will be shown for a short time a er it has been passed. If there is no response to the Foot off the Accelerator prompt, the segments will remain white. If the event involves a vehicle in front, all segments will immediately turn green once there is a response to the Foot off the Accelerator prompt. For active ECO Assist in drive program ;, symbol 3 will appear on the instrument display and on the head-up display beside transmission position h. Symbol 3 will also appear when the assistant display is not selected. If the system does not intervene during the event ahead, nothing will be displayed. The system will be passive. ECO Assist is active only in drive programs ; and A. System limits System ECO Assist can function even more precisely if the route is adhered to when route guidance is active. The basic function is also available without active route guidance. Not all information and tra c situations can be foreseen. The quality depends on the map data. ECO Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. The driver must be ready to brake at all 154 Driving and parking times irrespective of whether the system intervenes. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R If visibility is poor, e.g. due to insu cient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c, direct sunlight or re ections. R If there is dirt on the windshield in the area of the multifunction camera or the camera is fogged up, damaged or obscured. R If road signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt, snow or insu cient lighting, or because they are obscured. R If the information on the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or out of date. R If signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in roadworks or in adjacent lanes. DYNAMIC YNAMIC SELECT switch Function of tthe he DYN DYNAMIC AMIC SELECT switch * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. % Depending on the engine and equipment, the vehicle has di erent drive programs. Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change between the following drive programs. The drive program selected appears in the multifunction display of the on-board computer. = Individual R Individual settings B Sport+ R Particularly sporty driving R Emphasizes the vehicle's own oversteering and understeering characteristics for a more active driving style R Only suitable for good road conditions, a dry road surface and a clear stretch of road C Sport Continues to o er stability but with a sporty setup R Allows the sporty driver a more active driving style R Only suitable for good road conditions, a dry road surface and a clear stretch of road R A Comfort R Comfortable and economical driving R Balance between traction and stability R Recommended for all road conditions ; Eco R Particularly economical driving R Balance between traction and stability R Recommended for all road conditions Driving and parking 155 % The ESP® settings in the drive programs ; and A are designed for stability. Therefore, choose one of these driving programs, especially when transporting roof loads, in trailer operation and when the vehicle is fully loaded or fully occupied. Depending on the drive program, the following systems change their characteristics: R Drive Engine and transmission management Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R ESP® R Vehicles wit withh AIR BODY BODY C CONTR ONTROL OL or DYN YNAMIC AMIC BOD BODYY CONTR CONTROL: OL: suspension R Electric power steering Selecting the the driv drivee pr progr ogram am Con guring guring DYNAMIC YNAMIC SELECT (multimedia sy sysstem) Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 DYNAMIC SELECT 5 Vehicle Setting tting driv drivee pr progr ogram am I Se # Select Individual Configuration. # Select and set a category. Switching Switching the the rest restor oration ation display display on or o # Switch Request at Start on or o . # Press DYNAMIC SELECT switch 1 forwards or backwards. The drive program selected appears in the instrument display. Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a prompt appears asking whether the last active drive program should be restored. If the ECO start/stop function was deactivated, an additional prompt appears asking if the function should remain deactivated. % The prompt appears only if the previously active settings deviate from the standard settings. Function o : the next time the vehicle is started the A drive program is set automatically. The 156 Driving and parking Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info # Select Vehicle. The vehicle data is displayed. the country-speci c guidelines for permissible tolerances (basis: UN-ECE No. 85 or countryspeci c guidelines). In uencing variables that can in uence this are, for example: R Sea level R Fuel quality R Outside temperature R Operating temperature of the engine % The values displayed serve only as orientation. The values for engine output and engine torque shown on the media display may deviate from the actual values. Displaying Displa ying engine data Calling up the the fuel consump consumption tion indicat indicator or Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info # Select Engine. The engine data is displayed. % The actual (maximum) values that can be achieved for engine output and engine torque may deviate from the certi ed values within Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info # Select Consumption. The current and average fuel consumption is displayed. ECO start/stop function is activated automatically. % This function must be activated for each user pro le separately. Only when this function is activated will the drive program and Eco start/stop setting for the previous journey be saved for the respective user pro le. Displaying Displa ying vehicle vehicle data Aut utomatic omatic tr transmission ansmission DIRECT SELECT lever lever Function of tthe he DIRECT SELECT lever lever & WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect gearshi ing If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the transmission position h or k, the vehicle may accelerate sharply. # If you engage the transmission position h or k when the vehicle is at a standstill, always depress the brake pedal rmly and do not accelerate at the same time. Driving and parking 157 & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children le unattended in the vehicle If children are le unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position. The current transmission position is displayed in the instrument display. Engaging neutral N Engaging neutral Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the rst point of resistance. % To shi into neutral i with the vehicle switched on, push the selector lever up or down for several seconds to the rst point of resistance. Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away. # In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # # # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children. Engaging rev Engaging rever erse se ggear ear R # Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever upwards past the rst point of resistance. j k i h Park position Reverse gear Neutral Drive position Proceed followss if you you w want ant the the aut automatic omatic Proceed as follow transmission transmission ttoo remain remain in neutral neutral i ev even en if the the vehicle is switched switched o or tthe he dr driv iver's er's door is opened: # Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral i when the vehicle is stationary. # Release the brake pedal. # Switch o the vehicle. 158 Driving and parking % If you then exit the vehicle leaving the SmartKey in the vehicle, the automatic transmission remains in neutral i. Engaging park position P Engaging park # Observe the notes on parking the vehicle (/ page 162). # Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a standstill. # When the vehicle is at a standstill, press button j. When the transmission position display shows j, the park position is engaged. If no transmission position display j appears, secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. % Depending on the situation, it may take a short time until j is engaged. Therefore, always pay attention to the transmission position display. Park position j is engaged automatically if one of the following conditions is met: R You switch the stationary vehicle o in transmission position h or k. R You open the driver's door when the vehicle is at a standstill or when driving at a very low speed and the transmission position is h or k. Manual gear earshi shi ing % To maneuver with an open driver's door, open the driver's door while at a standstill and engage transmission position h or k again. Engaging driv Engaging drivee position D # Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the rst point of resistance. When the automatic transmission is in transmission position h, it shi s the gears automatically. This depends, among other things, on the following factors: R The selected drive program R The position of the accelerator pedal R The driving speed When the automatic transmission is shi ed to position h, you can manually shi it with the steering wheel gearshi paddle. If permitted, the automatic transmission shi s to a higher or lower gear depending on the steering wheel gearshi paddle being pulled. You have two options to manually shi the automatic transmission: R Temporary setting R Permanent setting The gears shi automatically when manual shi ing is deactivated. Driving and parking 159 Tempor emporar aryy setting: setting: # To activat activate: e: pull steering wheel gearshi paddle 1 or 2. Manual shi ing is activated for a short time. The transmission position display shows p and the current gear. Permanent ermanent se setting: tting: Change to drive program =(/ page 155). # Select drive setting p (/ page 155). % How long the manual shi ing stays activated is dependent on various factors. Manual shi ing can be automatically deactivated in the following cases: R Changing the drive program R Restarting the vehicle R When the transmission position h is engaged again R Driving style # To shi up: pull steering wheel gearshi paddle 2. # To shi do down: wn: pull steering wheel gearshi paddle 1. # To deactivat deactivate: e: pull steering wheel gearshi paddle 2 and hold it in place. The transmission position display shows h. The gearshi recommendation assists you in adopting an economical driving style. Using kickdo kickdown wn # # Gearshi Gear shi recommendation To protect against engine overrev, the automatic transmission shi s up to the next gear when maximum engine speed has been reached. acceleration: depress the acceleraMaximum acceleration: tor pedal beyond the pressure point. Glide mode function * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # # If gearshi recommendation 1 appears next to the transmission position display, shi to the recommended gear. Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. With an anticipatory driving style, Glide mode helps you to reduce fuel consumption. Glide mode is characterized by the following: R The combustion engine is disconnected from the drivetrain and continues to run in neutral. R The transmission position display h is shown in green. 160 Driving and parking R Vehicles with with 48 V on-board on-board electrical electrical system: system: the combustion engine can be switched o . All of the vehicle functions remain active. Glide mode is activated if the following conditions are met: R Drive program ; is selected. R The speed is within a suitable range. R The road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep uphill or downhill inclines or tight curves. R You do not depress the accelerator or brake pedal (except for light brake applications). % Glide mode can also be activated if you have selected the "Eco" setting for the drive in the drive program =. Glide mode is deactivated again if one of the conditions is no longer met. Glide mode can also be prevented by the following parameters: R Incline R Downhill gradient R Temperature R R R R Height Speed Operating status of the engine Tra c situation Function of the the 4MATIC 4MATIC 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are driven. Together with ESP® and 4ETS, 4MATIC improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a driven wheel spins due to insu cient traction. If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and tra c conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible especially for maintaining a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. % In wintry road conditions, the maximum e ect of 4MATIC can be achieved only if you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains if necessary. Refueling Refueling tthe he vehicle vehicle & WARNING Risk of re or explosion from fuel Fuels are highly ammable. # Fire, open ames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoided. # Before refueling, switch o the vehicle and, if installed, the stationary heater, and leave them switched o during refueling. & WARNING Risk of injury from fuels Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health. # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. # Do not inhale fuel vapor. # Keep children away from fuel. Driving and parking 161 # Keep doors and windows closed during the refueling process. If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: # Immediately rinse fuel o your skin with soap and water. # If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately. # If you swallow fuel, seek medical attention immediately. Do not induce vomiting. # Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel. & WARNING Risk of re and explosion due to electrostatic charge Electrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapor. # # Before you open the fuel ller cap or take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the metallic vehicle body. To avoid creating another electrostatic charge, do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process. * NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Vehicles with a gasoline engine: Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel with low-sulfur spark-ignition engine fuel. This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R Diesel R Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100 R R Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100 Gasoline with additives containing metal If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: # Do not switch on the vehicle. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. * NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: R Do not switch on the vehicle. Otherwise fuel can enter the engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high. # # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. 162 Driving and parking # * NOTE Damage to the fuel system caused by over lled fuel tanks # # Only ll the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches o . # * NOTE Fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle # # Only ll the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches o . # Requir equirements: ements: R The vehicle is unlocked. % Do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again. Observe the notes on operating uids and fuel. Only refuel with fuel that has at least the octane number speci ed in the information label in the fuel ller ap. Otherwise, engine output can be reduced and fuel consumption increased. Insert fuel ller cap from above into bracket 2. Completely insert the pump nozzle into the tank ller neck, hook in place and refuel. Only ll the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches o . Replace the cap on the ller neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly. Close fuel ller ap 1. Parking arking Par arking king tthe he vehicle vehicle 1 2 3 4 5 Fuel ller ap Bracket for fuel ller cap Tire pressure table QR code for rescue card Fuel type # Press on the back area of fuel ller ap 1. Turn the fuel ller cap counter-clockwise and remove it. # & WARNING Risk of accident and injury caused by an insu ciently secured vehicle rolling away If the vehicle is not securely parked su ciently, it can roll away in an uncontrolled way even at a slight downhill gradient. # On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle rolls towards the curb if it starts moving. Driving and parking 163 # # Apply the parking brake. Switch the transmission to position j. & WARNING Risk of re caused by hot exhaust system parts Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite. # Park the vehicle so that no ammable material can come into contact with hot vehicle components. # In particular, do not park on dry grassland or harvested grain elds. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children le unattended in the vehicle If children are le unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # # # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it rolling away # Always secure the vehicle against rolling away. * NOTE Damage due to the vehicle lowering Vehicles with with AIR BODY BODY CONTR CONTROL OL or level level contr control: ol: The vehicle can lower because of temperature di erences or longer non-operational times. This can cause damage to parts of the body. # When stopping the vehicle and when driving o , make sure that there are no obstacles such as curbs under or in the immediate vicinity of the body. 164 Driving and parking Engage transmission position j in a stationary vehicle with the brake pedal applied (/ page 158). # Switch o the vehicle by pressing button 1. # Release the service brake slowly. # Get out of the vehicle and lock it. % When you park the vehicle, you can still operate the side windows and the sliding sunroof for approximately four minutes if the driver's door is closed. % When you park the vehicle, you can still operate the side windows and the panoramic sliding sunroof for approximately four minutes if the driver's door is closed. # # # # Bring the vehicle to a standstill by pressing the brake pedal. On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the curb if it starts moving. Apply the electric parking brake. Garag Gar agee door opener Progr Pr ogramming amming buttons buttons ffor or the the ggar arag agee door opener & DAN ANGER GER Risk of fatal injuries caused by exhaust gases Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases, such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never run the vehicle and, if present, the stationary heater indoors without su cient ventilation. & WARNING Risk of injury by becoming trapped when opening and closing a garage door When you operate or program a garage door with an integrated garage door opener, persons can become trapped or struck by the garage door if they stand within its range of movement. # Always make sure that nobody is within the range of the garage door's movement. Only operate the following doors using the garage door opener: R Doors with a safety stop and reversing feature R Doors which conform to the current U.S. safety standards Driving and parking 165 Req equir uirements: ements: R The vehicle has been parked outside the garage or outside the range of movement of the door. R The vehicle is switched on. R The vehicle has not been started. # % The garage door opener function is always available when the vehicle is switched on. # Check if the transmitter frequency of the remote control has the frequency range of 280 to 868 MHz. Radio equipment approval number: R NZLMUAHL5 (USA) R 4112A-MUAHL5 (Canada) Press and hold button 1, 2 or 3 that you wish to program. Indicator lamp 4 ashes yellow. % It can take up to 20 seconds before the indicator lamp ashes yellow. # Release the previously pressed button. Indicator lamp 4 continues to ash yellow. # Point remote control 6 from a distance of 0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) towards button 1, 2 or 3. # Press and hold button 5 of remote control 6 until one of the following signals appears: R Indicator lamp 4 lights up green continuously. Programming is complete. R Indicator lamp 4 ashes green. Programming was successful. Additionally, syn- chronization of the rolling code with the door system must be carried out. # If indicator lamp 4 does not light up or ash green: repeat the procedure. # Release all of the buttons. % The remote control for the door drive is not included in the scope of delivery of the garage door opener. Synchronizing Synchr onizing the the rolling rolling code Requir equirements: ements: R The door system uses a rolling code. R The vehicle must be within range of the garage door or door drive. R The vehicle as well as persons and objects are located outside the range of movement of the door. # Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Initiate the next step within approximately 30 seconds. 166 Driving and parking Press previously programmed button 1, 2 or 3 repeatedly until the door closes. When the door closes, programming is completed. % Please also read the operating instructions for the door drive. # Troubleshoo oubleshooting ting when progr programming amming the the remote remote contr control ol # Check if the transmitter frequency of remote control 6 is supported. # Replace the batteries in remote control 6. # Hold remote control 6 at various angles from a distance of 0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. # Hold remote control 6 at the same angles at various distances in front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. On remote controls that transmit only for a limited period, press button 5 on remote control 6 again before transmission ends. # Angle the antenna line of the garage door opener unit towards the remote control. % Support and additional information on programming: R On the toll free HomeLink® Hotline on 1-800-355-3515 R On the Internet at https:// www.homelink.com/mercedes # Opening or closing the arag agee door the ggar Req equir uirements: ements: R The corresponding button is programmed to operate the door. # # Press and hold buttons 1, 2 or 3 until the door opens or closes. If indicator lamp 4 ashes yellow a er approximately 20 seconds: press and hold the previously pressed button again until the door opens or closes. Clear Clearing ing the the gar garag agee door opener memory Press and hold buttons 1 and 3. Indicator lamp 4 lights up yellow. # If indicator lamp 4 ashes green: release buttons 1 and 3. The entire memory has been deleted. # Electric Electr ic parking parking br brake ake Function of tthe he electric electric parking parking brak brakee (appl (applying ying automaticall automatically) y) & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children le unattended in the vehicle If children are le unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. Driving and parking 167 In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # # # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children. The electric electric par parking king brak brakee is applied if tthe he transtransmission is in position j and one of the the ffollo ollowing wing conditions is ful lled: R The vehicle is switched o . R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened. % To prevent application: pull the handle of the electric parking brake (/ page 168). In tthe he ffollo ollowing wing situations, tthe he electric electric parking parking brak br akee is also applied: R The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle stationary. R Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle stationary. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing the vehicle to a standstill. R In addition, one of the following wing conditions the follo mustt be ful lled: mus The vehicle is switched o . The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened. There is a system malfunction. The power supply is insu cient. The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period. When the electric parking brake is applied, the red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. % The electric parking brake is not automatically applied if the vehicle is switched o by the ECO start/stop function. Function of the the electric electric parking parking brak brakee (r (releasing eleasing automaticall omatically) y) aut The electric electric parking parking brak brakee is released released when the the following ollowing conditions are are ful lled: R The driver's door is closed. R The vehicle has been started. R The transmission is in position h or k and you depress the accelerator pedal or you shi from transmission position j to h or k when on level ground. R If the transmission is in position k, the trunk lid must be closed. R The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat. If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, one of the following conditions must be ful lled: You shi from transmission position j. or 168 Driving and parking - You have previously driven at speeds greater than 2 mph (3 km/h). When the electric parking brake is released, the red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Applying/r eleasing tthe he electric electric parking parking brake brake Applying/releasing manually Appl Applying ying Push handle 1. The red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. % The electric parking brake is only securely applied if the red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp is lit continuously. # Releasing # Switch on the vehicle. # Pull handle 1. The red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Emergency braking Emergency braking Press and hold handle 1. As long as the vehicle is driving, the Please Release Parking Brake message is displayed and the red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp ashes. When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied. The red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. # Information Infor mation on collision detection detection on a parked parked vehicle If a collision is detected when the tow-away alarm is armed on a locked vehicle, you will receive a noti cation in the multimedia system when you switch the vehicle on. You will receive information about the following points: R The area of the vehicle that may have been damaged. R The force of the impact. The following situation can lead to inadvertent activation: R The parked vehicle is moved, for example, in a two-story garage. % Disarm the tow-away alarm in order to prevent inadvertent activation. If you disarm the tow-away alarm, collision detection will also be deactivated. Driving and parking 169 % If the battery is severely discharged, the function for detecting a collision on a parked vehicle is automatically deactivated to facilitate the next engine start. System em limits Syst Detection may be restricted in the following situations: R The vehicle is damaged without impact, for example, if an outside mirror is torn o or the paint is damaged by a key R An impact occurs at low speed R The electric parking brake is not applied Notes on parking parking tthe he vehicle vehicle ffor or an ext extended ended per period iod If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six weeks, it may su er damage through disuse. The 12 V battery may also be impaired or damaged by heavy discharging. % Further information can be obtained at a quali ed specialist workshop. Standb andbyy mode (ext (extension ension of tthe he st start arter er batt batter ery's y's per period iod out of use) Standb andbyy mode function % This function is not available for all models. If standby mode is activated, energy loss will be minimized during extended periods of non-operation. Standby mode is characterized by the following: R The starter battery is preserved. R The maximum non-operational time appears in the media display. R The connection to online services is interrupted. R The ATA (anti-the alarm system) is not available. R The interior motion sensor and tow-away alarm functions are not available. R The function for detecting collisions on a parked vehicle is not available. If the following conditions are ful lled, standby mode can be activated or deactivated using the multimedia system: R The vehicle is switched on. R The vehicle has not been started. Exceeding the vehicle's displayed non-operational time may cause inconvenience; i.e. it cannot be guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably start the vehicle. Charge the starter battery in the following situations: R The vehicle's non-operational time must be extended. R The Battery Charge Insufficient for Standby Mode message appears in the media display. % Standby mode is automatically deactivated when the vehicle is switched on. Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating st standb andbyy mode (par (parking king the vehicle vehicle ffor or an ext extended ended period) period) Requir equirements: ements: R The engine is switched o . 170 Driving and parking Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Standby Mode. # Select Yes. Driving and driving Driving driving safety safety sy syst stems ems Driving Dr iving systems systems and your your rresponsibility esponsibility Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems which assist you in driving, parking and maneuvering the vehicle. The driving systems are only aids. They are not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings and do not relieve you of your responsibility pertaining to road tra c law. The driver is always responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Pay attention to the tra c conditions at all times and intervene when necessary. Be aware of the limitations regarding the safe use of these systems. Driving systems can neither reduce the risk of accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. They cannot always take into account road, weather or tra c conditions. Infor Inf ormation mation on vehicle vehicle sensor sensorss and cameras cameras Some driving and driving safety systems use cameras as well as radar or ultrasonic sensors to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Multifunction camera Cameras in the outside mirrors Front radar Front camera Corner radars Ultrasonic sensors Rear view camera & WARNING Risk of accident due to restricted detection performance of vehicle sensors and cameras If the area around vehicle sensors or cameras is covered, damaged or dirty, certain driving and safety systems cannot function correctly. There is a risk of an accident. # Keep the area around vehicle sensors or cameras clear of any obstructions and clean. # Have damage to the bumper, radiator grille or stone chipping in the area of the front and rear windows repaired at a quali ed specialist workshop. Driving and parking 171 Particularly, keep the areas around the sensors and cameras free of dirt, ice or slush (/ page 285). The sensors and cameras must not be covered and the detection ranges around them must be kept free. Do not attach additional license plate bracket, advertisements, stickers, foils or foils to protect against stone chippings in the detection range of the sensors and cameras. Make sure that there are no overhanging loads protruding into the detection range. If there is damage to a bumper or the radiator grille, or a er an impact, have the function of the sensors checked at a quali ed specialist workshop. Have damage or stone chipping in the area of the cameras on the front and rear windows repaired at a quali ed specialist workshop. % The rear view camera can extend and retract automatically for the purpose of calibration, even though there is no camera image in the display. Over Ov ervie view w of driving driving systems systems and driving driving safety safety systems systems R Anti-lock Braking System) (/ page 172) ABS (A R R R R R R R R R R R R BAS (B Brake Assist System) (/ page 172) ® ESP (EElectronic Stability Program) (/ page 172) ESP® Crosswind Assist (/ page 173) EBD (EElectronic Brakeforce Distribution) (/ page 174) STEER CONTROL (/ page 174) HOLD function (/ page 174) Hill Start Assist (/ page 175) ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 176) Cruise control (/ page 177) Tra c Sign Assist (/ page 195) DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL (/ page 204) AIR BODY CONTROL (/ page 204) Driving Assistance ance package package Driving Assist The following functions are part of the Driving Assistance Package. Certain functions are only available in some countries. Some functions are also available without the Driving Assistance Package, albeit with restricted functionality. R R R R R R R R R R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 179) Active Speed Limit Assist (country-dependent) (/ page 183) Route-based speed adaptation (countrydependent) (/ page 184) Active Brake Assist (/ page 190) Active Steering Assist (country-dependent) (/ page 186) Active Emergency Stop Assist (countrydependent) (/ page 188) Active Lane Change Assist (country-dependent) (/ page 189) Active Stop-and-Go Assist (country-dependent) (/ page 186) Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning (/ page 199) Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 202) Parking arking Pack Package age Rear view camera (/ page 206) R Surround view camera (/ page 208) R 172 Driving and parking R R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 211) Active Parking Assist (/ page 216) Functions of ABS The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) regulates the brake pressure in critical driving situations: R During braking, for instance, at maximum fullstop braking or if there is insu cient tire traction, the wheels are prevented from locking. R Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured. If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and can serve as a reminder to take extra care while driving. System System limits R ABS is active from speeds of approx. 3 mph (5 km/h). R ABS may be impaired or may not function if a malfunction has occurred and the yellow ! ABS warning lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster a er the vehicle is started. Function of BAS & WARNING Risk of an accident caused by a malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist System) If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. # Depress the brake pedal with full force in emergency braking situations. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The Brake Assist System (BAS) supports your emergency braking situation with additional brake force. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is activated: R BAS automatically boosts the brake pressure. R BAS can shorten the braking distance. R ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. Function of ESP® & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is deactivated If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. # ESP® should only be deactivated in the following situations. * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) can monitor and improve driving stability and traction in the following situations within physical limits: R When pulling away on wet or slippery road. R When braking. Driving and parking 173 If the vehicle deviates from the direction desired by the driver, ESP® can stabilize the vehicle by intervening in the following ways: R One or more wheels are braked. R The engine output is adapted according to the situation. When ESP® is deactivated, the å warning lamp lights up continuously: R Driving stability will no longer be improved. R The drive wheels could spin. R ETS/4ETS traction control is still active. % When ESP® is deactivated, you are still assisted by ESP® when braking. When the ÷ warning lamp ashes, one or several wheels has reached its grip limit: R Adapt your driving style to suit the current road and weather conditions. R Do not deactivate ESP®. R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary when pulling away. Deactivate ESP® in the following situations to improve traction: R When using snow chains. R In deep snow. R On sand or gravel. % Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, which enhances traction. If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the following information: R Warning and indicator lamps (/ page 405) R Display messages (/ page 353) ETS/4ET S (Electr (Electronic onic Traction Traction Syst System) em) ETS/4ETS ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP® and makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on a slippery road. ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by intervening in the following ways: R The drive wheels are braked individually if they spin. R More drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. In uence of dr driv ivee progr programs ams on ESP® The drive programs enable ESP® to adapt to different weather and road conditions as well as the driver's preferred driving style. Depending on the selected drive program, the appropriate ESP® mode will be activated. You can select the drive programs using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch (/ page 155). Function of ESP® Cr Crosswind osswind Assist ESP® Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehicle in the lane: R ESP® Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds between approx. 47 mph (75 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h) when driving straight ahead or cornering slightly. R The vehicle is stabilized by means of individual brake application on one side. 174 Driving and parking Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating ESP® (Electr (Electronic onic Stability Stability Progr Program) am) Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access % ESP® can only be activated/deactivated using quick access when at least one other function is available in quick access. ESP® can otherwise be found in the Assistance menu. * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # # # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. Select ESP. Select On or å Off. ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster. Observe the information on warning lamps and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster. Function of EBD R Electronic Breakforce Distribution (EBD) is characterized by the following: R Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure on the rear wheels. R Improved driving stability when braking, especially on bends. R Function of STEER STEER C CONTR ONTROL OL STEER CONTROL assists you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilization. This steering recommendation is given in the following situations: R Both right wheels or both le wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake R The vehicle starts to skid System System limits STEER CONTROL may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R ESP® is deactivated. ESP® is malfunctioning. The steering is malfunctioning. If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electric power steering. HOLD function HOLD function The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a standstill without requiring you to depress the brake pedal, e.g. while waiting in tra c. The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsibility for the vehicle safely standing still remains with the driver. System System limits The HOLD function is only intended to provide assistance when driving and is not a su cient means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling away when stationary. R The incline must not be greater than 30%. Driving and parking 175 Activating/deactiv ctivating/deactivating ating tthe he HOLD function & WARNING Risk of an accident due to the HOLD function being active when you leave the vehicle If the vehicle is only braked with the HOLD function it could, in the following situations, roll away: R If there is a malfunction in the system or in the power supply. R If the HOLD function is deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal or brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. # Always secure the vehicle against rolling away before you leave it. Req equir uirements: ements: R The vehicle is stationary. R The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on the driver's side is fastened. R The vehicle has been started or has been automatically switched o by the ECO start/ stop function. R R R The electric parking brake is released. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. The transmission is in position h, k or i. Activating ctivating the the HOLD function Depress the brake pedal, and a er a short time quickly depress further until the ë display appears in the Instrument Display. # Release the brake pedal. # Deactivating the Deactivating the HOLD function # Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. or # Depress the brake pedal until the ë display disappears from the Instrument Display. The HOLD function is deactivated in the following situations: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated. R The transmission is shi ed to position j. R The vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake. In the following situations, the vehicle is held by transmission position j and/or by the electric parking brake: R The seat belt is unfastened and the driver's door is opened. R The vehicle is switched o . R There is a system malfunction. R The power supply is insu cient. Function of Hill Star Startt Assist Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short time when pulling away on a hill under the following conditions: R The transmission is in position h or k. R The electric parking brake is released. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll away. 176 Driving and parking & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to the vehicle rolling away A er a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer holds the vehicle. # Swi ly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Do not leave the vehicle when it is being held by Hill Start Assist. ATTENTION ASSIST Function of ATTENTION ATTENTION ASSIST ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monotonous journeys, e.g. on highways and trunk roads. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break. ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration in time. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time that allow for adequate recuperation. You can choose between two settings: andard: d: normal system sensitivity. Standar R Sensitive: Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The driver is warned earlier and the attention level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adapted accordingly. R If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentration are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break! warning appears in the Instrument Display. You can acknowledge the message and take a break if necessary. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again a er a minimum of 15 minutes. You can have the following status information for ATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the assistance menu of the on-board computer: R The length of the journey since the last break. R The attention level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST: The fuller the circle, the higher the attention level determined As your attention wanes, the circle in the center of the display becomes smaller If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot issue a warning, the System Suspended message appears. If a warning is given in the Instrument Display, the multimedia system o ers to search for a rest area. You can select a rest area and start navigation to this rest area. This function can be activated and deactivated in the multimedia system. If ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the Û symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the Instrument Display. A er the vehicle is started, ATTENTION ASSIST is automatically activated. The last selected sensitivity level remains stored. Driving and parking 177 System Syst em limits ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 124 mph (200 km/h) speed range. Particularly in the following situations, ATTENTION ASSIST only functions in a restricted manner and warnings may be delayed or not occur: R If you have been driving for less than approximately 30 minutes. R If the road condition is poor (uneven road surface or potholes). R If there is a strong side wind. R If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration). R If Active Steering Assist is activated and active (/ page 186). R If the time has been set incorrectly. R If you change lanes and vary your speed frequently in active driving situations. The ATTENTION ASSIST drowsiness or alertness assessment is reset and restarted when continuing the journey in the following situations: R You switch o the vehicle. R If you unfasten your seat belt and open the driver's door (e.g. to change drivers or take a break). Setting tting ATTENTION ATTENTION ASSIST Se Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Attention Assist Setting tting options options Se # Select Standard, Sensitive or Off. Suggesting Sugges ting a res restt ar area ea # Select Suggest Rest Area. # Activate or deactivate the function. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects fatigue or increasing lack of attention, it suggests a rest area in the vicinity. # Select the suggested rest area. You are guided to the selected rest area. Speed control control cruise cruise contr control ol Function of cruise cruise contr control ol Cruise control regulates the speed to the value selected by the driver. If you accelerate to overtake, for example, the stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal a er overtaking, cruise control will resume speed regulation back to the stored speed. You can store any speed above 15 mph (20 km/h) up to the maximum design speed. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 170). Mercedes‑ AMG vehicles: vehicles: Cruise control is availaMercedes‑AMG ble up to a maximum speed of 155 mph (250 km/h). Displays Displays in the the Ins Instr trument ument Display R h (gray): cruise control is selected but not yet activated. R h (green): cruise control is active. 178 Driving and parking A stored speed appears along with the h display. % The segments between the stored speed and the end of the segment display light up in the speedometer. System limits System Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the engine's braking e ect. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Do not use cruise control in the following situations: R In tra c situations which require frequent changes of speed, e.g. in heavy tra c, on winding roads R R On slippery roads. Accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. When visibility is poor Oper Operating ating cruise cruise control control & WARNING Risk of accident due to stored speed If you call up the stored speed and this is lower than your current speed, the vehicle decelerates. # Take into account the tra c situation before calling up the stored speed. Req equir uirements: ements: R Cruise control is selected. R ESP® must be activated, but not intervening. R The vehicle speed is at least 15 mph (20 km/h). R The transmission is in position h. Steering wheel control panel for cruise control J Adopts the stored/detected speed ± Deactivates cruise control M Activates cruise control N Deactivates cruise control 1 Control panel to increase/decrease speed Activ ctivating ating cruise cruise contr control ol # Press M. Driving and parking 179 Activating ctivating cruise cruise control control # Press M or N on control panel 1. The current speed is stored and maintained by the vehicle. or # Press J. The last stored speed is called up and maintained by the vehicle. If the last stored speed has previously been deleted, the current vehicle speed is stored. % When you switch o the vehicle, the last speed stored is deleted. Increasing/decreasing Increasing/decr easing tthe he st stor ored ed speed # To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards from the bottom of control panel 1. R The stored speed is increased by 1 mph (1 km/h). # To decrease the stored speed: swipe downwards from the top of control panel 1. R The stored speed is decreased by 1 mph (1 km/h). or # Brie y press M or N on control panel 1. The stored speed is increased or decreased to the following values depending on the unit: R mph: the next value ending in 5 R km/h: the next value ending in 0 or Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. Press M on control panel 1. Adopting dopting a detect detected ed speed If cruise control is activated and Tra c Sign Assist has detected a speed restriction sign with a maximum permissible speed and this is displayed in the instrument cluster: # Press J. The maximum permissible speed shown by the tra c sign is stored and the vehicle maintains this speed. # # Deactivating cr Deactivating cruise uise control control # Press ±. Deactivating cruise Deactivating cruise control control # Press N. % If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® intervenes, cruise control is deactivated. Active ctive Distance Distance Assist Assist DISTR DISTRONIC ONIC Function of Activ Activee Dist Distance ance Assist Assist DIS DISTR TRONIC ONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the set speed on free- owing roads. If vehicles in front are detected, the set distance is maintained, if necessary, until the vehicle comes to a halt. The vehicle accelerates or brakes depending on the distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed. The speed and distance to the vehicle in front are set and saved using the steering wheel. Available speed range: R Vehicles wit without hout Dr Driving iving Assistance Assistance Pack Packag age: e: 15 mph (20 km/h) - 120 mph (200 km/h) R Vehicles wit withh Driving Driving Assistance Assistance Pack Packag age: e: 15 mph (20 km/h) - 130 mph (210 km/h) 180 Driving and parking Other features of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: R Adjusts the driving style depending on the selected drive program (fuel-saving, comfortable or dynamic) R Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if the turn signal indicator is switched on to change to the overtaking lane R Vehicles with with Driving Driving Assistance Assistance P Pack ackag age: e: Reacts to stationary vehicles detected in urban speed ranges (except bicycles and motorcycles) Takes one-sided overtaking restrictions into account on highways or on multi-lane roads with separate roadways (countrydependent) Vehicles with with Driving Driving Assistance Assistance Pack Packag agee and Par arking king Pack Packag age: e: if the vehicle has been braked to a standstill on multi-lane, separate roadways by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, it can automatically follow the vehicle in front when driving o again within 30 seconds. If a critical situation is detected when driving o , a visual and acoustic warning is given indicating that the driver must now take control of the vehicle. The vehicle is not accelerated any further. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 170). Active ctive Dist Distance ance Assist Assist DIS DISTR TRONIC ONIC displays displays in the the Ins Instr trument ument Display Assistance graphic 1 Route-based speed adaptation: type of route event (/ page 184) 2 Vehicle in front 3 Distance indicator 4 Set speci ed distance 5 Active Lane Change Assist lane change dis- play Per ermanent manent status status displa displayy of Activ Activee Distance Distance Assis Assistt DIS DISTR TRONIC ONIC R k (white): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC selected, speci ed distance set R k (white vehicle, green speedometer): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, speci ed distance set and vehicle detected R k (green): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, speci ed distance set and vehicle detected R r: Route-based speed adaptation active (/ page 184). The stored speed is shown along with the permanent status display and highlighted on the speedometer. When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is passive, the speed is grayed out. % On highways or high-speed major roads, the green ç vehicle symbol is displayed cyclically when the vehicle is ready to pull away. Driving and parking 181 % If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system is switched to passive mode. The ç Suspended message appears in the Instrument Display. Display on the Display the speedomet speedometer er The stored speed is highlighted on the speedometer. If the speed of the vehicle in front or the speed adjustment for the route event ahead is less than the stored speed, the segments in the speedometer light up. The Instrument Display shows the deactivation of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, as well as alterations to the speed due to manual or automatic adoption of the maximum permissible speed. Syst System em limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations, for example: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying ambient light. R The windshield in the area of the camera is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered. R R R If the radar sensors are dirty or covered. In parking garages or on roads with steep uphill or downhill gradients. If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as bicycles or motorcycles. In addition, on slippery roads, braking or accelerating can cause one or several wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in these situations. & WARNING Risk of accident from acceleration or braking by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accelerate or brake in the following cases, for example: R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. R If the stored speed is called up and is considerably faster or slower than the currently driven speed. R If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in front or does not react to relevant objects. # Always carefully observe the tra c conditions and be ready to brake at all times. Take into account the tra c situation before calling up the stored speed. # & WARNING Risk of accident due to insu cient deceleration by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not su cient, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning. # Adjust your speed and maintain a suitable distance from the vehicle in front. # Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take evasive action. 182 Driving and parking & WARNING Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is impaired R R R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not react or has a limited reaction: R when driving on a di erent lane or when changing lanes R to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or stationary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles R to complex tra c conditions R to oncoming vehicles and crossing tra c The transmission is in position h. All the doors are closed. Check of the radar sensor system has been successfully completed. Assist DISTRONIC # To operat operatee Activ Activee Dist Distance ance Assist Assist DIS DISTR TRONIC: ONIC: press the respective button with only one nger or swipe on the control panel. Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating A Activ ctivee Dist Distance ance Assist DISTR DIS TRONIC ONIC # Press H. As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. # Always observe the tra c conditions carefully and react accordingly. Operating Oper ating A Activ ctivee Distance Distance Assist Assist DISTR DISTRONIC ONIC Requir equirements: ements: R The electric parking brake is released. R ESP® is activated and is not intervening. K Increases/decreases the speci ed distance H Activates/deactivates Active Distance J Adopts the stored/detected speed ± Deactivates Active Distance Assist 1 DISTRONIC Increases/decreases the speed Activ ctivating ating Activ Activee Dist Distance ance Assist Assist DISTR DISTRONIC ONIC # To activat activatee without without a st stor ored ed speed: on control panel 1 press M on the upper section or N on the lower section or J. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. or # To activat activatee with with a st stor ored ed speed: press J. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The current speed is stored and maintained by the vehicle. Driving and parking 183 Increasing or reducing Increasing reducing tthe he speed # To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards from the bottom of control panel 1. R The stored speed is increased by 1 mph (1 km/h). # To decrease the stored speed: swipe downwards from the top of control panel 1. R The stored speed is decreased by 1 mph (1 km/h). or # Brie y press M on the upper section or N on the lower section of control panel 1. The stored speed is increased or reduced by 5 mph (10 km/h). or # Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. # Press M on the upper section of control panel 1. Adop dopting ting tthe he limit speed shown shown in tthe he instr instrument ument cluster cluster # Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. # Press J. The limit speed displayed in the instrument cluster is adopted as the stored speed. The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the stored speed. away with Pulling away with Activ Activee Dist Distance ance Assist DISTR ONIC DISTRONIC # Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and remove your foot from the brake pedal. # Press J. or # Depress the accelerator pedal brie y and rmly. The functions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC continue to be carried out. Reducing or increasing increasing tthe he speci ed dist distance ance fr from om the the vehicle vehicle in fr front ont # Press K. The h display appears. The speci ed distance is reduced by one level. If the lowest level is already selected, the selection jumps to the highest level. Deactivating Deactivating Activ Activee Distance Distance Assis Assistt DISTR DISTRONIC ONIC & WARNING Risk of an accident due to Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC being active when you leave the driver's seat If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle is being braked by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away. # Always deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away before you leave the driver's seat. Press ±. % If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® intervenes, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. # Function of A Activ ctivee Speed Limit Assist If a change in the speed limit of 12 mph (20 km/h) or more is detected and automatic adoption of speed limits is activated, the new speed limit is automatically adopted as the stored speed (/ page 196). 184 Driving and parking The driven speed is adjusted when the vehicle is level with the tra c sign at the latest. In the case of signs indicating entry into an urban area, the speed is adapted according to the speed permitted within the urban area. The speed limit display in the Instrument Display is always updated when the vehicle is level with the tra c sign. If there is no speed restriction on an unlimited stretch of road (e.g. on a freeway), the recommended speed is automatically adopted as the stored speed. The system uses the speed stored on an unlimited stretch of road as the recommended speed. If you do not alter the stored speed on an unlimited stretch of road, the recommended speed is 80 mph (130 km/h). If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been put into passive mode by pressing the accelerator pedal, only speed limits which are higher than the set speed are adopted. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 170). System em limits Syst The system limits of Tra c Sign Assist apply to the detection of tra c signs (/ page 195). Speed limits below 12 mph (20 km/h) are not automatically adopted by the system as the stored speed. Temporary speed restrictions (e.g. for a certain time or due to weather conditions) cannot be properly detected by the system. The maximum permissible speed applying to a vehicle with a trailer is not detected by the system. Adjust the speed in these situations. & WARNING Risk of accident due to Active Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle's speed The speed adopted by Active Speed Limit Assist may be too high or incorrect in some individual cases, such as: R at speed limits below 12 mph (20 km/h) R in wet conditions or in fog R when towing a trailer # # Ensure that the driven speed complies with tra c regulations. Adjust the driving speed to suit current tra c and weather conditions. Function of rrout oute-based e-based speed adapt adaptation ation When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated, the vehicle speed will be adapted accordingly to the route events ahead. Depending on the drive program selected, the vehicle negotiates a route event ahead in an economical, comfortable or dynamic manner. When the route event has been passed, the vehicle accelerates again to the stored speed. The set distance to the vehicle in front, vehicles detected ahead and speed restrictions ahead are taken into account. You can activate and deactivate route-based speed adaptation in the multimedia system (/ page 185). The following route events are taken into account: R Curves R T-intersections, roundabouts and toll plazas R Turns and exits Driving and parking 185 R Tra c jams ahead (only with Live Tra c Information ) % When the toll station is reached, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC adopts the speed as the stored speed. Also, the speed is reduced if the turn signal indicator to change lanes is switched on and one of the following situations is detected: R Turning o at intersections R Driving on slowing-down lanes R Driving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down lanes The driver is responsible for choosing the right speed and observing other road users. This applies in particular to intersections, roundabouts and tra c lights, as route-based speed adaptation does not brake the vehicle to a standstill. When route guidance is active, the rst speed adjustment is carried out automatically. If the turn signal indicator is switched on, the selected route is con rmed and further speed adjustment is activated. Speed adaptation is canceled in the following cases: R If the turn signal indicator is switched o before the route event. R If the driver depresses the accelerator or brake pedal during the process. System System limits Route-based speed adaptation does not take right of way regulations into account. The driver is responsible for complying with road tra c regulations and driving at a suitable speed. The speed adaptation made by the system may not always be suitable, particularly in the following situations: R The road's course not clearly visible R Road narrowing R Varying maximum permissible speeds in individual lanes, for example at toll plazas R Wet road surfaces, snow or ice In these situations the driver must intervene accordingly. & WARNING Risk of accident in spite of route-based speed adaptation Route-based speed adaptation can malfunction or be temporarily unavailable in the following situations: R If the driver does not follow the calculated route R If map data is not up-to-date or available R In the event of roadworks R In bad weather or road conditions R If the accelerator pedal is depressed R In the event of electronically displayed speed limitations # Adapt the speed to the tra c situation. Setting Se tting rout route-based e-based speed adapt adaptation ation Requir equirements: ements: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated. R ECO Assist is active. 186 Driving and parking Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Route-based Speed # Activate or deactivate the function. When the function is active, the vehicle speed is adjusted depending on the route events ahead. % Further information on the route-based speed adaptation (/ page 184). Function of Activ Activee Tr Traa c Jam Assist Active Tra c Jam Assist helps you when in tra c jams on multi-lane roads with separate roadways by automatically pulling away within 60 seconds and with moderate steering maneuvers. It orients itself using the vehicle in front and lane markings. Active Tra c Jam Assist automatically maintains a safe distance from the vehicle in front and vehicles cutting in. Active Tra c Jam Assist requires you, as the driver, to keep your hands on the steering wheel at all times so that you are able to intervene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. Observe the notes on driving sys- tems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 170). Active Tra c Jam Assist activates automatically as soon as all of the requirements are met: The ¬ status display appears in the instrument cluster when the function is active. Requirements: R You are in a tra c jam on a freeway or highspeed major road. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated and active (/ page 182). R Active Brake Assist is available (/ page 190). R Active Steering Assist is activated and active (/ page 188). R Active Tra c Jam Assist is activated (/ page 186). R You are traveling no faster than 35 mph (60 km/h). System em limits Syst The system limitations of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist apply to Active Tra c Jam Assist. Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating Activ Activee Tr Traa c Jam Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Select ¬. Activ ctivee Steer Steering ing Assist Function of A Activ ctivee Steer Steering ing Assist Active Steering Assist is only available up to a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). The system helps you to stay in the center of the lane by means of moderate steering interventions. Depending on the speed driven, Active Steering Assist uses the vehicles ahead and lane markings as a reference. % Depending on the country, in the lower speed range Active Steering Assist can use the surrounding tra c as a reference. If necessary, Active Steering Assist can then also provide assistance when driving away from the center of the lane, for example, to form a rescue lane. If the detection of lane markings and vehicles ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist switches Driving and parking 187 to passive mode. The system provides no support in this case. change from active to passive mode or vice versa at any time. Status display display of A Activ ctivee Steer Steering ing Assist Assist in the the Instr Ins trument ument Display R Ø (gray): activated and passive R Ø (green): activated and active R Ø (red): system limits detected R Ø (white, red hands): "hands on the steering wheel" prompt % During the transition from active to passive status, the Ø symbol is shown as enlarged and ashing. Once the system is passive, the Ø symbol is shown as gray in the Instrument Display. % Depending on the selected vehicle settings, Active Steering Assist may be unavailable. St Steer eering ing and touc touchh detection detection The driver is required to keep their hands on the steering wheel at all times and be able to intervene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. The driver must expect a If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steering wheel, display 1 appears. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning message. If the driver does not react to the warning for a considerable period, the system can initiate an emergency stop (/ page 188). If the driver steers, no warning is issued, or the warning is ended. If Active Steering Assist detects that a system limit has been reached, a visual warning is issued and a warning tone sounds. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 170). System System limits Active Steering Assist has a limited steering torque for lateral guidance. In some cases, the steering intervention is not su cient to keep the vehicle in the lane or to drive through exits. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following instances: R There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, greatly varying ambient light or strong shadows on the road. R There is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c, direct sunlight or re ections. R Insu cient road illumination. R The windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g. by a sticker. 188 Driving and parking R R R R R No, or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, or the markings change quickly, for example, in a construction area or intersections. The lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. The road is narrow and winding. There are obstacles on the lane or projecting out into the lane, such as object markers. The system does not provide assistance in the following conditions: R On tight curves and when turning. R When crossing intersections. R At roundabouts or toll stations. R When the tire pressure is too low. & WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly stops functioning If the system limits of Active Steering Assist are reached there is no guarantee that the system will remain active or will keep the vehicle in lane. # Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and observe the tra c carefully. # Always steer the vehicle paying attention to tra c conditions. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Select a Steering Assist. Function of A Activ ctivee Emergency Emergency St Stop op Assist & WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly intervenes The detection of lane markings and objects may malfunction and cause unexpected steering interventions. # Steer according to tra c conditions. Activating/deactiv ctivating/deactivating ating A Activ ctivee Steer Steering ing Assist Req equir uirements: ements: R ESP® is activated, but is not intervening. If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steering wheel, display 1 appears in the Instrument Display. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, or gives no con rmation to the system, a warning Driving and parking 189 tone sounds in addition to the visual warning message. If the driver still does not respond to the warning, the Beginning Emergency Stop message appears in the Instrument Display. If the driver still does not respond, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC reduces the speed. The vehicle is decelerated in stages to a standstill. Depending on the country, at speeds below 40 mph (60 km/h) the hazard warning lights switch on automatically. When the vehicle is stationary, the following actions are carried out: R The vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is ended. R The vehicle is unlocked. R If possible, an emergency call is placed to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. The driver can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions: R Steering R R Braking or accelerating Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Activ ctivee Lane Chang Changee Assist Function of Activ Activee Lane Change Change Assist Active Lane Change Assist supports the driver when changing lanes by applying steering torque if the driver activates a turn signal indicator. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 170). Assistance when changing lanes is provided if all the following conditions are met: R You are driving on a freeway or road with multiple lanes in the direction of travel. R The neighboring lane is separated by a broken lane marking. R No vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane. R The vehicle speed is between 50 mph (80 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h). R R Active Lane Change Assist is switched on in the multimedia system. Active Steering Assist is activated and active. If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and a lane change is permitted, the lane change begins a er the driver has activated the turn signal indicator. This is shown to the driver with a green arrow next to the ± steering wheel symbol. The Lane Change to the Left message, for example, also appears. If Active Lane Change Assist has been activated with the turn signal indicator but a lane change is not immediately possible, a gray arrow appears next to the ± steering wheel symbol, which remains green. When lane change assistance starts, the turn signal indicator is automatically activated along with the display in the Instrument Display. If a lane change is not possible, the arrow is faded out a er a few seconds and a new lane change must be initiated. An immediate lane change is only possible on freeway sections without speed limits. If the system is impaired, Active Lane Change Assist may be canceled. If it is canceled, the 190 Driving and parking Lane Change Canceled message appears in the Instrument Display. In addition, a warning tone may sound, depending on the situation. & WARNING Risk of accident when changing lane to an occupied adjacent lane Lane Change Assist cannot always clearly detect if the adjacent lane is free. The lane change might be initiated although the adjacent lane is not free. # Before changing lanes, make sure that the neighboring lane is free and there is no danger to other road users. # Monitor the lane change. & WARNING Risk of accident if Lane Change Assist unexpectedly stops functioning If the system limitations for Lane Change Assist have been reached, there is no guarantee that the system will remain active. Lane Change Assist cannot then assist you by applying steering torque. # Always monitor the lane change and keep your hands on the steering wheel. Observe the tra c conditions and steer and/or brake if necessary. System limits System The system limitations of Active Steering Assist apply to Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 186). The system may also be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R The sensors in the rear bumper are dirty, damaged or covered by a sticker or ice and snow, for example. R The exterior lighting shows a malfunction. % The Active Lane Change Assist sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven a er the vehicle has been delivered. Active Lane Change Assist is unavailable or only partially available during this teach-in process; no arrow appears next to the Ø Active Steering Assist symbol when the turn signal indicator is activated. Activee Lane Change Selecting Activ Change Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Lane Change Assist # Select the function. Activ ctivee Brak Brakee Assist Function of A Activ ctivee Brak Brakee Assist Active Brake Assist consists of the following functions: R Distance warning function R Autonomous braking function R Situation-dependent braking assistance R Vehicles with with Dr Driving iving Assistance Assistance Pack Packag age: e: Evasive Steering Assist and cornering function Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with vehicles, cyclists or pedestrians or to reduce the e ects of such a collision. If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of collision, a warning tone sounds and the L dis- Driving and parking 191 tance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. If you do not react to the warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. In especially critical situations, Active Brake Assist can initiate autonomous braking directly. In this case, the warning lamp and warning tone occur simultaneously with the braking application. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situation or apply the brake during autonomous braking, situation-dependent braking assistance occurs. The brake pressure increases up to maximum full-stop braking if necessary. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 170). Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for maintaining a su ciently safe distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle speed and for braking in good time. # Always pay careful attention to the tra c situation; do not rely on Active Brake Assist alone. # Be prepared to brake or swerve if necessary. If autonomous braking or situation-dependent braking assistance has occurred, display 1 appears in the Instrument Display and then automatically goes out a er a short time. & WARNING Risk of an accident caused by limited detection performance of Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex tra c situations. In such cases, Active Brake Assist might: R Give a warning or brake without reason R Not give a warning or not brake Also observe the system limits of Active Brake Assist. The individual subfunctions are are available available in var vari-ious speed rrang anges: es: The distance warning function can issue a warning in the following situations: R From approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), if your vehicle is critically close to a vehicle, cyclist or pedestrian, you will hear an intermittent warning tone and the L distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. 192 Driving and parking Brake immediately or take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so and the tra c situation allows this. Dist Distance ance war warning ning function (vehicles (vehicles without without DrivDriving Assistance Packag age) e) Assistance Pack The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph (250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles, pedestrians walking in the direction of travel and cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) when approaching crossing pedestrians Distance war arning ning function (vehicles (vehicles wit withh Driving Driving Distance w Assistance Assistance Pack Packag age) e) The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph (250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 62 mph (100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching moving pedestrians and cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 43 mph (70 km/h) when approaching stationary pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists utonomous br braking aking function (vehicles (vehicles without without Autonomous Dr Driving iving Assistance Assistance Pack Packag age) e) If the vehicle is traveling at speeds above approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), the autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 124 mph (200 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles or moving pedestrians Autonomous utonomous br braking aking function (vehicles (vehicles with with Dr Driviving Assist Assistance ance Pack Packag age) e) If the vehicle is traveling at speeds above approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), the autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph (250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 62 mph (100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles Driving and parking 193 R R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead at speeds up to approximately 43 mph (70 km/h) when approaching stationary and moving pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists Situation-dependent braking braking assist assistance ance (v (vehicles ehicles without wit hout Driving Driving Assist Assistance ance Pack Packag age) e) The situation-dependent braking assistance can intervene from a speed of approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph (250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles and vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) when approaching moving pedestrians Situation-dependent braking braking assistance assistance (v (vehicles ehicles wit withh Driving Driving Assistance Assistance P Pack ackag age) e) The situation-dependent braking assistance can intervene from a speed of approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph (250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 62 mph (100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) when approaching stationary and moving pedestrians, crossing vehicles, and stationary and crossing cyclists Canceling a brak Activee Brake Brake brakee application of Activ Assist You can cancel a brake application of Active Brake Assist at any time by: R sharply depressing the accelerator pedal or with kickdown R releasing the brake pedal Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake application when one of the following conditions is ful lled: R You maneuver to avoid the obstacle R There is no longer a risk of collision R An obstacle is no longer detected in front of your vehicle Evasiv Steering ing Assist (only (only vehicles vehicles with with Driving Driving Evasivee Steer Assistance Assistance Pack Packag age) e) Evasive Steering Assist has the following characteristics: R The ability to detect stationary or moving pedestrians. R Assistance through power-assisted steering if it detects a swerving maneuver. R Activation by an abrupt steering movement during a swerving maneuver. R Assistance during swerving and straightening of the vehicle. R Reaction from a speed of approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) up to a speed of approximately 43 mph (70 km/h). 194 Driving and parking You can prevent the assistance at any time by actively steering. Cor Corner nering ing function (only (only vehicles vehicles wit withh Driving Driving Assistance Assistance Pack Packag age) e) If the system detects a risk of a collision with an oncoming vehicle when turning across an oncoming lane, autonomous braking can be initiated at speeds below 9 mph (15 km/h) before you have le the lane in which you are driving. & WARNING Risk of accident despite Evasive Steering Assist Evasive Steering Assist cannot always recognize objects or complex tra c situations clearly. Moreover, the steering support provided by Evasive Steering Assist is not su cient to avoid a collision. # Always pay careful attention to the tra c situation; do not rely on Evasive Steering Assist alone. # Be prepared to brake or swerve if necessary. # # End the support by actively steering in non-critical situations. Drive at an appropriate speed if there are pedestrians close to the path of your vehicle. System Syst em limits Full system performance is not yet available for a few seconds a er switching on the vehicle or a er driving o . If Active Brake Assist is impaired or inoperative due to a malfunction, the Ä warning lamp appears in the Instrument Display. The system may be impaired or may not function, particularly in the following situations: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying ambient light. R If the sensors are dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered. R If the sensors are impaired due to interference from other radar sources, e.g. strong radar re ections in a parking garage. R R R R R R R R If a loss of tire pressure or a malfunctioning tire has been detected and displayed. In complex tra c situations where objects cannot always be clearly identi ed. If pedestrians or vehicles move quickly into the sensor detection range. If pedestrians are hidden by other objects. If the typical outline of a pedestrian cannot be distinguished from the background. If a pedestrian is not detected as such, e.g. due to special clothing or other objects. If the driver's seat belt is not fastened. On curves with a tight radius. % The Active Brake Assist sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven a er the vehicle has been delivered. Active Brake Assist is unavailable or only partially available during the teach-in process. Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating A Activ ctivee Br Brak akee Assist equir uirements: ements: Req R The vehicle is switched on. Driving and parking 195 Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Brake Assist # Select the desired setting. The setting is retained when the drive system is next started. Deactivating Activ Deactivating Activee Br Brak akee Assist % It is recommended that you always leave Active Brake Assist activated. # Select Off. The distance warning function, the autonomous braking function and Evasive Steering Assist are deactivated. When the vehicle is next started, the middle setting is automatically selected. % If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the status bar of the Instrument Display. Tra c Sign Assist Function of Tra Tra c Sign Assist Tra c Sign Assist detects tra c signs with the multifunction camera (/ page 170). It assists you by displaying detected speed limits and overtaking restrictions in the Instrument Display. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 170). Since Tra c Sign Assist also uses the data stored in the navigation system, it can update the display in the following situations without detecting tra c signs. The camera also detects tra c signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. when wet). These are only displayed if a restriction applies or if the system cannot clearly determine whether the restriction applies. War arning ning when the the maximum per permissible missible speed is ex exceeded ceeded The system can warn you if you unintentionally exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do this, you can specify in the multimedia system by how much the maximum permissible speed can be exceeded before a warning is issued. You can specify whether the warning is to be just a visual warning or an acoustic one as well. Display Display in tthe he Instr Instrument ument Display Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cockpit 1 Maximum permissible speed 2 Maximum permissible speed when there is a restriction 3 Additional sign with restriction 196 Driving and parking % Vehicles wit withh a standar standardd Instr Instrument ument Display: Display: A + symbol next to a tra c sign in the Instrument Display indicates that additional tra c signs have been detected. These can also be displayed in the media display and optionally in the Head-up Display. If Tra c Sign Assist cannot determine the maximum permissible speed (e.g. due to missing signs), the following display appears in the Instrument Display: This is displayed continuously if the vehicle is in a country where Tra c Sign Assist is not supported. Tra c Sign Assist is not available in all countries. % Also observe the information on display messages in Tra c Sign Assist (/ page 353). Syst System em limits The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insu cient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c, direct sunlight or re ections. R If the windshield in the area of the multifunction camera is dirty, or if the camera is fogged up, damaged or covered. R If the tra c signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt, snow or insu cient lighting, or because they are covered. R If the information in the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or out-of-date. R If signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in roadworks or in adjacent lanes. R If you turn sharply when passing tra c signs outside the camera's eld of vision. Setting Traa c Sign Assist Setting Tr Req equir uirements: ements: Only Only vehicles vehicles with with Dr Driving iving Assistance Assistance Pack Packag age: e: Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and ECO Assist must be activated for the automatic adoption of speed limits. R Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Traffic Sign Assist 5 Assistance ctivating ating or deactivating deactivating aut automatic omatic adop adoption tion of Activ speed limits (onl (onlyy vehicles vehicles with with Dr Driving iving Assistance Assistance Pack ackag age) e) # Select Limit Adoption. # Switch the function on or o . The speed limits detected by Tra c Sign Assist are automatically adopted by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. % If one of the following systems is activated, the detected speed can be manually adopted as the speed limit: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R Cruise control Driving and parking 197 R Variable limiter Further information about Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: (/ page 182). Displaying detected ed tr traa c signs in the the media disDisplaying detect play # Select Display in Central Display. # Switch the function on or o . Setting Setting the the type of w war arning ning # Select Visual & Audible, Visual or Off. Se Setting tting the the w war arning ning thr threshold eshold This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded. # Select Warning Threshold. # Set the desired speed. Tra c Light Infor Information mation service ser vice & WARNING Risk of an accident or injury due to distraction, incorrect or missing data The tra c light information display is an aid and cannot replace the observation of the actual driving situation. # Keep the actual tra c situation constantly in view when approaching a traffic light and when changing lanes. # Avoid looking at the Instrument Display and Head-up Display for a long time. The Instrument Display and Head-up Display (if available) show the tra c light icon and remaining time 1 until the next green phase as a countdown. Example representation in the Instrument Display The display is hidden about ve seconds before the tra c lights change to green. % The display also goes out in the following cases: R When turning o before the intersection into a cross or side street R When turning before the intersection % The direction arrows are displayed depending on the following functions: R A turn signal is set R A lane is recommended during active route guidance 198 Driving and parking If neither function is active, the remaining time until the next green phase for the lane straight ahead is displayed. % Use of the tra c light information service requires the regular transmission of vehicle positions and driving directions to MercedesBenz. The data is immediately anonymized by Mercedes-Benz and forwarded to the provider of the tra c light information service. The vehicle positions and driving directions are deleted a er a very short time (a few seconds) and are not permanently saved. If you do not want to transmit the vehicle positions and driving directions, you have the following options: R You deactivate the service in the Mercedes me portal. R You have the service deactivated at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. R You deactivate the service in the Assistance menu in the multimedia system (/ page 199). % This tra c light information service is only available in certain cities and regions. The function is supported under the following conditions: R The vehicle is equipped with a multimedia system featuring navigation and a communication module with an activated, integrated SIM card. R You have a user account for the Mercedes me Portal. R The vehicle has been connected with the user account. R The navigation services option is available, subscribed to and activated in the Mercedes me Portal. R The tra c light data service belongs to the scope of the navigation services. The current vehicle position and the direction of travel are transmitted via the communication module and aligned with the data from the tra c light data service provider. The provider gathers data from tra c lights which transmit their changing phases. When the vehicle approaches an intersection with networked tra c lights, data is transmitted to the vehicle. A set turn signal le or right and lane recommendations during active route guidance are taken into account for the display. The service is for information purposes only and is not linked to any other vehicle functions, systems or components. Please note that the displayed data is not available in all tra c areas and may be incorrect. Certain light signal systems automatically adapt their switching times to the current tra c situation. This can lead to a sudden change in the countdown display. The information in the Instrument Display is shown a er selecting the display contents in the Assistance menu. If another menu is selected, the tra c light countdown is not displayed. Also observe the following information: R select a speed adapted to the tra c, surroundings and weather conditions R observe actual tra c signs R observe applicable tra c rules and regulations Driving and parking 199 Please observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. Syst System em limits The display does not appear in the following situations, for example: R There is no tra c light data available. R The time remaining until the next green phase is less than ten seconds. R Emergency vehicles or local public transport are located in the vicinity of the intersection. R The data transmission from the vehicle has been interrupted. R The tra c light systems are located in a construction site area or are undergoing maintenance. R The light signal system is malfunctioning. R The subscription to the service has expired. Switching Switc hing the the tra tra c light infor information mation display display on or o Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance # Switch Traffic Light Information on D or o E. Blind Spot Spot Assist Assist and A Activ ctivee Blind Spo Spott Assist Assist with exit war warning ning Function of Blind Spot Spot Assis Assistt and A Activ ctivee Blind Spo Spott Assist Assist with with exit exit war warning ning Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist use two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors to monitor the area up to 130 (40 m) behind and 10 (3 m) next to your vehicle. If a vehicle is detected at speeds above approximately 8 mph (12 km/h) and this vehicle subsequently enters the monitoring range directly next to your vehicle, the warning lamp in the outside mirror lights up red. Permanent status display in the instrument cluster: R ¸ (gray): system is activated but inoperative R ¸ (green): system is activated and operational If a vehicle is detected close to your vehicle and you switch on the turn signal indicator in the corresponding direction, a double warning tone sounds and the red warning lamp in the outside mirror ashes. If the turn signal indicator remains switched on, all other detected vehicles are indicated only by the ashing of the red warning lamp. If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is given. & WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles approaching and overtaking you at a greatly di erent speed. 200 Driving and parking Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in this situation. # Always pay careful attention to the tra c situation and maintain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 170). Exit w war arning ning The exit warning is an additional function of Blind Spot Assist and can warn vehicle occupants about approaching vehicles when leaving the vehicle when stationary. & WARNING Risk of accident despite exit warning The exit warning neither reacts to stationary objects nor to persons or road users approaching you at a greatly di ering speed. The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations. # Always pay particular attention to the tra c situation when opening the doors and make sure there is su cient clearance. If there is a vehicle in the monitoring range, this is indicated in the outside mirror. If a vehicle occupant opens the door on the side with the warning, a warning tone sounds and the warning lamp in the outside mirror starts to ash. This additional function is only available when Blind Spot Assist is active. When the exit warning is activated, it can warn vehicle occupants for up to three minutes a er switching the vehicle o . The exit warning is no longer available once the warning lamp in the outside mirror ashes three times. The exit warning is only an aid and not a substitute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The responsibility for opening and closing the doors and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehicle occupants. System System limits Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist may be limited in the following situations, in particular: R if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured R in poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow R if there are narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles or motorbikes R if the road has very wide or narrow lanes R if vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane Warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar continuous lane borders. Always make sure that there is su cient distance to the side for other tra c or obstacles. Warnings may be interrupted when driving alongside long vehicles, for example trucks, for a prolonged time. Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse gear is engaged. Driving and parking 201 The exit warning may be limited in the following situations: R when the sensors are covered by adjacent vehicles in narrow parking spaces R when people approach the vehicle R in the event of stationary or slowly moving objects Function of brak brakee application (Activ (Activee Blind Spot Assist) Assis t) If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side impact in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. This is designed to help you avoid a collision. The course-correcting brake application is available in the speed range between approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h). & WARNING Risk of accident despite brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision. # Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist # warns you or makes a course-correcting brake application. Always maintain a safe distance at the sides. If a course-correcting brake application occurs, the red warning lamp ashes in the outside mirror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, display 1 indicating the danger of a side collision appears in the Instrument Display. In rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application. This brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate. System limits System Note the system limitations of Active Blind Spot Assist; you may otherwise not recognize the dangers (/ page 199). Either a course-correcting brake application appropriate to the driving situation, or none at all, may occur in the following situations: R Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are located on both sides of your vehicle. R A vehicle approaches too closely on the side. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds. R You brake or accelerate signi cantly. R A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP® or Active Brake Assist. R ESP® is deactivated. R A loss of tire pressure or a malfunctioning tire is detected. 202 Driving and parking Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating Blind Spo Spott Assis Assistt or Activ ctivee Blind Spot Spot Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance # Activate or deactivate Blind Spot Assist. or # Activate or deactivate Act. Blind Spot Assist. Activ ctivee Lane Keeping Keeping Assist Function of Activ Activee Lane Keeping Keeping Assist Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of the multifunction camera (/ page 170). It serves to protect you against unintentionally leaving your lane. You will be warned by vibration pulses in the steering wheel and guided by a course-correcting brake application back into your lane. Active Lane Keeping Assist is available in the speed range between 37 mph (60 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h). Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or tra c conditions. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. The status of Active Lane Keeping Assist is displayed in the on-board computer: R à (green): Active Lane Keeping Assist is active and operating. R à (gray): Active Lane Keeping Assist is active but not operating. R ·: Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated or there is a malfunction. If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, display 1 appears in the Instrument Display. The system does not apply the brake if you activate the turn signal indicator. Vehicles wit withh Driving Driving Assistance Assistance P Pack ackag age: e: if the system detects an obstacle, such as another vehicle in the adjacent lane, it will apply the brake regardless of the turn signal indicator. You are warned by vibrations in the steering wheel in the following circumstances: R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane marking. R A front wheel drives over this lane marking. Conditions for course-correcting ecting br brak akee applicafor a course-corr tion (vehicles (vehicles without without Driving Driving Assist Assistance ance Pack Packag age) e) Lane markings were detected on both sides of the lane. The front wheel drives over a continuous lane marking. % A brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction. Driving and parking 203 Conditions for for a course-corr course-correcting ecting brak brakee application (vehicles (vehicles wit withh Driving Driving Assistance Assistance Pack Packag age) e) R A continuous lane marking was detected and driven over with the front wheel. R A lane marking and an approaching vehicle, an overtaking vehicle or vehicles driving parallel to your vehicle were detected in the adjacent lane. The front wheel drives over the lane marking. % A brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction. System em limits Syst No lane-correcting brake application occurs in the following situations: R You clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate. R If a driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP®, Active Brake Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration. R R When ESP® is deactivated. If a loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire is detected and displayed. If you deactivate the Active Lane Keeping Assist warning and the lane markings cannot be clearly detected, it is possible that no lane-correcting brake application takes place (/ page 204). The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insu cient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c, the sun or re ections. R If the windshield in the area of the multifunction camera is dirty, or if the camera is fogged up, damaged or covered. R If there are no lane markings, or several unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. around roadworks. R If the lane markings are worn, dark or covered. R R R R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. If the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch o , cross one another or merge. If the road is very narrow and winding. Vehicles with with Dr Driving iving Assistance Assistance P Pack ackag age: e: if the radar sensors in the rear bumper are dirty or covered in snow and an obstacle is detected in your lane, no lane-correcting brake application takes place. Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating A Activ ctivee Lane K Keeping eeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist # Switch the function on or o . 204 Driving and parking Setting Se tting Activ Activee Lane Keeping Keeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist Activating ctivating or deactivating deactivating the the haptic haptic w war arning ning # Select Warning. Activate or deactivate the function. DYNAMIC YNAMIC BODY BODY CONTR CONTROL OL function DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL continuously adjusts the characteristics of the suspension dampers to the current operating and driving conditions. The damping is tuned individually for each wheel and is a ected by the following factors: R The road surface conditions R Vehicle load R The drive program selected R The driving style The drive program can be adjusted using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch. AIR BODY BODY CONTR CONTROL OL AIR BODY BODY CONTR CONTROL OL function * NOTE NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. AIR BODY CONTROL is an air suspension system with variable damping for improved driving comfort. The all-round level control system ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When driving at speed, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel consumption. You also have the option of manually adjusting the vehicle level. AIR BODY CONTROL includes the following components and functions: R Air suspension with variable spring rate R Automatic level control system R Speed-dependent lowering to reduce fuel consumption R R R Manually selectable high-level setting for greater ground clearance ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with constant damping force adjustment) DYNAMIC SELECT switch and level button Suspension setting vehicle level level per dr driv ivee proprosetting and vehicle gram gram Drive program A: R The suspension setting is comfortable. R The vehicle is set to the normal level. R When driving at speeds of approximately 78 mph (125 km/h) or above, the vehicle is lowered. R When driving at speeds below approximately 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle is raised again. Drive program ;: R The suspension setting is comfortable. R The vehicle is set to low level -1. R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are traveling at higher speeds. Driving and parking 205 Drive program C: The suspension setting is rmer. R The vehicle is set to low level -1. R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are traveling at higher speeds. R Drive program B: The suspension setting is even rmer. R The vehicle is set to low level -1. R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are traveling at higher speeds. R Individual suspension settings can be called up in drive program = (/ page 155). Setting tting the the vvehicle ehicle level level Se & WARNING Risk of accident because vehicle level is too high Driving characteristics may be impaired. The vehicle can dri outwards, for example, when steering or cornering. # Choose a vehicle level which is suited to the driving style and the road surface conditions. & WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehicle lowering When lowering the vehicle, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tires or underneath the vehicle. # Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to the vehicle lowering Vehicles wit withh AIR BODY BODY C CONTR ONTROL OL or level level control control syst system: em: when you unload luggage or leave the vehicle, the vehicle rst rises slightly and then returns to the set level shortly a erwards. You or anyone else in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody could thus become trapped. The vehicle can also be lowered a er being locked. # When leaving the vehicle, make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody. * NOTE Damage due to vehicle lowering Parts of the body could be damaged when the vehicle is lowered. # Make sure that there are no obstacles such as curbs underneath or in the immediate vicinity of the body when the vehicle is being lowered. * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. 206 Driving and parking Req equir uirements: ements: R The vehicle has been started. R The vehicle must not be moving faster than 37 mph (60 km/h). the vvehicle ehicle Raising the Your selection is saved. The vehicle is automatically lowered again in the following situations: R When driving faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). R When driving between 37 mph (60 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h) for approximately three minutes. R A er changing a drive program using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the last active drive program. Lower ing the the vehicle vehicle Lowering Press button 1. Indicator lamp 2 goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the active drive program. # Rear view view camera # Press button 1. Indicator lamp 2 lights up. The vehicle is set to the high level. Function of the the rrear ear view view camera When you engage reverse gear, the image from the rear view camera is shown on the media display. Dynamic guide lines show the path the vehi- cle will take with the current steering angle. This helps you to orient yourself and to avoid obstacles when backing up. The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and parking. The guide lines on the media display show the distances to your vehicle. The distances displayed only apply to road level. Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can select from the following views: R Normal view R Wide-angle view The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the inside rearview mirror. Vehicles without without Par Parking king Assis Assistt PARK PARKTR TRONIC ONIC The following camera views are available in the multimedia system: Driving and parking 207 Normal view 1 Driven surface depending on the current 2 3 4 5 steering angle (dynamic) Guide lines at a distance of approximately 1.6 (0.5 m), 3.3 (1.0 m), 5 (1.5 m) and 9.9 (3.0 m) from the rear area Lane marking the course the tires will take with the current steering angle (dynamic) Bumper Guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 (0.3 m) from the rear area Wide-angle view Vehicles with with Par Parking king Assis Assistt PARK PARKTR TRONIC ONIC The following camera views are available in the multimedia system: Normal view 1 Yellow warning display: obstacles at a dis- tance between approximately 2.3 (0.7 m) and 3.3 (1.0 m) 2 Orange warning display: obstacles at a distance between approximately 1.3 (0.4 m) and 2.3 (0.7 m) 3 Guide lines at a distance of approximately 1.6 (0.5 m), 3.3 (1.0 m), 5 (1.5 m) and 9.9 (3.0 m) from the rear area 4 Yellow lanes marking the course the tires will take with the current steering angle (dynamic) 208 Driving and parking R 5 Driven surface depending on the current steering angle (dynamic) 6 Guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 (0.3 m) from the rear area The color of warning display 1/2 changes dynamically and is based on the distance to the detected obstacle: R Blue: no obstacles detected at a distance less than 3.3 (1.0 m) R Yellow ellow:: obstacles at a distance between approximately 2.3 (0.7 m) and 3.3 (1.0 m) R Orang e: obstacles at a distance between Orange: approximately 1.3 (0.4 m) and 2.3 (0.7 m) R Red: obstacles at a very short distance of approximately 1.3 (0.4 m) or less % Vehicles wit withh Activ Activee Par Parking king Assist: Assist: when Active Parking Assist is active, lane markings 4 are displayed in green. R Wide-angle view 1 Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC System System malfunction If the rear view camera is not operational, the System Inoperative message appears on the media display. System limits System The rear view camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations: R The trunk lid is open. R The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy rain, snow, fog, storm or spray. The ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at night. Cameras, or vehicle components in which the cameras are installed, are damaged, dirty or covered. Observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras (/ page 170). % Do not use the rear view camera in these types of situations. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle. % The contrast of the display may be impaired by direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention. % Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use. 360° camera Function of tthe he surround surround view view camera The surround view camera is a system that consists of four cameras which cover the immediate surroundings of the vehicle. The system assists Driving and parking 209 you when you are parking or at exits with reduced visibility, for example. The views of the surround view camera are always available when driving forwards up to a speed of approx. 10 mph (16 km/h) and when backing up. The surround view camera is only an aid and may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not show them at all. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and parking. The system evaluates images from the following cameras: R Rear view camera R Front camera R Two side cameras in the outside mirrors iewss of the the surr surround ound view view camera View current steering angle and show the distance to objects and other vehicles. 1 Wide-angle view, front 2 Top view with image from the front camera 3 Top view with images from the side cameras 1 Guide lines at a distance of approximately Function of the the guide lines Guide lines are also displayed in the camera images of the top views. These are based on the % When Active Parking Assist is active, paths 2 are displayed in green. in the outside mirrors 4 Wide-angle view, rear 5 Top view with image from the rear view camera 6 Top view with trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch) 1.6 (0.5 m), 3.3 (1.0 m), 5 (1.5 m) and 9.9 (3.0 m) from the rear area 2 Yellow lanes marking the course the tires will take with the current steering angle (dynamic) 3 Driven surface depending on the current steering angle (dynamic) 4 Guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 (0.3 m) from the rear area 210 Driving and parking The guide lines show the distances to your vehicle. The distances apply to road level. In all views, the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning display is also shown (/ page 211). The color of warning display changes dynamically and is based on the distance to the detected obstacle: R Blue: no obstacles detected at a distance less than 3.3 (1.0 m) R Yellow ellow:: obstacles at a distance between approximately 2.3 (0.7 m) and 3.3 (1.0 m) R Or Orang ange: e: obstacles at a distance between approximately 1.3 (0.4 m) and 2.3 (0.7 m) R Red: obstacles at a very short distance of approximately 1.3 (0.4 m) or less % When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational and no object is detected, the warning display is shown here in blue. Wide-angle view, view, front front Top vie view w with with image image from from the the front front camera 1 Warning display of Parking Assist 1 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC PARKTRONIC (/ page 211) 2 Your vehicle from above 3 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take at the current steering angle Top vie view w with with images images from from the the side camer cameras as in the outside mirr mirrors ors The front and rear sides of the vehicle can be seen in this view. Driving and parking 211 R R R System Syst em limits If the system is not ready for operation, the System Inoperative message appears in the media display. The surround view camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations: R You are driving forwards at a speed greater than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h). R The doors are open. R An outside mirror is not completely folded out. R The trunk lid is open. R The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy rain, snow, fog, storm or spray. The ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at night. The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or fogged up. If cameras or vehicle components in which the cameras are installed are damaged. In this event, have the cameras, their positions and their setting checked at a quali ed specialist workshop. % Do not use the surround view camera under such circumstances. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle. For technical reasons, the standard height of the vehicle may be altered if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load and can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines and in the display of the generated images. The eld of vision and other functions of the camera system may be restricted due to additional attachments on the vehicle (e.g. license plate bracket, bicycle rack). % The contrast of the display may be impaired by abrupt, direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention. % Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use. See the notes on cleaning the surround view camera (/ page 285). Calling up the view w of the the surr surround ound view view camera the vie using rev rever erse se gear gear # Engage reverse gear. # Select the desired view in the multimedia system (/ page 208). # If, a er shi ing to reverse gear, the image of the rear view camera is not shown: switch o the vehicle, press and hold the c button, switch on the vehicle and engage reverse gear again. Par arking king Assist Assist PARK PARKTR TRONIC ONIC Function of P Par arking king Assist Assist PARK PARKTR TRONIC ONIC Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking assistance system which monitors the area surrounding your vehicle and shows you the dis- 212 Driving and parking tance between the vehicle and a detected obstacle visually and audibly. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and parking in/ exiting parking spaces. The passive side impact protection also warns you of obstacles to the side. During the parking procedure or maneuvering, objects are detected as the vehicle drives past. If you steer in the direction of a detected obstacle and there is a risk of a lateral collision, a warning is issued. In order for an object on the side to be detected, the sensors in the front and rear bumper must rst detect the object while you are driving past it. In order for front or rear obstacles to the side to be displayed, the vehicle must rst travel a distance of at least half a vehicle length. Once the vehicle has traveled one vehicle length, obstacles on all sides can be shown. Displays the media display Displays on the Vehicles with surround view camera Vehicles without surround view camera As soon as Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational, the respective areas of the display are shown in blue. 1 Operational, front and rear 2 Operational, all around 3 Obstacles detected at the front le and on the right-hand side The color of the display changes depending on the distance to the detected obstacle: R Blue: > 3.3 (1 m) (no obstacles detected) R Yellow: ellow: approximately 3.3 (1 m) - 2.3 (0.7 m) R Orang Orange: e: approximately 2.3 (0.7 m) - 1.2 (0.4 m) R Red: < 1.2 (0.4 m) Vehicles with with surr surround ound view view camer camera: a: the boundary line shi s dynamically depending on the position and distance of the obstacles detected. Depending on the distance to the obstacle detected, an intermittent warning tone also sounds. You can set the timing of the warnings in the multimedia system (/ page 215). Driving and parking 213 Standard setting: R Front and sides: < 1.2 R Rear ear:: < 3.3 (1 m) (0.4 m) Warn Early All Around: R Fr Front ont:: < 3.3 (1 m) R Sides: < 2.3 (0.7 m) R Rear: ear: < 3.3 (1 m) A continuous warning tone sounds from a distance of approximately 0.7 (0.2 m), regardless of the selected setting. Vehicles with surround view camera Vehicles without surround view camera If an obstacle in the vehicle path is detected and the Camera & Parking menu is not open on the media display, pop-up window 1 appears: R vehicles wit without hout Activ Activee P Par arking king Assist: Assist: at speeds below 8 mph (12 km/h) R vehicles with with A Activ ctivee Par Parking king Assist Assist:: at speeds below 11 mph (18 km/h) Optionally, obstacles detected by Parking Assist PARKTRONIC from a distance of approximately 3.3 (1.0 m) in front 2 and 2.3 (0.7 m) on the side 3 can also be displayed in the Head-up Display. System System limits Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessarily take into account the following obstacles: R Obstacles below the detection range, e.g. persons, animals or objects. R Obstacles above the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks. 214 Driving and parking R R Pedestrians or animals approaching the vehicle from the side. Objects placed next to the vehicle. Problems withh Par Parking king Assis Assistt P PARK ARKTR TRONIC ONIC Problems wit Obstacles on the sides are not shown in the following situations, for example: R You park the vehicle and switch it o . R You open the doors. A er an engine start, obstacles must be detected again by driving past them before a warning can be issued. Observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras; the system otherwise cannot function properly (/ page 170). 1 Vehicles with surround view camera 2 Vehicles without surround view camera If the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display lights up red for approximately three seconds then goes out, and the é symbol appears in the instrument cluster, the system may have been deactivated due to signal interference. Start the vehicle again and check if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is working at a di erent location. If the é symbol appears in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds, it may be due to one of the following causes: R The sensors sensors are are dirty dir ty:: clean the sensors and observe the notes on care of vehicle parts (/ page 285). R Par arking king Assist Assist P PARK ARKTR TRONIC ONIC has been deactivat ated ed due to to a malfunction: restart the vehicle. If the problem persists, consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Activating/deactiv ctivating/deactivating ating Par Parking king Assist PARK ARKTR TRONIC ONIC * NO NOTE TE Risk of an accident from objects at close range Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range. # When parking or maneuvering the vehicle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. ower pots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could otherwise be damaged. Driving and parking 215 Vehicles without without AIR BODY BODY C CONTR ONTROL: OL: press the é button in the center console. % Vehicles with with AIR BOD BODYY CONTR CONTROL: OL: you can activate or deactivate Parking Assist PARKTRONIC in the multimedia system (/ page 215). If the indicator lamp in the é button is not lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp is lit or the é symbol appears in the Instrument Display, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not active. % Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when the vehicle is started. # Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating Par Parking king Assist PARKTR ARKTRONIC ONIC using the the multimedia syst system em * NOTE NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range. # When parking or maneuvering the vehicle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. ower pots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could otherwise be damaged. Requir equirements: ements: R The camera menu is open. R Or: Active Parking Assist is active. R Or: the PARKTRONIC pop-up window appears. # Tap = on the media display. If the indicator lamp is lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp is not lit or the é symbol appears in the instrument cluster, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not active. % Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when the vehicle is started. Alternatively, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC can be activated or deactivated in the quick access menu. Se Setting tting the the war warning ning ttones ones of P Par arking king Assist PARK ARKTR TRONIC ONIC Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & Parking djusting ting tthe he vvolume olume of the the war warning ning tones tones Adjus Select Warning Tone Volume. # Set a value. # Adjus djusting ting tthe he pitc pitchh of the the w war arning ning tones tones # Select Warning Tone Pitch. # Set a value. the st Specifying the star arting ting point ffor or the the war warning ning tones tones You can specify whether the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning tones should commence when the vehicle is further away from an obstacle. # Select Warn Early All Around. # Switch the function on or o . Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating audio ffadeout adeout You can specify whether the volume of a media source in the multimedia system is to be reduced 216 Driving and parking when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sounds a warning tone. # Select Audio Fadeout During Warning Tones. # Switch the function on or o . Activ ctivee Par Parking king Assist Function of Activ Activee P Par arking king Assist Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking assistance system, which uses ultrasound with the assistance of the rear view camera and surround view camera. When you are driving forwards up to approximately 22 mph (35 km/h), the system automatically measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. Active Parking Assist o ers the following functions: Vehicles with rear view camera R Parking in parking spaces parallel to the road Vehicles with surround view camera Parking in parking spaces parallel to the road R Parking in parking spaces perpendicular to the road (optionally either forwards or reverse) R R R Parking in parking spaces that can only be detected as such due to markings (for example at the roadside) Exiting parking spaces if you have parked using Active Parking Assist As soon as all requirements are met for searching for parking spaces, the Ç display appears in the Instrument Display. When Active Parking Assist has detected parking spaces, the È display appears in the Instrument Display. The arrows show on which side of the road detected parking spaces are located. They are then shown on the media display. with rear rear view view camer camera: a: the parking space Vehicles with can be selected as desired. The vehicle is parked in reverse. Vehicles with with surround surround view view camera: camera: the parking space can be selected as desired. Depending on the location of the parking space, the parking direction (rearwards or forwards) can also be selected as desired. When Active Parking Assist is activated, the turn signal indicators are activated based on the calculated path of your vehicle. The parking procedure is assisted by accelerating, braking, steering and gear changes. Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range. Active Parking Assist will be canceled in the following situations: R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated. R You begin steering. R You engage transmission position j. R ESP® intervenes. R You open the driver's door. R A er activating Active Parking Assist, you press the c button again (/ page 217). Driving and parking 217 System Syst em limits If the exterior lighting is malfunctioning, Active Parking Assist is not available. Objects located above or below the detection range of the sensors, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks, or the borders of parking spaces, are not detected during measurement of the parking space. These are also then not taken into account when calculating the parking procedure. In some circumstances, Active Parking Assist may therefore guide you into the parking space incorrectly. & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist If there are objects above or below the detection range, the following situations may arise: R Active Parking Assist may steer too early. R The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects. There is a danger of collision! # In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist. Extreme weather conditions, such as snow or heavy rain, may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Parking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identi ed as such or be measured incorrectly. Only use Active Parking Assist on level, high-grip ground. Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following situations: R In extreme weather conditions such as ice, packed snow or in heavy rain. R When transporting a load that protrudes beyond the vehicle. R On steep uphill or downhill gradients of more than approximately 15%. R When snow chains are installed. R Directly a er a tire change or when spare tires are installed. R If the tire pressure is too low or too high. R If the suspension is out of alignment, e.g. a er bottoming out on a curb. Active Parking Assist may also display parking spaces that are not suitable for parking, such as: R Parking spaces where parking is prohibited. R Parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces. Parking arking with with A Activ ctivee Par Parking king Assist 218 Driving and parking # Press button 1. The turn signal indicator is switched on automatically when the parking procedure begins. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the tra c conditions. If necessary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly. & WARNING Risk of accident due to vehicle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space Parking spaces detected by the system are shown in the media display. When the vehicle is stationary, indicated vehicle path 2 into currently selected parking space 3 also appears. # If a parking space is displayed: stop the vehicle. # If necessary, select another parking space. # Vehicles with with surr surround ound view view camer camera: a: if necessary, change the parking direction. # To star startt the the parking parking procedur procedure: e: con rm selected parking space 3. While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users. # Pay attention to objects and other road users. # Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist. # If, for example, the Please Engage Reverse Gear message appears in the media display: select the corresponding transmission position. The vehicle drives into the selected parking space. % During the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist, the lane markings are displayed in green in the camera image. On completion of the parking procedure, the Parking Assist Finished, Take Control of Vehicle message appears. Further maneuvering may still be necessary. # Secure the vehicle against rolling away. When required by legal requirements or local conditions: turn the wheels towards the curb. % You can stop the vehicle and change the transmission position during the parking procedure. The system then calculates a new vehicle path. If no new vehicle path is available, the transmission position can be changed again, or the process can be canceled. Driving and parking 219 Exiting a parking parking space with with A Activ ctivee P Par arking king Assist Req equir uirements: ements: R The vehicle is equipped with a surround view camera. R The vehicle has been parked with Active Parking Assist. Please note that you are responsible for the vehicle and surroundings during the entire parking procedure. # Start the vehicle. # Press button 1. The media display shows the view of Active Parking Assist. Take control of the vehicle and complete the parking process. % The vehicle path shown on the media display may di er from the actual vehicle path. The turn signal indicator is switched on automatically when the exiting procedure begins. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the tra c conditions. If necessary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly. # # Select Exit Space 2. or # # If the vehicle has been parked perpendicular to the direction of travel: select direction of travel 3. If, for example, the Please Engage Forward Gear message appears on the media display: select the corresponding transmission position. The vehicle moves out of the parking space and is brought to a standstill by Active Parking Assist (at an angle to the direction of travel). The Ø Parking Assist Finished, Take Control of Vehicle message appears. Pausing Activ Activee Par Parking king Assist You can interrupt the parking or exiting procedure of Active Parking Assist by performing one of the following actions, for example: # Depressing the brake pedal # Opening the front passenger door, a rear door, the trunk or the hood # Applying the electric parking brake or activating the HOLD function # To rresume esume the the par parking king or eexiting xiting procedur procedure: e: gently depress the accelerator pedal. 220 Driving and parking % If the electric parking brake was applied before Active Parking Assist was activated, depress the accelerator pedal lightly to start the parking or exiting procedure. Check the area around your vehicle again before resuming a paused parking procedure. Make sure that persons, animals or objects are no longer in the maneuvering range. Also observe the system limitations of Active Parking Assist. Aut utomatic omatic braking braking function of Activ Activee Par Parking king Assist Persons or objects detected in the maneuvering range could cause the vehicle to brake sharply and interrupt the parking or exiting procedure. The vehicle will then be held at a standstill. If you depress the accelerator pedal, the parking or exiting procedure is resumed. Check the area around your vehicle again before resuming the parking or exiting procedure. Make sure that persons, animals or objects are no longer in the maneuvering range. Also observe the system limitations of Active Parking Assist. Maneuver Maneuv ering ing assistance assistance Function of Driv Drivee Awa Awayy Assist Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an impact when pulling away. If an obstacle is detected in the direction of travel, the vehicle's speed is brie y reduced to approx. 1 mph (2 km/h). If a critical situation is detected, the É symbol appears in the media display. Drive Away Assist can be deactivated or activated in the Maneuvering Assistance menu (/ page 222). % You can cancel an intervention by Drive Away Assist at any time by deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 214). & WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of Drive Away Assist Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and tra c situations. # Always pay careful attention to the tra c situation; do not rely on Drive Away Assist alone. # Be prepared to brake or swerve as necessary, provided the tra c situation permits and that it is safe to take evasive action. Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range. A risk of collision may occur in the following situations, for example: R If the accelerator and brake pedals are interchanged. R If an incorrect transmission position is engaged. Drive Away Assist is active under the following conditions: R If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated. R If you shi the transmission position to k or h when the vehicle is stationary. Driving and parking 221 R R If the detected obstacle is less than approx. 3.3 (1.0 m) away. If the maneuvering assistance function is activated in the multimedia system. Syst System em limits The performance of Drive Away Assist is limited on inclines. % Also observe the system limits of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 211). Function of Cross Cross Tra Tra c Alert % Cross Tra c Alert is only available for vehicles with Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist. Cross Tra c Alert can warn drivers of any crossing tra c when backing up and maneuvering out of a parking space. The radar sensors in the bumper also monitor the area adjacent to the vehicle. If a critical situation is detected, the L symbol appears in the media display and the vehicle can be braked automatically. If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles or other objects, detection is not possible. % Also observe the instructions on Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist (/ page 199). System System limits Cross Tra c Alert is not available on inclines. Maneuvering Maneuver ing brak brakee function The maneuvering brake function can prevent collisions with pedestrians when the vehicle is backing up at slow speeds. If the rear view camera detects a person in the vehicle path, the vehicle can be braked to a standstill. The maneuvering brake function can intervene under the following conditions: R The vehicle is backing up at a speed slower than 6 mph (10 km/h). R The camera image is shown in the media display . You can activate and deactivate the maneuvering brake function in the Maneuvering Assistance menu (/ page 222). If the maneuvering brake function is triggered, the following symbol appears in red in the selected view in the Camera & Parking menu: % If the maneuvering brake function is not available, the same symbol appears in gray. The maneuvering brake function is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range. & WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection by the maneuvering brake function The maneuvering brake function cannot always clearly detect people. Other obstacles are not detected by the function. In these cases, the function may brake unnecessarily or not brake at all. 222 Driving and parking # # Always pay careful attention to the tra c situation; do not rely on the maneuvering brake function alone. Be ready to brake. System limits System Observe the system limits of the following functions: R Active Parking Assist (/ page 216) R Surround view camera (/ page 208) R Rear view camera (/ page 206) The maneuvering brake function is not available in the following situations: R On inclines Activ ctivating/deactiv ating/deactivating ating maneuv maneuver ering ing assistance assistance Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & Parking # Switch Maneuvering Assistance on or o . Vehicle towing towing instr instructions uctions The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar systems that are used for at towing or dinghy towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar systems can result in damage to the vehicle. When you are towing a vehicle with tow bar systems, safe driving characteristics cannot be guaranteed for the towing vehicle or the towed vehicle. The vehicle-trailer combination may swerve from side to side. Observe the following information: R Permitted towing methods (/ page 301) R The notes on towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground (/ page 302) Instrument display and on-board computer 223 Notes on tthe he instr instrument ument display display and on-board comput computer er & WARNING Risk of accident if the instrument display fails If the instrument display has failed or is malfunctioning, function restrictions in systems relevant to safety cannot be detected. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the vehicle checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a quali ed specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of distraction due to information systems and communications equipment If you operate information systems and communications equipment integrated in the vehi- cle when driving, you could be distracted from the tra c situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the tra c situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. The on-board computer shows only display messages and warnings from speci c systems on the instrument display. You must therefore ensure that your vehicle is always reliable. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and in accordance with the tra c conditions. Contact a quali ed specialist workshop. 224 Instrument display and on-board computer Over Ov ervie view w of ins instr trument ument display 1 Speedometer The segments on the speedometer indicate the statuses of the following systems: cruise control/limiter/Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC 2 Index points 3 Outside temperature 4 Time 5 Area for additional values (example: tachome- ter): tachometer/navigation/ECO display/ consumption/G-meter/date The fuel supply will be interrupted to protect the engine when the red mark on the tachometer (overrevving range) is reached. 6 Coolant temperature display During normal operation, coolant temperature display 6 is permitted to rise to the red mark. Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system: POWER and CHARGE displays (electrical drive support and recuperation power of the electric motor) 7 Selected drive program Instrument display and on-board computer 225 6 Touch Control, MBUX multimedia system 8 Selected transmission position 9 Center display area of the instrument display To navigate: swipe To con rm: press a 7 G Back button, MBUX multimedia system 8 Control panel for the MBUX multimedia system £ Voice Control System 9 Adjusts the brightness of the instrument lighting (example: standard display for a trip): assistance/telephone/navigation/trip/media/ radio/styles and displays/service/possible settings for Head-up Display A Fuel level and fuel ller ap location indicator Overvie Over view w of buttons buttons on tthe he steer steering ing wheel Depending on the equipment, the layout and the design of the control elements on the steering wheel may di er. 1 Control panel for cruise control or Active Dis- tance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 178) 2 G Back button, on-board computer 3 Touch Control, on-board computer To navigate: swipe To con rm: press a 4 ò Main menu, on-board computer 5 ò Main menu, MBUX multimedia system Operating Oper ating tthe he on-board on-board com comput puter er Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. 226 Instrument display and on-board computer R R R R R R The on-board computer is operated using the le hand Touch Control and the le -hand back/home button. When the on-board computer is being operated, di erent acoustic signals will sound as operating feedback, e.g. when the end of a list is reached or when you are scrolling through a list. % To operate the Touch Control in the most e ective way, use the tip of your thumb if possible. The following menus are available: R Assistance R Phone Navigation Trip Radio Media Service with an ins instr trument ument displa displayy in the the Vehicles with widescr widescreen een cockpit: cockpit: Designs % You can nd information about the possible settings and selections on the menus in the Digital Operator's Manual. The menus can be called up from the menu bar on the instrument display. # To call up the the menu bar: bar: press the le -hand back button until the menu bar is displayed. % Vehicles without without Activ Activee Distance Distance Assis Assistt DIS DISTR TRONIC: ONIC: press the ò button to call up the menu bar of the on-board computer. # To scroll scroll on the the menu bar: bar: swipe le or right on the le -hand Touch Control. # # # To call up a menu, submenu or possible setsettings on the the menu, or con rm a selection or setting: setting: press the le -hand Touch Control. To scroll scroll thr through ough display displayss or lis lists ts on tthe he display content, menu, or select display content, a function, an entr entryy or a display: display: swipe upwards or downwards on the le -hand Touch Control. To exit exit a submenu: press the le -hand back button. the Head-up Display Selecting the # To switch switch on the the Head-up Display Display:: switch on the Head-up Display via the multimedia system or activate it on the menu bar by swiping upwards on the le -hand Touch Control. The Head-up Display menu will be selected on the Head-up Display. # To switch switch to to tthe he Head-up Display: Display: press the le -hand Touch Control or swipe upwards on the le -hand Touch Control. # To set set tthe he thr three ee displa displayy rang ranges es of tthe he Headup Display: Display: swipe upwards or downwards on the le -hand Touch Control. Instrument display and on-board computer 227 Full-screen ull-screen menus You can display the following menus full-screen on the instrument display: R Assistance R Trip R Navigation # # On the corresponding menu, use the le -hand Touch Control to scroll to the end of the list. Press the le -hand Touch Control. The selected menu will be displayed fullscreen. Over Ov ervie view w of displays displays on tthe he ins instr trument ument display Displays on the instrument display: u Active Parking Assist activated (/ page 217) é Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated (/ page 215, 214) h Cruise control (/ page 177) ç Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 179) ê à ¬ à ± è ë _ Active Brake Assist (/ page 194) Active Steering Assist (/ page 186) Active Stop-and-Go Assist (/ page 186) Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 202) Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 189) ECO start/stop function (/ page 150) HOLD function (/ page 174) Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 124) Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus (/ page 125) Vehicles with with Tr Traa c Sign Assist: Assist: Detected instructions and tra c signs (/ page 195). For an overview of the indicator and warning lamps, see (/ page 405). Head-up Display Function of tthe he Head-up Display * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. The Head-up Display projects the following information into the driver's eld of vision above the cockpit, for example: R The vehicle speed R Information from the navigation system R Information from the driving systems and driving safety systems R Some warning messages Depending on the vehicle's equipment, di erent content can be shown in the three areas of the Head-up Display (/ page 228). 228 Instrument display and on-board computer Displayy content Displa content R R R Wet road surface Objects on the display cover Polarization in sunglasses % In extreme sunlight, sections of the display may appear washed out. You can correct this by switching the Head-up Display o and on again. Setting Se tting the the Head-up Display Display using tthe he on-board com comput puter er 1 2 3 4 Navigation instructions Current speed Detected instructions and tra c signs Set speed in the driving system (e.g. cruise control) System limits System The visibility of the displays will be a ected by the following conditions: R Seat position R Image position setting R Ambient light On-board computer: 4 HEAD-UP DISPLAY The following Head-up Display settings or displays can be selected or shown: R Position R Brightness R Messages R Assistance status R Telephone R Audio R Voice Control System # # # # To select the the Se Settings ttings menu: swipe to the right on the le -hand Touch Control. The Settings menu 5 will be selected. To call up the the Se Settings ttings menu: press the le hand Touch Control. To adjust adjust tthe he position: swipe upwards or downwards on the le -hand Touch Control. To adjust adjust tthe he brightness: brightness: swipe to the le or right on the le -hand Touch Control. Setting tting messages, messages, assist assistance ance status, status, ttelephone, elephone, Se audio and tthe he Voice Voice Control Control System System # Press the le -hand Touch Control. The list of setting options will be displayed. # Swipe upwards or downwards on the le -hand Touch Control and select a setting by pressing the le -hand Touch Control. Instrument display and on-board computer 229 Selecting what the the Head-up Display Display shows 4 Right display area Tra c Sign Assist Assistant display 5 To adjust the position, brightness and lower display area 6 Index points 7 Lower display area (example: le display area) (Example) 1 Switches the Head-up Display on/o 2 Le display area Navigation system Average consumption G-meter 3 Central display area Speedometer Set speed in the driver assistance system, e.g. cruise control Warnings from driver assistance systems, e.g. distance warning Display areas 2 to 4 that are not required can be hidden. % In audio mode, the station name or track will be shown temporarily when the audio source is being actively operated. In addition, the latest calls will be displayed when the telephone list on the instrument display is actively operated. # Swipe upwards on the le -hand Touch Control. # Press the le -hand Touch Control. Switching the Switching the Head-up Displa Displayy on/o via the the multimedia syst system em Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Select HUD. The Head-up Display is activated. 230 MBUX multimedia system Overvie Over view w and oper operation ation Notes on the the MBUX multimedia system system & WARNING Risk of distraction due to information systems and communications equipment images in this Operator's Manual. For example, route guidance with augmented reality is not available in all equipment variants. Over Ov ervie view w of tthe he MBUX multimedia system system If you operate information systems and communications equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the tra c situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the tra c situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Depending on the equipment, the scope of function and product designation of your MBUX multimedia system may di er from the description and 1 Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX multimedia system 2 Media display with touch functionality 3 Control panel for telephone, navigation, radio/media, vehicle functions/system settings and favorites/themes 4 Touchpad 5 Controller Turn: adjusts the volume Press: switches sound on or o For Mercedes-AMG vehicles with AMG Performance exhaust system: • Turn: adjusts the volume • Press brie y: switches the mute function on/o • Press and hold: switches the multimedia system on/o 6 Ü Switches the MBUX multimedia system or media display on or o For Mercedes-AMG vehicles with AMG Performance exhaust system: ö button • Sets the sound characteristic of the AMG Performance exhaust system MBUX multimedia system 231 Further operating options: R Conducting a voice dialog with the Voice Control System. R Operating functions contact-free with the MBUX Interior Assistant. % You can nd further information about operation as well as about applications and services in the Digital Operator's Manual. Anti-the he protection protection Anti-t This device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against the . Further information on protection against the can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 232 MBUX multimedia system Home screen screen over overview view 1 Depending on the display, calls up the rst 2 3 4 5 6 three applications or the home screen Calls up the pro le Calls up the global search SOS NOT READY (only when the MercedesBenz emergency call system is not available) Mercedes me connect active Transmission of vehicle position active 7 Signal strength of the mobile phone network, 8 9 A B C network display, battery status of the mobile phone connected, time Calls up the Noti cations Center Calls up an application using the symbol Application and current information Quick-access, e.g. enter home address Index points and selected display area D Calls up the air conditioning menu E Calls up SUGGESTIONS, THEMES and FAVORITES MBUX multimedia system 233 % If Mercedes me connect 5 is active , the vehicle is linked with Mercedes me connect. Vehicle data is then transmitted to the backend system. What data is transmitted depends on which services are activated. Further details can be found in the Mercedes me connect terms and conditions and data protection information. The function is countrydependent. If transmission of vehicle position 6 is active , Mercedes me connect services have been activated for this vehicle which access the vehicle's geoposition. In which instances the geoposition is transmitted depends on the particular services. Further details can be found in the Mercedes me connect terms and conditions and data protection information. The function is country-dependent. Operating Oper ating tthe he MBUX multimedia system system Using Touc Touchh Control Control 1 © Shows the home screen 2 Touch Control =9Ì: swipe in the direction of the arrow (navigate) a Press (con rm) 3 G Returns to the previous display 4 6 Makes or accepts a call ~ Rejects or ends a call 5 Increase volume: swipe upwards Reduce volume: swipe down 8 Switch o the sound: press 6 £ Starts the Voice Control System ß Calls up favorites (press brie y) or adds favorites and themes (press and hold) % To operate Touch Control 2 in the most e ective way, use the tip of your thumb if possible. Navigation through the menus is carried out with Touch Control 2 with single- nger swipes. # To select a menu op option: tion: swipe and press. # To mov movee tthe he digital digital map: swipe in any direction. Using tthe he touc touchscr hscreen een # Select menu options, symbols or characters by pressing brie y. # To na navig vigat atee in menus: swipe up, down, le or right. # To use handwr handwriting iting to to enter enter char charact acter ers: s: write the character with one nger on the touchscreen. 234 MBUX multimedia system To zoom in and out of the the map: move two ngers together or apart. # To call up the the global menu: press and hold on the touchscreen until the OPTIONS menu appears. % For more information on operation, please refer to the Digital Operator's Manual. # the touc Using the touchpad hpad # # # To use handwriting handwriting recognition: recognition: write a character on the touchpad. To open or close the the Noti Noti cations Cent Center er:: swipe down or up with two ngers. To zoom in and out of the the map: move two ngers together or apart. buttons Calling up applications using buttons 1 2 3 4 G Returns to the previous display ~ Calls up the audio control menu © Calls up the home screen Touchpad # To select a menu option: option: swipe and press. 1 2 3 4 5 % button calls up the telephone z button calls up navigation | button calls up radio or media y button calls up vehicle functions ß button MBUX multimedia system 235 Press brie y: calls up favorites Press and hold: adds a favorite or creates a new theme # # Alternatively, tap © on the touchscreen. Call up the application (/ page 232). Functions of the the V Voice oice Control Control System System & WARNING Risk of distraction due to information systems and communications equipment If you operate information systems and communications equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the tra c situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the tra c situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. For your own safety, always observe the following points when operating mobile communications equipment and especially your voice control system: R Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving. R If you use the voice control system in an emergency your voice can change and your telephone call, e.g. an emergency call, can thereby be unnecessarily delayed. R Familiarize yourself with the voice control system functions before starting the journey. With the Voice Control System, various applications in the MBUX multimedia system are operable using voice input. The Voice Control System is operational approximately thirty seconds a er the ignition is switched on and is available for the driver's seat and front passenger seat. The following multimedia system applications can be operated: R Telephone R Text message and e-mail R Navigation R R R R Address book Radio Media Vehicle functions Starting ar ting the the Voice Voice Control Control Syst System em # Press 1. 236 MBUX multimedia system or # Say "Hello Mercedes". Over Ov ervie view w of tthe he MBUX Int Inter erior ior Assistant Assistant & WARNING Risk of injury from the camera's laser radiation This product uses a classi cation 1 laser system. If the housing is opened or damaged, laser radiation may damage your retina. # Do not open the housing. # Always have maintenance work and repairs carried out by a quali ed specialist workshop. This product complies with the requirements of the FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 with exception of the variations according to the FDA Laser Notice No. 50 from 24. June 2007. The camera is located in the overhead control panel. If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX Interior Assistant, selected functions of the multimedia system can be operated contact-free. The MBUX Interior Assistant can di erentiate between driver and front passenger interactions and detects speci c hand positions (poses). R Syst System em limits, display display messages messages and not notes es for for recti cation The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R The camera in the overhead control panel may heat up due to operating conditions. As a result the camera may switch o temporarily, particularly during longer periods of operation and at high outside temperatures. Do not touch or cover the camera and wait until the camera has cooled down and is available again. R R R The camera is covered, dirty, fogged up or scratched. Wait until the camera has cooled down before cleaning the camera lens. Clean the outside of the camera lens with a dry or damp cotton cloth. Do not use micronott remove the cover when ber cloths. Do no cleaning. Recognition can be impaired by re ective clothing, an adverse color of clothing or by accessories, for example. Clothing being worn (hat, shawl, scarf) may be limiting the detection area of the camera. Keep the camera's eld of vision clear. The camera is not operational. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. MBUX multimedia system 237 The MBUX Inter Interior ior Assistant Assistant supports suppor ts the the ffollo ollowing wing inter interactions: actions: Inter Int eraction action ar area ea Inter Int eraction action Descr Descrip iption tion In front of the media display or above the touchpad Proximity to the control element The Interior Assistant recognizes the approach of the hand towards a control element. Depending on the active application, the display will be adjusted in the media display. Some functions di erentiate between driver and front passenger. No speci c hand position is required. Above the center console De ned pose A favorite is called up with a de ned pose. Below the inside rearview mirror Brief up and down movements With brief vertical up and down movements below the inside rearview mirror the reading light for the driver or the front passenger is switched on and o . Above the front passenger seat Stretching out a hand above the front passenger seat By stretching out a hand above the front passenger seat the search light is switched on. If you withdraw a hand from this area, the search light is switched o again. Switching Switc hing the the reading reading light and searc searchh light and on or o R Req equir uirements: ements: R For the the rreading eading light light:: the function is available when it is dark. R R The hand movement takes place in the interaction area below the inside rearview mirror. For the the searc searchh light: light: the function is available when it is dark. The hand movement takes place in the interaction area above the front passenger seat. R The seat belt on the front passenger seat must not be inserted in the seat belt buckle. 238 MBUX multimedia system Switching Switc hing tthe he reading reading light on and o # Brie y move a hand up or down beneath the inside rearview mirror. The reading light is switched on or o for the driver or the front passenger. Switching tthe Switching he search search light on and o # # To switch switch on: reach across the front passenger seat with a hand. The search light is switched on for the driver. To switch switch o : take a hand back away from the front passenger seat. The search light is switched o again. Information Infor mation on pro pro les, themes, sugg sugges estions tions and fav favor orit ites es For electrically adjustable seats observe the following notes. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat a er calling up a driver pro le Selecting a user pro le may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the position saved under the user pro le. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process. # Make sure that when the position of driver's seat is being adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of movement. If there is a risk of someone becoming trapped, stop the adjustment process immediately: # a) Tap the warning message on the media display. or # b) Press a memory position button or a seat adjustment switch on the driver's door. The adjustment process will be stopped. MBUX multimedia system 239 The driver's seat is equipped with an access preventer. If the driver's door is open, the driver's seat will not be set a er calling up the driver's pro le. Pro les store your vehicle settings and settings for the multimedia system. If the vehicle is used by several drivers, the driver can select their own pro le without changing the stored pro le settings of other drivers. % Information on pro les from Mercedes me connect can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Vehicle settings are, for example, driver's seat, steering wheel and mirror settings, climate control and ambient lighting. For the settings of the multimedia system, you can select, for example, radio stations, previous destinations as well as themes, suggestions and favorites. For recurring driving situations, such as long drives on the highway, you can save your preferred settings in a theme in the vehicle. In a theme you can save the display of the digital map, your preferred radio station and preferred drive program, for example. The vehicle can learn the habits of the driver. It then o ers suggestions for the most probable navigation destinations, media sources, radio stations or contacts. The requirements for that are the selection of a pro le, your consent to the recording of data and su cient collected data. Favorites provide quick access to applications that are used o en. You can select favorites from categories or add them directly to an application. Con guring guring pr proo les, themes and sugg sugges estions tions Multimedia system: 4 © 5 f Profiles Creating eating a new new pro pro le Cr # Select W Create Profile . # Select an avatar. # Enter the name and con rm with a. # Select Continue r . # Select Current Settings. # Select Save. # # Activate Bluetooth® and select Connect Phone, to connect a mobile phone with the user pro le . Select Finish. Selecting pro pro le op options tions # Select Ä for a pro le. The following functions are available: R Editing, resetting or deleting a pro le R Resetting themes or favorites R Con guring suggestions Con guring suggestions tions guring sugges Select Ä for a pro le. # Select Suggestion Settings. # Switch Allow Destination Suggestions, Allow Music Suggestions and Allow Contact Suggestions on or o . # To deactiv deactivat atee tthe he learning learning function for for one day:: activate Deact. Learning for 24 h. day For 24 hours no new actions will be trained and no data recorded for the active pro le. Suggestions will continue to be shown. # 240 MBUX multimedia system Example: if the option is switched on and a route to a new destination has been calculated, this destination would not be taken into account for the learning function. Creating new themes themes Creating new # Select ©. # Select THEMES. # Select W Create Theme. The settings which are saved in the theme are shown. # Select Continue r. # Select Audio and Navigation (Navigation) and store the active settings in the theme. # Select Continue r. # Select an entry screen. # Select Continue r. # Select an image. # Enter the names into the entry eld and conrm with a. # Select Save. System settings System settings Over Ov ervie view w of tthe he syst system em settings settings menu In the system settings menu, you can make settings in the following menus and control elements: R Display Styles Instrument lighting Display brightness Edge lighting Day/night design R Control elements Keyboard language and handwriting recognition Sensitivity of the touchpad Sensitivity of the Touch Controls R Voice Control System R Sound Entertainment Navigation and tra c announcements Telephone Voice ampli cation to the rear Connectivity Wi-Fi, Bluetooth®, NFC Time & date Language Units for distance So ware updates Data import/export PIN protection System Reset - - R R R R R R R R Infor Inf ormation mation on im import portant ant system system updates updates Important system updates may be necessary for the security of your multimedia system's data. Install these updates, or else the security of your multimedia system cannot be ensured. A system update consists of three steps: R Downloading or copying of the data required for installation R Installation of the downloaded system update MBUX multimedia system 241 R Activation of the downloaded system update by restarting the system % If automatic so ware updates are activated, the system updates will be downloaded automatically. The multimedia system provides a message when a system update is available. You have the following selection options: R Accept and Install The system update will be downloaded in the background. R Information Information about the pending system update is displayed. R Later The system update can be downloaded manually at a later time. system em updates updates Deep syst Deep system updates access vehicle or system settings and can therefore only be carried out when the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is switched o . If the download of a deep system update is completed and the downloaded system update is ready for installation, you will be informed of this a er the next ignition cycle, for example. % Park the vehicle safely in a suitable location before starting the installation. Requirements for the installation: R The ignition is switched o . R Notes and warnings have been read and accepted. R The electric parking brake is applied. If all requirements have been ful lled, the downloaded system update is installed. The multimedia system cannot be operated while the downloaded system update is being installed and vehicle functions are restricted. If errors should occur during the installation, the multimedia system automatically attempts to restore the previous version. If restoration of the previous version is not possible, a symbol appears on the media display. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop to resolve the problem. Setting Se tting up a Wi-F Wi-Fii hotspot hotspot Req equir uirements: ements: R To se sett up the the Wi-F Wi-Fii connection of the the multimedia syst system em with with eext xter ernal nal ho hotspo tspots: ts: there is no communication module installed. R The device to be connected supports at least one of the types of connection described. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Wi-Fi & Bluetooth 5 System ctivating/deactivating ating Wi-Fi Wi-Fi Activating/deactiv # Select Wi-Fi. the multimedia system Connecting the system with with an ext exterernal hotspo hotspott using Wi-Fi Wi-Fi The type of connection established must be selected on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected. % The connection procedure may di er depending on the device. Follow the instructions that are shown in the display. Further information can be found in the manufacturer's operating instructions. 242 MBUX multimedia system # # # Select Internet Settings. Select Connect via Wi-Fi. Select Add Hotspot. Connecting using a QR code Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi network. # Select Connect using a QR code. # Scan the displayed QR code with the device to be connected. The Wi-Fi connection is established. # Connecting using a security security key # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi network. # Select Connect Using Security Key. # Have the security key displayed on the device to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). # Enter this security key on the multimedia system. # Con rm the entry with ¡. Connecting using a WPS PIN # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi network. # Select Connect via WPS PIN Input. The multimedia system generates an eightdigit PIN. # Enter this PIN on the device to be connected. # Con rm the entry. button Connecting using a button # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi network. # Select Connect via WPS PBC. # Select "Connect via WPS PBC" in the options on the device to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). # Press the WPS button on the device to be connected. # Select Continue in the multimedia system. Activ ctivating ating automatic automatic connection Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # # # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi network. Activate Permanent Internet Connection. Connecting wit withh a kno known wn Wi-Fi Wi-Fi # Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # Select a Wi-Fi network. The connection is established again. guring the multimedia syst Con guring system em as a Wi-F Wi-Fii ho hottspott for spo for ext exter ernal nal devices devices The type of connection established depends on the device to be connected. The function must be supported by the multimedia system and by the device to be connected. The type of connection established must be selected on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected. # Select Vehicle Hotspot. # Select Connect Device to Vehicle Hotspot. generation Connecting using WPS PIN gener ation # Select Connect via WPS PIN Generation. # Enter the PIN shown in the media display on the device to be connected and con rm. MBUX multimedia system 243 Connecting using WPS PIN entry # Select Connect via WPS PIN Input. # Enter the PIN that is shown on the external device's display on the multimedia system. button Connecting using a button Select Connect via WPS PBC. # Press the push button on the device to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). # Select Continue. # Connecting using a secur security ity key # Select Connect Device to Vehicle Hotspot. A security key is displayed. # Select the vehicle from the device to be connected. The vehicle is displayed with the DIRECT-MBUX XXXXX network name. # Enter the security key which is shown in the media display on the device to be connected. # Con rm the entry. Connecting using NFC # Select Connect via NFC. # Activate NFC on the mobile device (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). # Hold the device to be connected at the vehicle's NFC interface. # Select Finished. The mobile device is now connected to the multimedia system hotspot via NFC. Generating a new Generating new secur security ity key # Select Vehicle Hotspot. # Select Generate Security Key. A connection will be established with the newly created security key. # To save save a security security key: key: select Save. When a new security key is saved, all existing Wi-Fi connections are then disconnected. If the Wi-Fi connections are being re-established, the new security key must be entered. System Syst em language Notes on the the system system language This function allows you to determine the language for the menu displays and the navigation announcements. The selected language a ects the characters available for entry. The navigation announcements are not available in all languages. If a language is not available, the navigation announcements will be in English. Setting the system system language Setting the Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 ® Language # Set the language. % If you are using Arabic map data, the text information can also be shown in Arabic on the navigation map. To do so, select as the language from the language list. Navigation announcements are then also made in Arabic. 244 MBUX multimedia system Rese esetting tting the the multimedia syst system em (rese (resett function) & WARNING Risk of accidents due to failure of multimedia display functions While the multimedia system is being reset, its functions such as the rear view camera are not available. # Only reset the multimedia system when the vehicle is stationary. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Reset Personal data is deleted, for example: R Station presets R Connected mobile phones R Vehicles with rear telephony: handset connection R Individual user pro les % The guest pro le is reset when the settings are restored to the factory settings. % Vehicles with rear telephony: The handset must be in the cradle while the system is reset. A prompt appears again asking whether you really wish to reset. # Select Yes. The multimedia system is reset to the factory settings. If you have set a PIN for your system, this will also be reset. Navig vigation ation Notes on navig navigation ation Rout outee guidance wit withh augmented augmented reality reality & WARNING Risk of accident and injury as a result of distraction, incorrect depiction or wrong interpretation of the display The camera image of the augmented reality display is not suitable as a guide for driving. # Always keep an eye on the actual tra c situation. # Avoid extended observation of the camera image. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to imprecise positioning of additional information The additional information from the augmented reality display may be inaccurate and is not a substitute for observing and assessing the actual driving situation. # Always keep an eye on the actual tra c situation when carrying out all driving maneuvers. Switching Switc hing navig navigation ation on Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation (Navigation) # Alternatively: press the z button. The map shows the vehicle's current position. The navigation menu is shown. The navigation menu is hidden if route guidance is active. MBUX multimedia system 245 # To show: show: tap on the touchscreen. The menu is hidden automatically. Navig vigation ation over overview view Example: digital map with navigation menu 1 Enters a POI or address and additional desti- nation entry options 2 Cancels active route guidance 3 Repeats a navigation announcement and switch navigation announcements on or o 4 ON THE WAY menu with Route Overview, Alternative Routes and Report Traffic Incident (Car-to-X) TRAFFIC menu with Traffic Announcements, Area Alerts and Live Traffic Subscription Info Displays Route List POSITION menu with Save Position and Compass 246 MBUX multimedia system 5 Quick access for Traffic, Parking and High- way Information as well as options for View, Announcements and Route via Advanced 1 Federal state or province in which the vehicle is located 2 Enters a POI or address 3 List with additional destination entry options 4 Deletes an entry Enter Ent ering ing a destination destination Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 6 7 8 9 5 ª Where to? a Con rms an entry Switches to handwriting recognition Enters a space Switches to voice input Sets the written language A Switches to digits, special characters and symbols B Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters # Enter the destination in 2. The entries can be made in any order. MBUX multimedia system 247 The following entries can be made, for example: City, street, house number R Street, city R ZIP code R POI name or POI category, e.g. Parking R Contact name R Select a search result in list 3. Calculate the route (/ page 247). % You can nd further information about destination entry, e.g. 3 word addresses, in the Digital Operator's Manual. # # Changing country # Select the indicator for federal state or province 1. # Select the federal state or the province in 1. # Enter the country indicator. # Select the country on list 3. # Select the federal state or the province from list 3. Using online search % Requirements: the media display shows an Internet connection with a double-arrow symbol in the status line. Destination entry uses online map services. If the on-board search nds no suitable destinations or if you change countries, the online search is available. For the destination you can enter an address, a POI or a three-word address. # Enter the destination in input line 2. The search results are displayed. # Select the destination in the list. The detailed view for the route is displayed. or # Select country indicator 1. # Select the provider for the online service from the countries list. # Enter the destination in input line 2. # Select the destination in the list. Calculating a rout routee and using settings settings for for route route guidance Requir equirements: ements: R The destination has been entered. R The destination address is shown. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 1 ¥ No route yet. ¦ A route has been mapped. 248 MBUX multimedia system # Select ¥. The route to the destination is calculated. Route guidance begins. # Select ¦. Select Set as Waypoint. The destination address is set as the next intermediate destination. # Select Start New Route Guidance. The destination address is set as the new destination. The previous destination and the intermediate destinations are deleted. Route guidance to the new destination begins. Activ ctivating ating rout routee guidance with with augment augmented ed reality reality # During route guidance, tap on the camera symbol on the media display. The camera image will be shown instead of the navigation map before a turning maneuver and will show additional information. # To retur returnn to to tthe he na navig vigation ation map: tap on the camera symbol again. # or # # or # routee settings Selecting rout settings Select Z. # Select Advanced. # Select Route. # Select the route type. # Take tra c information into consideration with Dynamic Route Guidance r. # Select route options with Avoid Options. Activate Suggest Alternative Route. Alternative routes are calculated for every route. Activate Activate Commuter Route. If the requirements are met, the multimedia system automatically detects that the vehicle is on a commuter route. Route guidance begins without voice output. Displa Displaying ying additional inf infor ormation mation in the the camera image # Select Z. # Select Advanced. # Select Augmented Reality. # Activate Street Names and House Numbers. During route guidance, street names and house numbers are shown in the camera image. Using map functions Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation Se Setting tting the the map scale # To zoom in: tap twice quickly with one nger on the media display. # To zoom out: out: tap with two ngers on the media display. Mo Moving ving tthe he map # Move one nger in any direction on the touchscreen. # To rese resett the the map to to the the current current vehicle vehicle position: press \ brie y. MBUX multimedia system 249 Selecting map orient orientation ation # Tap repeatedly on the Ä compass symbol on the map. The view changes in the sequence 3D, 2D Heading Up to 2D North Up. Switching highwa Switching highwayy inf infor ormation mation on/o Select Z. # Switch Highway Information on or o . # Using services ser vices Req equir uirements: ements: R There is an Internet connection. R Mercedes me connect is available. R You have set up a user account in the Mercedes me Portal. R The vehicle is connected to a user account and you have accepted the conditions of use for the service. Further information can be found at: https:// www.mercedes.me R The service is available. R R The service has been activated at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The following additional conditions apply to the Parking service: The navigation services option is available, subscribed to and activated in the Mercedes me Portal. The parking service is within the scope of the navigation service. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation Displaying ying the the tr traa c situation wit withh Live Live Tr Traa c Displa Inf Infor ormation mation # Select Z. # Activate Traffic. # Select Advanced. # Select View. # Select Map Elements. # Traffic Incidents, Free Flowing Traffic and Delay: switch on. If tra c information has been received, then tra c incidents such as roadworks, road blocks, local area reports (e.g. fog) and warning messages are displayed. The tra c delay is displayed for the current route. Tra c delays lasting one minute or longer are taken into consideration. Displaying Displaying hazar hazardd w war arnings nings with with Car-t Car-to-X o-X-Commu-Communication If hazard warnings are available these can be shown as symbols on the map. The display depends on the settings for the Traffic and Traffic Incidents options. # Set the options. If Traffic is switched o and Traffic Incidents is switched on, the symbols are shown on the prospective route. Displaying Displaying weat weather her infor information mation and other other map cont contents ents # Select Z. # Select Advanced. 250 MBUX multimedia system # # # # Select View. Select Map Elements. Scroll up and show the ONLINE MAP CONTENT category. Switch on a service, e.g. Weather. Current weather information is displayed on the navigation map, e.g. temperature or cloud cover. Par arking king service ser vice * NOTE NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted headroom clearance If the vehicle height is greater than the maximum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged. # Observe the signposted headroom clearance. # If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter. # * NOTE Before selecting the parking option The data is based on information provided by the respective service provider. Mercedes Benz accepts no liability for the accuracy of the information provided relating to the parking garage/parking lot. # Always observe the local Information and conditions. % This service is not available in all countries. # Select Z and activate Parking. # Tap on j in the map. # Select a parking option. The map shows the parking options in the vicinity. The following information is displayed (if available): R Destination address, distance from current vehicle position and arrival time Information on the parking garage/parking lot, for example: Opening times Parking charges Current occupancy Maximum parking time Maximum access height The maximum access height shown by the parking service does not replace the need for observation of the actual circumstances. R Available payment options (Mercedes pay, coins, bank notes, cards) R Details on parking tari s R Number of available parking spaces R Payment method (e.g. at the parking meter) R Services/facilities at the parking option R Telephone number Calculate the route (/ page 247). R Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment. # MBUX multimedia system 251 Notes on the the dashcam * NOTE Before using the dashcam You are legally responsible for operation and use of the dashcam functions. The legal requirements relating to operation and use of the dashcam can vary depending on the country in which the dashcam is operated. Therefore, observe the legal requirements, in particular the data protection regulations, in your country. For this reason, before using the dashcam inform yourself about the regulation details for the respective country. This function is not permitted in all countries. # Observe the country-speci c regulations. Selecting a USB device device for for a video rrecor ecording ding with the dashcam Req equir uirements: ements: R At least one USB device is connected with the multimedia system . Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 Dashcam # Select the USB device. % When USB devices contain multiple partitions, recorded video les are not always displayed in the recording list. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use USB devices with one partition. Star arting ting or stopping stopping video rrecor ecording ding wit withh tthe he dashcam Requir equirements: ements: R A USB device is connected with the multimedia system . R The vehicle is switched on. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 Dashcam # If several USB devices are connected with the multimedia system, select a USB device (/ page 251). # Select the Individual Recording or Loop Recording recording mode. If Individual Recording is selected and the memory is full the recording stops. If Loop Recording has been selected, several short video les are recorded. When the memory limit is reached, the oldest video le is deleted and recording is continued automatically. # To st start art:: select Start Recording. The length of the recording is shown. The Please do not remove the storage medium. message appears. The video le is stored on the USB device. # To end: select End Recording. 252 MBUX multimedia system A report may appear in the following cases: R For the Individual Recording recording mode: the memory is full or there are only a few minutes recording time available. The video recording stops or will be stopped imminently. Change the USB device or delete a video le. R If a video recording has started and a national border is detected, the National Border Crossed. Please observe the country-specific regulations on video recording. message appears. This function is not available in all countries. R The camera is not functional, the Camera Unavailable message appears. Have the camera checked in an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Telephone Telephony Notes on telephony telephony & WARNING Risk of distraction from operating integrated communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the tra c situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the tra c situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and tra c conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. & WARNING Risk of an accident from operating mobile communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion Mobile communications devices distract the driver from the tra c situation. This could also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. # As the driver, only operate mobile communications devices when the vehicle is stationary. # As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile communications devices in the areas intended for this purpose, e.g. in the rear passenger compartment. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communication equipment in the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around MBUX multimedia system 253 and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. # Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets. # Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. # Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk/cargo compartment. Observe the additional information on stowing mobile communications devices correctly: R Loading the vehicle (/ page 104) Bluet Bluetooth ooth® connection: The menu view and the available functions in the telephone menu are in part dependent on the Bluetooth® pro le of the connected mobile phone. Full functionality is only available if the mobile phone supports both of the following Bluetooth® pro les: R PBAP (Phone Book Access Pro le) The contacts on the mobile phone are shown automatically on the multimedia system. R MAP (Message Access Pro le) The mobile phone message functions can be used on the multimedia system. Irrespective of this, Bluetooth® audio functionality can by used with any mobile radio unit. For information on the range of functions of the mobile radio unit to be connected, see the manufacturer's operating instructions. Networ tworkk connection: The following cases can lead to the call being disconnected while the vehicle is in motion: R You switch into a transmission/reception station, in which no communication channel is free. R The SIM card used is not compatible with the network available R A mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into the network with the second SIM card at the same time The multimedia system supports calls in HD Voice® for improved speech quality. A requirement for this is that the mobile phone and the mobile phone network provider of the person you are calling support HD Voice® . Depending on the quality of the connection, the voice quality may uctuate. Further information can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at: https:// www.mercedes-benz.com/connect 254 MBUX multimedia system Telephone menu ov over erview view 1 Bluetooth® device name of the currently con2 3 4 5 nected mobile phone/of the mobile phone Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone (two phone mode) Battery status of the connected mobile phone Signal strength of the mobile phone network Options 6 7 8 9 Device manager Messages Numerical pad Contact search Telephon elephonyy oper operating ating modes ov over erview view Depending on your equipment, the following telephony operating modes are available: R A mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth®. MBUX multimedia system 255 R Two mobile phones are connected with the multimedia system via Bluetooth® (two phone mode). You can use all the functions of the multimedia system with the mobile phone in the foreground. You can receive incoming calls and messages with the mobile phone in the background. You can interchange the mobile phone in the foreground and background. Connecting a mobile phone Req equir uirements: ements: Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia system. R Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone Searching for a mobile phone Searching for Select í. # Select Connect New Device. R # Connecting a mobile phone Authorization follows using secure simple pairing. # Select a mobile phone. A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone. # If both codes match, con rm the code on the mobile phone. Functions in the the ttelephon elephonyy menu In the telephony menu you have the following functions, for example: R Making calls, e.g.: R Accept a call k End Call i Create Confer. Call Accepting or rejecting a waiting call R Managing contacts, e.g.: Downloading mobile phone contacts Managing the format of a contact's name Saving a contact as a favorite Receiving and sending messages, e.g.: Using the read-aloud function Dictating a new message 256 MBUX multimedia system Mercedes me app Mercedes Mercedes Mer cedes me calls Making a call via the the ov over erhead head contr control ol panel # Press me button 1. emergency call Making an emergency # To open the cover of SOS button 2 , press it brie y. # Press and hold SOS button 3 for at least one second. If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergency call can still be triggered. This has priority over all other active calls. 1 me button for service or information calls 2 SOS button cover 3 SOS button (emergency call system) Making a Mercedes Mercedes me call Information Infor mation about the the Mer Mercedes cedes me call using the the me butt button on A call to the Mercedes-Benz customer center has been initiated via the me button in the overhead control panel or the multimedia system (/ page 256). Using the voice dialog system you access the desired service: R Accident and Breakdown Management R Mercedes-Benz customer center for general information about the vehicle You can nd information on the following topics: R Activation of Mercedes me connect R Operating the vehicle R Nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center R Other products and services from MercedesBenz Data is transferred during the connection to the Mercedes-Benz customer center (/ page 258). Calling the Mercedes-Benz customer customer cent center er using the Mercedes-Benz the multimedia syst system em equir uirements: ements: Req R Access to a mobile phone network is available. R The contract partner's mobile network coverage is available in the respective region. R The vehicle must be switched on so that vehicle data can be transferred automatically. MBUX multimedia system 257 Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 g # Call Mercedes me connect. A er con rmation, the multimedia system sends the required vehicle data. The data transfer is shown in the media display. Then, you can select a service and be connected to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz customer center. Calling tthe he Mer Mercedes-Benz cedes-Benz Customer Customer Cent Center er a er automatic automatic accident or breakdo breakdown wn det detection ection Req equir uirements: ements: R The vehicle has detected an accident or breakdown situation. R The vehicle is stationary. R The hazard warning lights are switched on. % This function is not available in all countries. The vehicle can detect accident or breakdown situations under certain circumstances. In the event an accident or breakdown is detected, the emergency guide shows safety notes in the multimedia system display. A er quitting the emergency guide display on the multimedia system, a prompt appears asking whether you would like to get support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. # Select Call. R The vehicle data is sent automatically (/ page 259). R The Mercedes-Benz Customer Center takes your call and organizes the breakdown and accident assistance. You may be charged for these services. % Depending on the severity of the accident, an automatic emergency call can be initiated. This has priority over all other active calls. % In addition, if the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics" is active, a similar prompt can appear a er a delay in the event of a breakdown. If you are already in contact with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center or have already received support, this prompt can be ignored or declined. % If you answer the prompt for support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center with Later, the message will be hidden and appear again later. The prompt triggered by the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics", can either be con rmed or declined. A er being declined, this will not be shown again. Arranging a ser Arranging service vice appointment via a Mercedes Mercedes me call If you have activated the maintenance management service, relevant vehicle data is transferred automatically to the Mercedes-Benz customer center. You will then receive individual recommendations regarding the maintenance of your vehicle. Regardless of whether you have consented to the maintenance management service, the multimedia system reminds you a er a certain amount of time that a service is due. A prompt appears asking if you would like to make an appointment. 258 MBUX multimedia system To arrang arrangee a service ser vice appointment: appointment: select Call. A er your agreement, the vehicle data is transferred and the Mercedes-Benz customer center takes your preferred appointment date. The information is then sent to your desired service outlet. This will contact you to con rm the appointment and if necessary consult about the details. % If you select Later a er the service message appears, the message is hidden and reappears at a later time. # Transferr Transf erred ed data data dur during ing a Mercedes Mercedes me call When you make a service call via Mercedes me, data is transmitted. This enables targeted advice and a smooth service. The following requirements must be ful lled for the transfer of the data: R The vehicle is switched on. R The required data transfer technology is supported by the mobile phone network provider. R The quality of the mobile connection is su cient. Multi-stage transfer depends on the following factors: R Reason for the initiation of the call R The available mobile phone transmission technology. R The activated Mercedes me connect services. R The service selected in the voice control system. Dataa transf transfer er if Mercedes Mercedes me connect services ser vices Dat ar aree no nott activat activated ed If no Mercedes me connect services are activated, the following data is transferred: R Vehicle identi cation number R Time of the call R Reason for the initiation of the call R Country indicator of the vehicle R Set language for the multimedia system R Telephone number of the communication platform installed in the vehicle If a call is made for a service appointment via the service reminder, the following data is also transmitted: R Current mileage and maintenance data If a call is made a er automatic accident or breakdown detection using the multimedia system, the following data is also transmitted: R Current mileage and maintenance data R Current vehicle location If Accident and Breakdown Management is called via the voice control system, the following data can also be called up from the vehicle by the Mercedes-Benz customer center: R Current vehicle location Data transf ansfer er if Mercedes Mercedes me connect services ser vices Data tr aree activat activated ed ar An overview of the data transmitted can be found in the respective terms of use for Mercedes me connect services. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me portal: https:// me.secure.mercedes-benz.com MBUX multimedia system 259 Dataa processing Dat processing The data transmitted within the scope of the call is deleted from the processing system a er the call is nished, in so far as this data is not being used for other activated Mercedes me connect services. The incident-speci c data is processed and stored in the Mercedes-Benz customer center and, if required to process the incident, forwarded to the service partner authorized by the Mercedes-Benz customer center. Please take note of the data protection information on the Mercedes me Internet page https://www.mercedes.me or in the recorded message immediately a er calling the Mercedes-Benz customer center. % The recorded message is not available in every country. Mercedes Mer cedes me connect Infor Inf ormation mation on Mer Mercedes cedes me connect Mercedes me connect consists of multiple services. You can use the following services via the multimedia system and the overhead control panel, for example: R Accident and Breakdown Management (me button or situation-dependent display in the multimedia system) R Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (automatic emergency call and SOS button) The Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center are available to you around the clock. The me button and the SOS button can be found on the vehicle's overhead control panel (/ page 256). You can also call the Mercedes-Benz customer center using the multimedia system (/ page 256). Please note that Mercedes me connect is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, rst call the national emergency services using the standard national emergency service telephone numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 263). Observe the conditions of use for Mercedes me connect and other services. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https:// me.secure.mercedes-benz.com Further information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com Infor mation on Mer Mercedes cedes me connect Accident Accident Information and Br Breakdo eakdown wn Management Management The Accident and Breakdown Management can include the following functions: R Supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 263) If necessary, the contact person at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center forwards the call to Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management. Forwarding the call is however not possible in all countries. R Breakdown assistance by a technician on location and/or the towing away of the vehicle 260 MBUX multimedia system R R to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center You may be charged for these services. Addition to the emergency guide a er automatic accident or breakdown detection (/ page 257) In the event of a breakdown or accident, further vehicle data is sent which enables optimal support by the Mercedes-Benz customer center and the authorized service partner or breakdown assistance. Addition to the Mercedes me connect service Telediagnostics With the Telediagnostics function, speci c wear and failure reports are recorded by the service provider, in so far as these can be clearly interpreted and are available through the monitoring of components that are subject to diagnostics. If your vehicle detects a breakdown or threat of a breakdown, you may be prompted via the multimedia system to contact the MercedesBenz customer center for further help. This prompt in the multimedia system only appears when the vehicle is stationary. % These services are subject to technical restrictions such as the mobile phone coverage, mobile network quality and the ability of the processing systems to interpret the transferred data. In some circumstances, this can result in delays or the failure of the information to appear in the multimedia system. More information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com Data transferr erred ed during during Mer Mercedes cedes me connect Data transf call services ser vices The data transferred during a Mercedes me connect call depends on: R The reason for initiation of the call R The service that is selected in the voice control system R The activated Mercedes me connect services You can nd out which data is transferred when using the services in the currently valid Mercedes me connect terms of use and the data protection information for Mercedes me connect. You can nd these in your Mercedes me user account. Over Ov ervie view w of the the Mer Mercedes cedes me & Apps menu When you log in with a user account to the Mercedes me Portal, then services and o ers from Mercedes-Benz will be available to you. For more information consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or visit the Mercedes me portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com % Make sure you always keep the Mercedes me apps updated. You can call up the menu using Mercedes me & Apps in the multimedia system. In the Mercedes me & Apps menu, the following options can be available: R Connecting the vehicle with the Mercedes me user account R Deleting a connection between a Mercedes me user account and the vehicle R Calling up the Mercedes me services MBUX multimedia system 261 R 1 2 3 4 5 6 Calling up apps such as, In-Car O ce or the web browser depending on availability Web brow browser ser over overview view URL entry Bookmarks Web page, back Web page, forwards To refresh/stop Options % Websites cannot be shown while the vehicle is in motion. The web browser is started using the Mercedes me & Apps menu. Over Ov ervie view w of smartphone smar tphone int integr egration ation With Smartphone Integration, you can use certain functions on your mobile phone via the multimedia system display. Only one mobile phone at a time can be connected via Smartphone Integration to the multimedia 262 MBUX multimedia system system. Also for use with two phone mode with smartphone integration, only one additional mobile phone can be connected using Bluetooth® with the multimedia system. The full range of functions for Smartphone Integration is only possible with an Internet connection. The appropriate application must be downloaded on the mobile phone to use Smartphone Integration. The mobile phone must be switched on and connected to a USB port with the ç symbol on the multimedia system using a suitable cable. Apps for Smartphone Integration R Apple CarPlay® R Android Auto % For safety reasons, the rst activation of Smartphone Integration on the multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is stationary and the parking brake is applied. You can start Apple CarPlay® or Android Auto from the device manager. % Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting the connecting cable only when the vehicle is stationary. Over ervie view w of transf transferr erred ed vehicle vehicle data Ov When using Smartphone Integration, certain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile phone. This enables you to get the best out of selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is not directly accessible. The following system information is transmitted: R So ware release of the multimedia system R System ID (anonymized) The transfer of this data is used to optimize communication between the vehicle and the mobile phone. To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the mobile phone, a vehicle identi er is randomly generated. This has no connection to the vehicle identi cation number (VIN) and is deleted when the multimedia system is reset (/ page 244). The following driving status data is transmitted: R Transmission position engaged R Distinction between parked, standstill, rolling and driving R Day/night mode of the instrument cluster R Drive type The transfer of this data is used to alter how content is displayed to correspond to the driving situation. The following position data is transmitted: R Coordinates R Speed R Compass direction R Acceleration direction This data is used by the mobile phone to improve the accuracy of the navigation (e.g. for continuation in a tunnel). MBUX multimedia system 263 Mercedes-Benz emergency Mercedes-Benz emergency call syst system em Infor Inf ormation mation on tthe he Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz emergency emergency call syst system em Your vehicle is equipped with the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ("eCall"). This feature can help save lives in the event of an accident. eCall in no way replaces assistance provided from dialing 911. Mercedes-Benz eCall only functions in areas where mobile phone coverage is available from the wireless service providers. Insu cient network coverage from the wireless service providers may result in an emergency call not being transmitted. eCall is a standard feature in your Mercedes-Benz vehicle. In order to function as intended, the system relies on the transmission of data detailed in the "Mercedes-Benz emergency call system data transmission" section that follows (/ page 265). To disable eCall, a customer must visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Service department to deactivate the vehicle's communication module. Deactivation his module prev prevents ents tthe he activaactivaDeactivation of tthis tion of an anyy and all Mer Mercedes cedes me connect services. A er the deactivation deactivation of eCall, automatic automatic emergency emergency call and manual emergency emergency call will nott be available. available. no The vehicle must be switched on before an automatic emergency call can be made. % eCall is activated at the factory. % eCall can be deactivated by an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealer. Please note that in the event ownership of the vehicle is transferred to another owner in its deactivated state, eCall will remain deactivated unless the new owner visits an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealership to reactivate the system. Over Ov ervie view w of the the Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz emerg emergency ency call syst system em eCall can help to reduce the time between an accident and the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. It helps locate an accident site in places that are di cult to access. However, even if a vehicle is equipped with eCall, this does not mean the system is ON. As such, eCall does not replace dialing 911 in the event of an accident. An emergency call can be made automatically or manually. Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar situation. Messages the display Messages on the SOS NOT READY: the vehicle is not on or eCall not available. During an active emergency call, appears in the display. You can nd more information on the regional availability of eCall at: https://www.mercedesbenz-mobile.com/extra/ecall/ % If there is a malfunction in the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (e.g. a malfunction with the speaker, microphone, airbag, SOS button), a corresponding message appears on the display in the instrument cluster. 264 MBUX multimedia system Trigg igger ering ing an automatic automatic Mer Mercedes‑Benz cedes‑Benz emergency call Req equir uirements: ements: R The vehicle is switched on. R The starter battery is su ciently charged. The Mercedes‑Benz emergency call system triggers an emergency call automatically in the following cases: R A er activation of the restraint systems such as airbags or Emergency Tensioning Devices a er an accident R A er an emergency stop automatically initiated by Active Emergency Stop Assist The emergency call has been made: R A voice connection is made to the MercedesBenz emergency call center. R A message with accident data is transmitted to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call center can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the emergency call centers. The SOS button in the overhead control panel ashes until the emergency call is nished. It is not possible to immediately end an automatic emergency call. If no connection can be made to the emergency services either, a corresponding message appears in the media display. # Dial the local emergency number on your mobile phone. If an emergency call has been initiated: R Remain in the vehicle if the road and tra c conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emergency call center operator. R Based on the call, the operator decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site. R If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambulance is sent to the vehicle immediately. Trigg igger ering ing a manual Mer Mercedes-Benz cedes-Benz emergency emergency call To use the the SOS butt button on in the the ov over erhead head control trol panel: press and hold the SOS button for at least one second (/ page 256). # To use voice voice control: control: use the Voice Control System voice commands . The emergency call has been made: R A voice connection is made to the MercedesBenz emergency call center. R A message with accident data is transmitted to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call center can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the emergency call centers. R Remain in the vehicle if the road and tra c conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emergency call center operator. R Based on the call, the operator decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site. # MBUX multimedia system 265 If no connection can be made to the emergency services either, a corresponding message appears in the media display. # Dial the local emergency number on your mobile phone. unintentionallyy trigg Ending an unintentionall trigger ered ed manual Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz emergency emergency call # Using the the multifunction steer steering ing wheel: select ~. Depress the button for several seconds. Dataa transf Dat transfer er of the the Mer Mercedes-Benz cedes-Benz emergency emergency call system system In the event of an automatic or manual emergency call the following data is transmitted, for example: R Vehicle's GPS position data R GPS position data on the route (a few hundred meters before the incident) () R Direction of travel R Vehicle identi cation number R Vehicle drive type R Number of people determined to be in the vehicle R R R R Whether Mercedes me connect is available or not Whether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically Time of the accident Language setting on the multimedia system Data transmitted is vehicle information. For any questions about the collection, use and sharing of the eCall system data, please contact MBUSA's Customer Assistance Center at 800-FOR-MERC. For Canada, please contact MBC's Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-387-0100. Customer requests for covered information should be submitted via the same channels. For accident clari cation purposes, the following measures can be taken up to an hour a er the emergency call has been initiated: R The current vehicle position can be determined. R A voice connection to the vehicle occupants can be established. 266 MBUX multimedia system Radio & media Overvie Over view w of tthe he symbols and functions in the the media menu Symbol Designation Function Function 6 Play Select to start or continue playback. 8 Rest Select to pause the playback. : Repeat a track Select to repeat the current track or the active playlist. Select once: the active playlist is repeated. R Select twice: the current track is repeated. R Select three times: the function is deactivated. R 9 Random playback Select to play back the tracks in random order. û/ü Skip forwards/back Select to skip to the next or to the previous track. ß Options Select to show additional options. 5 Categories Select to show or search through available categories (e.g. playback lists, albums, artists, etc.). ª Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example. MBUX multimedia system 267 Symbol Designation Function Function Z Settings Select to make settings. © Home Select to return to the home screen. j Messaging Select to call up messaging. 2 Full screen Select to switch to full screen mode. The following functions and settings are available in the media menu: R Connecting external data storage media with the multimedia system (e.g. using USB or Bluetooth®) R Playing back audio or video les Aut uthor horizing izing a Bluet Bluetooth ooth® audio device device for for media pla playback yback Req equir uirements: ements: Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia system and audio equipment. R R R The audio equipment supports the Bluetooth® audio pro les A2DP and AVRCP. The audio equipment is "visible" for other devices. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media Bluetooth® 5 Bluetooth 5 ª With audio, you can play back music les from an external data storage medium, e.g. your smartphone, using the MBUX multimedia system. # To play back audio les using the multimedia system, authorize the external data storage medium on the MBUX multimedia system. uthor horizing izing a ne new w Bluet Bluetooth ooth® audio de device vice Aut Select Connect New Device. # Select an audio device. Authorization starts. A code is displayed on the multimedia system and on the mobile phone. # If the codes are identical, con rm on the audio equipment. # Select Only as Bluetooth Audio Device. The Bluetooth® audio equipment is connected with the multimedia system. # 268 MBUX multimedia system Connecting previousl previouslyy author authorized ized Bluetooth Bluetooth® audio eq equipment uipment # Select a Bluetooth® audio device from the list. The connection is being established. Over Ov ervie view w of tthe he symbols and functions in the the radio radio menu Symbol Designation Function Function © Home Select to return to the home screen. j Messaging Select to call up messaging. û/ü Skip forwards/back Select to skip to the next or to the previous station. Z Settings Select to have further options shown. Settings can be made to the following additional functions, for example: R Navigation and tra c announcements R Frequency x function R Radio additional text R Emergency warnings The setting options are country-dependent. MBUX multimedia system 269 Symbol Designation Function Function HD HD 8 Silent function Select to switch o the sound. f Store radio stations Select to save a station in the presets. 4 Station list Select to have the station list shown. ª Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example. radio® Additional functions of TTuneIn uneIn rradio adio % A relatively large volume of data can be transmitted when using TuneIn Radio. Select to switch the HD Radio® function on or o . This function is not available in all countries. 270 MBUX multimedia system Symbol Designation Function Function Z Settings The following additional settings are available in the TuneIn Radio menu: R Selecting stream R Logging on to or out of the TuneIn account ß Favorites Select during playback to save the station currently set as a favorite. 6/8 Play/Pause Select to start, stop or continue playback. 5 Browse Select to choose a category and then a radio station. Additional functions of tthe he satellit satellitee radio radio SIRIUS XM® satellite radio o ers more than 175 digital-quality radio channels providing 100% commercial-free music, sports, news and entertainment, for example. SIRIUS XM® satellite radio employs a eet of high-performance satellites to broadcast around the clock throughout the USA and Canada. The satellite radio program is available for a monthly fee. Information about this can be obtained from a Sirius XM® Service Center and at https://www.siriusxm.com (USA) or https://www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). % Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other marks, channel names and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved. MBUX multimedia system 271 Symbol Designation Function Function Z Settings The following additional settings are available in the satellite radio menu: R Activate child safety lock to lock channels with adult content R Set alarm programming for music and sport alerts R Create TuneMix lists to listen to music seamlessly 5 Playback control Select to show the timeline. Tap any point on the timeline to skip forwards or back. Navigate to the end of the timeline to return to live mode. 6 Play Select to start or continue playback. 8 Rest Select to pause the playback. Depending on the frequency band selected, di erent functions are available to you. Select the desired frequency band in the radio menu head runner. Calling up TuneIn TuneIn Radio Radio Requir equirements: ements: 272 MBUX multimedia system R R R The TuneIn Radio service is activated in the Mercedes me Portal. The data volume is available. Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased. A fast Internet connection for data transmission free of interference. % Data volume can be purchased dir directl ectlyy from from a mobile phone ne netw twor orkk pro provider vider via the Mercedes me Portal. % The functions and services are countrydependent. For more information, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio # Select TuneIn Radio. The TuneIn menu appears. The last station set starts playing. % The connection quality depends on the local mobile phone reception. Setting Se tting up satellit satellitee radio radio Req equir uirements: ements: R Satellite radio equipment is available. R Registration with a satellite radio provider has been completed. R If registration is not included when purchasing the system, your credit card details will be required to activate your account. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 SiriusXM 5 Z Options # Select Service Information. The service information screen appears showing the radio ID and the current subscription status. # Establish a telephone connection. # Follow the service sta 's instructions. The activation process may take up to ten minutes. % You can also have the satellite service activated online. To do so, please visit https:// www.siriusxm.com (USA) or https:// www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). Music and sport spor t alerts aler ts Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio 5 Alerts 5 SiriusXM 5 Z Se Setting tting music and sport spor t aler alerts ts This function enables you to program an alert for your favorite artists, tracks or sporting events. Music alerts can be saved whilst a track is being played and sport alerts can be saved during a live game. You can also specify sport alerts via the menu option. The system then continuously searches through all the channels. # Set a music or sports alert, to be informed of matches in the Live program. Activ ctivating ating the the music inf infor ormation mation function # Activate Music Alerts O. Setting Setting a music alert # Select Add Alert. MBUX multimedia system 273 # Select Artists or Song in the dialog window. The alert is set for the current artist or track. If a match is found, a prompt appears asking whether you wish to change to the station. Activ ctivating ating sports spor ts infor information mation Activate Activate Sports Alerts O. # Setting a sport Setting spor t alert Select Add Alert. # Select the team name or league in the dialog window. # Deleting spor ts and music alerts aler ts Deleting individual sports Select Manage Music Alerts. or # Select Manage Sports Alerts. # Select an artist or track. or # Select a team. # Select Delete Selected Entries. All highlighted alerts are deleted. # Deleting all sports Deleting spor ts and music aler alerts ts # Select Manage Music Alerts. or # Select Manage Sports Alerts. # Select Delete All Entries. All alerts are deleted. Sound settings settings Overvie Over view w of functions in the the sound menu The setting options and functions available depend on the sound system installed. You can nd out which sound system is installed in your vehicle in the Digital Operator's Manual. Standar andardd sound system system and A Adv dvanced anced sound sy sysstem The following functions are available: R Equalizer: Treble, mid-range and bass R Balance and fader R Volume: Automatic adjustment Burmest er® surr surround ound sound system system and Burmester Burmester Burmest er® high-end 3D surr surround ound sound system system The following functions are available: R Equalizer: Treble, mid-range and bass R Balance and fader R Sound focus R VIP seat (Burmester® high-end 3D surround sound system only) R Sound pro les R Volume: Automatic adjustment 274 Maintenance and care ASSYST PLUS ASSYST PLUS service ser vice int interv erval al display Function of the the ASSYS ASSYSTT PL PLUS US service ser vice interv interval al display The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the instrument display informs you of the time or distance remaining before the next service due date. You can hide this service display using the G back button on the le -hand side of the steering wheel. Depending on how the vehicle is used, the ASSYST PLUS service interval display may shorten the service interval, e.g. in the following cases: R Mainly short-distance driving R When the engine is o en le idling for long periods R In the event of frequent cold start phases Mercedes-Benz recommends avoiding such operating conditions. You can obtain information concerning the servicing of your vehicle from a quali ed specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Displaying Displa ying the the ser service vice due date On-board computer: 4 Service 5 ASSYST PLUS The next service due date is displayed. # To exit exit the the display: display: press the G back button on the le -hand side of the steering wheel. Bear in mind the following related topic: R Operating the on-board computer (/ page 225). Infor Inf ormation mation on regular regular maintenance maintenance w work ork * NOTE Premature wear through failure to observe service due dates Maintenance work which is not carried out at the right time or incompletely can lead to increased wear and damage to the vehicle. # Adhere to the prescribed service intervals. # Always have the prescribed maintenance work carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop. Notes on special service ser vice req requir uirements ements The prescribed service interval is based on normal operation of the vehicle. Have the maintenance work carried out more o en than prescribed if operating conditions are di cult or the vehicle is subject to increased stress. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only an aid. The driver of the vehicle bears responsibility as regards to whether maintenance work needs to be performed more o en than speci ed based on the actual operating conditions and/or loads. Examples of arduous operating conditions: R Regular city driving with frequent intermediate stops R Mainly short-distance driving R Frequent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces Maintenance and care 275 R R When the engine is o en le idling for long periods Operation in particularly dusty conditions and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently used In these or similar operating conditions, have the interior air lter, air lter, engine oil and oil lter, for example, changed more frequently. The tires must be checked more frequently if the vehicle is operated under increased loads. Further information can be obtained at a quali ed specialist workshop. Batter Batt eryy disconnection per periods iods The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can calculate the service due date only when the battery is connected. # Display and note down the service due date on the instrument display before disconnecting the battery (/ page 274). Engine compar compartment tment Opening and closing the the hood & WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the hood unlocked The hood may open and block your view. # Never release the hood when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury when opening and closing the hood The hood may suddenly drop into the end position. There is a risk of injury for anyone in the hood's range of movement. # Do not open or close the hood if there is a person in the hood's range of movement. & WARNING Risk of burns when opening the hood If you open the hood in the event of an overheated engine or re in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur: R You may come into contact with hot gases. R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating uids. # # Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down. In the event of a re in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the re service. & WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start unexpectedly even when the drive system is switched o . Observe the following if you must open the hood: 276 Maintenance and care # # # # Switch o the vehicle. Never touch the danger zones surrounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan. Remove jewelery and watches. Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts. & WARNING Risk of injury from touching live components The ignition system and the fuel injection system operate with a high voltage. You could receive an electric shock. # Never touch components of the ignition system or fuel injection system when the vehicle is switched on. The live components include the following, for example: R Ignition coils R Fuel injectors R Electric lines to the ignition coils and the fuel injectors Opening the the hood & WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. & WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers when the hood is open If the windshield wipers start moving when the hood is open, you could be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch o the windshield wipers and the vehicle rst if you need to open the hood. # To release the hood, pull on handle 1. Maintenance and care 277 # If the hood can still be li ed slightly, open the hood again and close it with a little more force until it engages correctly. The waiting time before checking the oil level when the engine is at normal operating temperature is ve minutes. Engine oil Checking Chec king the the engine oil level level using the the oil dipstick dipstick & WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment # Push handle 1 of the hood catch upwards and li the hood until it opens automatically. the hood Closing the # Lower the hood to a height of around 8 in (20 cm) and then allow it to fall, applying a little force as you let it go. Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. Requir equirements: ements: R The engine has an oil dipstick. If not, the engine oil level can be checked only with the on-board computer (/ page 278) . Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be installed in the engine compartment in di erent locations. # # Park the vehicle on a level surface. Pull oil dipstick 1 out and wipe o . 278 Maintenance and care # # # Slowly slide oil dipstick 1 into the guide tube to the stop, and pull it out again a er approximately three seconds. R Oil level is correct: oil level is between 2 and 3. R Oil level too low: oil level is at 3 or below. R Oil level too high: oil level is above 2. If the oil level is too low, add 1.1 US qt (1 liter) of engine oil. If the oil level is too high, drain o excess engine oil. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. 30 minutes with a normal driving style and even longer with an active driving style. On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Engine Oil Level One of the following messages will appear on the instrument display: R Measuring Engine Oil Level...: measurement of the oil level is not yet possible. # R Checking the Checking the engine oil lev level el using tthe he on-board comput computer er equirements: ements: Requir R The engine has been warmed up. R The vehicle is parked on a level surface. R The engine is running at idle speed. R The hood is closed. The engine oil level is determined during driving. Determining the engine oil level can take up to R # R Repeat the request a er a maximum of 30 minutes' driving. Engine Oil Level OK and the bar display for indicating the oil level on the instrument display is green and is between "min" and "max": the oil level is correct. Engine Oil Level Add 1,1 qts. and the bar display for indicating the oil level on the instrument display is orange and is below "min": Add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil. Reduce Engine Oil Level and the bar display for indicating the oil level on the instrument display is orange and is above "max": # R # R Drain o any excess engine oil that has been added. To do so, consult a quali ed specialist workshop. For Engine Oil Level Switch Ignition On Switch on the vehicle to check the engine oil level. Engine Oil Level System Inoperative: The oil level sensor is defective or not connected. R Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Engine Oil Level System Currently Unavail. # Close the hood. # Re lling engine oil & WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. Maintenance and care 279 & WARNING Risk of re and injury from engine oil If engine oil comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compartment, it may ignite. # Make sure that no engine oil is spilled next to the ller opening. # Allow the engine to cool o and thoroughly clean the engine oil from component parts before starting the vehicle. * NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil lter, incorrect oil or additives # # # Do not use engine oils or oil lters which do not correspond to the speci cations explicitly prescribed for the service intervals. Follow the instructions on the service interval display for changing the engine oil and observe the prescribed change intervals. Do not use additives. * NOTE Damage caused by re lling too much engine oil Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. # Have excess engine oil removed at a quali ed specialist workshop. % Depending on driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liter) of oil per 600 miles (1000 km). The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. # # # # Turn cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove it. Add engine oil. Replace cap 1 and turn it clockwise until it engages. Check the oil level again (/ page 277). 280 Maintenance and care Checking Chec king the the coolant lev level el # & WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment The coolant level is correct in the following cases: R If the engine is cold, the coolant is up to marker bar 2. R If the engine is warm, the coolant is up to 0.6 in (1.5 cm) over the marker bar 2. Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. If necessary, add coolant that has been approved for Mercedes-Benz. % Further information on coolant (/ page 349) # & WARNING Risk of scalding from hot coolant If you open the cap, you could be scalded. # Let the motor cool down before opening the cap. # When opening the cap, wear protective gloves and safety glasses. # Open the cap slowly to release pressure. Continue turning cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove it. Re lling the windshield washer washer syst system em # # # Park the vehicle on a level surface. Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster. The coolant temperature must be in the bottom quarter of the temperature display. Slowly turn cap 1 counter-clockwise to release overpressure. & WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. Maintenance and care 281 Keeping the the air-w air-wat ater er duct free free & WARNING ‑ Risk of re and injury from windshield washer concentrate # Windshield washer concentrate is highly ammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate spills out next to the ller opening. Keep the area between the hood and the windshield free of deposits, e.g. ice, snow and leaves. Cleaning and care Notes on washing washing the the vvehicle ehicle in a car wash wash & WARNING Risk of accident due to reduced braking e ect a er washing the vehicle Remove cap 1 by the tab. Add washer uid. % Further information about the windshield washer uid (/ page 350) # # The braking e ect is reduced a er washing the vehicle. # A er the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the tra c conditions until the braking e ect has been fully restored. 282 Maintenance and care * NOTE Damage from automatic braking If one of the following functions is switched on, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations: R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R HOLD function R Active Parking Assist To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situations: # During towing # In a car wash * NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car wash # Before driving into a car wash make sure that the car wash is suitable for the vehicle dimensions. # # Ensure there is su cient ground clearance between the underbody and the guide rails of the car wash. Ensure that the clearance width of the car wash, in particular the width of the guide rails, is su cient. To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a car wash, ensure the following beforehand: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. R The HOLD function is switched o . R The surround view camera or the rear view camera is switched o . R The side windows and sliding sunroof are completely closed. R The blower for the ventilation and heating is switched o . R The windshield wiper switch is in position g. R The SmartKey is at a minimum distance of 10 (3 m) away from the vehicle. Otherwise, the trunk lid could open unintentionally. R For car washes with a conveyor system: - Neutral i is engaged. If you would like to leave the vehicle while it is being washed, make sure the SmartKey is located in the vehicle. The park position j is otherwise automatically engaged. % If, a er the car wash, you remove the wax from the windshield and wiper rubbers, this will prevent smearing and reduce wiper noise. Notes on using a power power washer washer & WARNING Risk of an accident when using power washers with round-spray nozzles The water jet can cause externally invisible damage. Components damaged in this way may unexpectedly fail. # Do not use a power washer with roundspray nozzles. # Have damaged tires or chassis parts replaced immediately. Maintenance and care 283 To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the following when using a power washer: R The SmartKey is at a minimum distance of 10 (3 m) away from the vehicle. Otherwise, the trunk lid could open unintentionally. R Maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) to the vehicle. R Vehicles with with decorativ decorativee foil: foil: Parts of your vehicle are covered with a decorative foil. Maintain a distance of at least 27.6 in (70 cm) between the foil-covered parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer. Move the power washer nozzle around whilst cleaning. The water temperature of the power washer must not exceed 140°F (60°C). R Observe the information on the correct distance in the equipment manufacturer's operating instructions. R Do not direct the nozzle of the power washer directly at sensitive parts, such as tires, gaps, electrical components, batteries, light sources and ventilation slits. Washing tthe he vvehicle ehicle by by hand * NOTE Engine damage due to water ingress # Take care not to point the water jet directly towards the air inlet grille below the hood. Observe the legal requirements, e.g. in a number of countries, washing by hand is only permitted in specially designated wash bays. # Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. # Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using a so car sponge. When doing so, do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight. # Carefully hose the vehicle o with water and dry using a chamois. % Observe the notes on the care of vehicle parts (/ page 285). Notes on paintw paintwor ork/matt k/mattee nish paintwor paintworkk care To avoid damaging the paintwork and interfering with the driving assistance systems, please observe the following notes: Paint Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse o the treated areas a erwards. R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse o a erwards. R Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter uid. R Coolant and brake uid: remove with a damp cloth and clean water. R Tar stains: use tar remover. R Wax: use silicone remover. R Do not attach stickers, lms or similar materials. Only have lm attached to the bumper at a quali ed specialist workshop. R Remove dirt immediately, where possible. R Matte Matte nish R Only use care products approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not attach stickers, lms or similar materials. Only have lm attached to the bumper at a quali ed specialist workshop. 284 Maintenance and care R R R R Do not polish the vehicle and alloy wheels. Only use car washes that correspond to the latest engineering standards. Do not use car wash program with a nal hot wax treatment. Do not use paint cleaners, bu ng or polishing products, gloss preservers, e.g. wax. In the event of paintwork damage: Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop. R Make sure the radar sensors function (/ page 170). R Notes on cleaning decorativ decorativee ffoils oils Observe the notes on matte nish care in the chapter "Notes on paintwork/matte nish paintwork care" (/ page 283). They also apply to matte decorative foils. Observe the notes on cleaning decorative foils to avoid vehicle damage. Cleaning R For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild cleaning agent without additives or abrasive substances, e.g. a car shampoo approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Remove dirt immediately, where possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the decorative foil irreparably. R If there is dirt on the nish or if the decorative foil is dull: use the Paint Cleaner recommended and approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse o the treated areas a erwards. R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse o a erwards. R To prevent water stains, dry a foil-wrapped vehicle with a so , absorbent cloth a er every car wash. Avoiding damagee to to the the decorativ decorativee ffoil oil Avoiding damag The service life and color of decorative foils are impaired by: Sunlight R Temperature, e.g. hot air blower Weather conditions Stone chippings and dirt Chemical cleaning agents Oily products Do not use polish on matte decorative foil. Polishing will have the e ect of shining the foil-wrapped surface. Do not treat matte or structured decorative foils with wax. Permanent stains may occur. - - R R Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas a ected by corrosion and damage caused by incorrect care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a quali ed specialist workshop. You can obtain more information on care and cleaning products from the manufacturer. In the case of foil-wrapped surfaces, optical di erences may occur between the surfaces that were not protected by a decorative foil a er removing a decorative foil. Maintenance and care 285 % Have work or repairs to decorative foils carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Notes on care care of vvehicle ehicle parts par ts & WARNING Risk of entrapment if the windshield wipers are switched on while the windshield is being cleaned If the windshield wipers are set in motion while you are cleaning the windshield or wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch o the windshield wipers and the vehicle before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. & WARNING Risk of burns from the tailpipe and tailpipe trims The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. # # Always be particularly careful around the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area. Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them. To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the notes on cleaning and care of the following vehicle parts: rims Wheels and rims Use water and acid-free alloy wheel cleaners. R Do not use acidic alloy wheel cleaners to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. R To avoid corrosion of the brake discs and brakepads, drive the vehicle for a few minutes a er cleaning before parking it. The brake discs and brakepads warm up and dry out. R Windows Clean the windows inside and outside with a damp cloth and with a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R R Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solventbased cleaning agents to clean the inside of windows. % A er changing the wiper blades or treating the vehicle with wax, clean the windshield thoroughly with cleaning agents recommended for Mercedes-Benz. Failure to observe the application instructions may result in damage, smear marks or blinding spots. % Remove external fogging or dirt on the windshield in front of the multifunction camera. Otherwise, driving systems and driving safety systems may be impaired or not available (/ page 170). Wiper blades Move the wiper arms into the replacement position (/ page 129). R With the wiper arms folded out, clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth. R % Make sure that the wiper blades are coated. The coating can leave residues on a cloth. Do not rub the wiper blades excessively or clean them too o en. 286 Maintenance and care Exter Ext erior ior lighting R Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. R Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Sensors R Clean the sensors in the front and rear bumpers with a so cloth and car shampoo (/ page 170). R When using a power washer, maintain a minimum distance of 11.8 in (30 cm). view camer cameraa and surround surround view view camera Rear view To open the rear view camera cover, switch on the vehicle. R Use clean water and a so cloth to clean the camera lens. R Do not use a power washer. R Tailpipes R Clean with a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz, especially in the winter and a er washing the vehicle. R Do not use acidic cleaning agents. Notes on care care of the the inter interior ior & WARNING Risk of injury from plastic parts breaking o a er the use of solvent-based care products Care and cleaning products containing solvents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts may break away. # Do not use any care or cleaning products containing solvents to clean the cockpit. & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries from bleached seat belts Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely weaken them. This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear or fail in an accident. # Never bleach or dye seat belts. To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the following notes on cleaning and care: Seat belts R Clean with lukewarm and soapy water. R Do not use chemical cleaning agents. R Do not dry by heating them to over 176°F (80°C) or exposing them to direct sunlight. Display Switch o the display and let it cool down. R Clean the surface carefully with a micro ber cloth and a suitable display care product (TFTLCD). R Do not use any other agents. R Head-up Display R Clean with a so , non-static, lint-free cloth. R Do not use cleaning agents. Plastic trim Plastic trim R Clean with a damp micro ber cloth. R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not attach stickers, lms or similar materials. Maintenance and care 287 R Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sun cream to come in contact with the plastic trim. Real wood wood and tr trim im elements R Clean with a micro ber cloth. R Black piano-lacquer look: Clean with a damp cloth and soapy water. R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, polishes or waxes. Headliner R Clean with a brush or dry shampoo. Carpet Carpet R Use a carpet and textile cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz. Steer ing wheel made of genuine genuine leather leather or DINASteering MICA * NO NOTE TE Damage caused by wrong cleaners # Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover or wheel cleaner; neither should you use polishes or waxes. Otherwise you may damage the nish. R R R R R Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water solution and then wipe with a dry cloth. For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommended for Mercedes-Benz. Leather care: Use a leather care agent that has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz. Do not allow the leather to become too damp. Do not use a micro ber cloth. % Leather is a natural product. It has natural surface properties, such as di erences in structure, marks caused by growth and injury or subtle color di erences. These surface properties are characteristics of leather and not material faults. What's more, leather is subject to a natural aging process during which the surface properties change. Genuine leather covers leather seat covers Clean with a damp cloth and then wipe with a dry cloth. R R R R Leather care: Use a leather care agent that has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz. Do not allow the leather to become too damp. Do not use a micro ber cloth. % Regular cleaning and care of the leather reduces soiling, wear marks and aging damage and thus signi cantly extends its life span. Clothing that can leave stains, e.g. jeans, can leave discoloration on the leather. DINAMICA DINAMIC A seat covers covers Clean with a damp cloth. R Do not use a micro ber cloth. R Imitation leather seat cov covers ers Imitation leather R Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water. R Do not use a micro ber cloth. Fabric abric seat cov covers ers R Clean with a damp micro ber cloth and 1% soapy water and allow to dry. EASY-PAC EASY-PACK K trunk trunk box Clean with a damp cloth. R 288 Maintenance and care R Do not use any alcohol-based thinners, gasoline or abrasive cleaning agents. Breakdown assistance 289 Emergency Emergency Remo emoving ving the the safe safety ty vest vest The safety vests are located in the storage compartments in the driver's and front passenger door. # Pull out the safety vest bag by the loop. # Open the safety vest bag and pull out the safety vest. % There are also safety vest compartments in the rear door storage compartments in which safety vests can be stored. 3 4 5 6 7 Do not bleach Do not iron Do not tumble dry Do not dry clean Class 2 safety vest Warning arning tr triangle iangle Removing emoving tthe he war warning ning triangle triangle The requirements de ned by the legal standard are only ful lled if the safety vest is the correct size and is fully closed. Replace the safety vest in the following cases: R The re ective strips are damaged or dirty R The maximum permissible number of washes is exceeded R The uorescence has faded # # 1 Maximum number of washes 2 Maximum wash temperature Push both sides of warning triangle holder 1 in the direction of the arrow and open it. Remove warning triangle 2. 290 Breakdown assistance Setting Se tting up the the w war arning ning triangle triangle First-aid irst-aid kit (so -sided) ov over erview view Flat tire Notes on at tir tires es & WARNING Risk of accident due to a at tire # # Fold side re ectors 1 upwards to form a triangle and attach at the top using upper pressstud 2. Fold legs 3 down and out to the side. First-aid kit (so sided) 1 is on the le or right in the trunk, depending on the vehicle version. % In vehicles with a Burmester® surround sound system, the rst-aid kit (so sided) is located in the trunk when the vehicle is delivered. A at tire severely a ects the driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking of the vehicle. Tires ires wit without hout run- at char haract acter eris istics: tics: # Do not drive with a at tire. # Change the at tire immediately with an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Tir ires es with with run- at char haract acter eris istics: tics: # Observe the information and warning notes on MOExtended tires (run- at tires). Breakdown assistance 291 In the event of a at tire, the following options are available depending on your vehicle's equipment: R Vehicles with with MOExtended MOExtended tires: tires: it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. Make sure you observe the notes on MOExtended tires (run- at tires) (/ page 291). R Vehicles with with a TIREFIT kit: you can repair the tire so that it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. To do this, use the TIREFIT kit (/ page 292). R Vehicles with with Mercedes Mercedes me connect: you can make a call for breakdown assistance via the overhead control panel in the case of a breakdown (/ page 256). R All v vehicles: ehicles: change the wheel (/ page 332). % The emergency spare wheel is only available in certain countries. Notes on MOExt MOExtended ended tires tires (r (runun- at tir tires) es) & WARNING Risk of accident when driving in limp-home mode When driving in emergency mode the handling characteristics are impaired. # Do not exceed the speci ed maximum speed of the MOExtended tires. # Avoid any abrupt steering and driving maneuvers as well as driving over obstacles (curbs, pot holes, o -road). This applies, in particular, to a loaded vehicle. # Stop driving in the emergency mode if you notice: R Banging noise R Vehicle vibration R Smoke which smells like rubber R Continuous ESP® intervention R Cracks in the tire side walls # A er driving in emergency mode, have the rims checked by a quali ed specialist # workshop with regard to their further use. The defective tire must be replaced in every case. With MOExtended tires (run- at tires), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. However, the tire a ected must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognize MOExtended tires by the MOExtended marking which appears on the side wall of the tire. Vehicles with with tir tiree pressur pressuree loss w war arning ning system: system: MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an activated tire pressure loss warning system. Vehicles with with tir tiree pressur pressuree monit monitor oring ing sy syst stem: em: MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an activated tire pressure monitoring system. If a pressure loss warning message appears in the driver's display, proceed as follows: R Check the tire for damage. 292 Breakdown assistance R If driving on, observe the following notes. You can use TIREFIT tire sealant to seal perforation damage of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire contact surface. You can use TIREFIT in outside temperatures down to -4 °F (-20 °C). Dr Driving iving distance distance possible in emergency emergency mode a er the pr pressur essuree loss war warning: ning: Load condition Dr Driving iving distance distance possible in emergency emergency mode Partially laden 50 miles (80 km) Fully laden 19 miles (30 km) The driving distance possible in emergency mode may vary depending on the driving style. Observe the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). If a tire has gone at and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tire, you can use a standard tire as a temporary measure. TIREFIT kit stor storag agee location The TIREFIT kit is located under the trunk oor. & WARNING Risk of accident when using tire sealant 1 Tire sealant bottle 2 Tire in ation compressor Depending on the model, the TIREFIT kit may also be located in other places under the trunk oor. Using the the TIREFIT kit Req equir uirements: ements: R Tire sealant bottle and tire in ation compressor (/ page 292) R TIREFIT sticker R Gloves The tire sealant may be unable to seal the tire properly, especially in the following cases: R There are large cuts or punctures in the tire (larger than damage previously mentioned) R The wheel rims have been damaged R A er journeys with very low tire pressure or with at tires # # Do not continue driving. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Breakdown assistance 293 & WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning from tire sealant The tire sealant is harmful and causes irritation. Do not allow it to come into contact with the skin, eyes or clothing, and do not swallow it. Do not inhale tire sealant fumes. Keep the tire sealant away from children. If you come into contact with the tire sealant, observe the following: # Rinse o the tire sealant from your skin immediately using water. # If tire sealant gets into your eyes, thoroughly rinse out the eyes using clean water. # If tire sealant has been swallowed, immediately rinse out the mouth thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention immediately. # Change out of any clothes contaminated with tire sealant immediately. # If allergic reactions occur, seek medical attention immediately. * NOTE Overheating due to the tire in ation compressor running too long # Do not run the tire in ation compressor for longer than ten minutes without interruption. # # A x part 1 of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's eld of vision. A x part 2 of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the faulty tire. Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker on the tire in ation compressor. Have the tire sealant bottle replaced in a quali ed specialist workshop every ve years. # Do not remove any foreign objects which have entered the tire. # Pull plug 4 with the cable and hose 5 out of the tire in ation compressor housing. 294 Breakdown assistance # # Push the plug of hose 5 into ange 6 of tire sealant bottle 1 until the plug engages. Place tire sealant bottle 1 head downwards into recess 2 of the tire in ation compressor. # Switch on the tire in ation compressor using On/O switch 3. The tire is in ated. First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The pressure may brie y rise to approximately 500 kPa (5.0 bar/73 psi). Do no nott switch switch o the tir tiree in ation com compr pressor essor dur during ing this this phase! # Let the tire in ation compressor run for a maximum of ten minutes. The tire should then have attained a tire pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi). # # # # Remove the valve cap from valve 7 on the faulty tire. Screw lling hose 8 onto valve 7. Insert plug 4 into a 12 V socket in your vehicle. Switch on the vehicle. If tire sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the a ected area as quickly as possible. It is preferable to use clean water. If you get tire sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethylene. If, a er ten minutes, minutes, a tire tire pressur pressuree of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not not been attained: attained: # Switch o the tire in ation compressor. # Unscrew the lling hose from the valve of the faulty tire. Please note that tire sealant may leak out when unscrewing the lling hose. # Drive forwards or in reverse very slowly for approximately 33 (10 m). # Pump up the tire again. A er a maximum of ten minutes the tire pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi). & WARNING Risk of accident due to the speci ed tire pressure not being achieved If the speci ed tire pressure is not achieved a er the speci ed time, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. The braking characteristics as well as the driving characteristics may be greatly impaired. # Do not continue driving. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. If, a er ten minut minutes, es, a tire tire pressur pressuree of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained: attained: # Switch o the tire in ation compressor. Breakdown assistance 295 # Unscrew the lling hose from the valve of the faulty tire. & WARNING Risk of accident from driving with sealed tires A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impairs the handling characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. # Adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. # Do not exceed the maximum speed limit with a tire that has been repaired using tire sealant. # Observe the maximum permissible speed for a tire sealed with tire sealant 50 mph (80 km/h). * NOTE Staining caused by leaking tire sealant A er use, excess tire sealant may leak out from the lling hose. # + Therefore, place the lling hose in the plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT kit. ENVIR ENVIRONMENT ONMENTAL AL NO NOTE TE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irresponsible disposal Tire sealant contains pollutants. # Have the tire sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. # # # Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire in ation compressor. Pull away immediately. Stop driving a er approximately ten minutes and check the tire pressure using the tire in ation compressor. The tire pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). & WARNING Risk of accident due to the speci ed tire pressure not being attained If the speci ed tire pressure is not reached, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired. # Do not continue driving. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. In cases such as the one mentioned above, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). # Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B‑pillar on the driver's side or the tire pressure table in the fuel ller ap for values. # To incr increase ease the the tir tiree pressur pressure: e: switch on the tire in ation compressor. 296 Breakdown assistance Batteryy (vehicle) Batter (vehicle) Notes on the the 12 V battery battery & WARNING Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the battery # # # # # To reduce reduce tthe he tire tire pressur pressure: e: press pressure release button 1 next to manometer 2. When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the lling hose from the valve of the sealed tire. Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the sealed tire. Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire in ation compressor. The lling hose stays on the tire sealant bottle. Drive to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop and have the tire, tire sealant bottle and lling hose replaced there. Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This can restrict functions relevant for safety systems and impair the operating safety of your vehicle. You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R When braking R In the event of abrupt steering maneuvers and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions # # # In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. Do not drive on. Always have work on the battery carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop. R R Further information on ABS (/ page 172) Further information on ESP® (/ page 172) For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by MercedesBenz. vehicles excep All vehicles exceptt vehicles vehicles with with a lithium-ion lithium-ion battery & WARNING Risk of explosion due to electrostatic charge Electrostatic charge can ignite the highly explosive gas mixture in the battery. # To discharge any electrostatic charge that may have built up, touch the metal vehicle body before handling the battery. The highly ammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and during starting assistance. Breakdown assistance 297 & WARNING Danger of chemical burns from the battery acid Battery acid is caustic. # Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. # Do not lean over the battery. # Do not inhale battery gases. # Keep children away from the battery. # Immediately rinse battery acid o thoroughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention immediately. All vehicles vehicles + ENVIRONMENT AL NO NOTE TE Environmental ENVIRONMENTAL damage due to improper disposal of batteries Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. # Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a quali ed specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. If you have to disconnect the 12 V battery, contact a quali ed specialist workshop. Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batteries. Risk of explosion. Fire, open ames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes o with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. Wear safety glasses. Keep children away. Observe this Operator's Manual. Observe the following if you do not intend to use the vehicle over an extended period of time: R Activate standby mode. R Alternatively: connect the battery to a battery charger approved by Mercedes-Benz or consult a quali ed specialist workshop to disconnect the battery. 298 Breakdown assistance Notes on star starting ting assist assistance ance and char charging ging tthe he 12 V batt battery ery All vehicles vehicles When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connection point in the engine compartment. * NOTE NOTE Damage to the battery from overvoltage When charging using a battery charger without a maximum charging voltage, the battery or the on-board electronics may be damaged. # Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. & WARNING Risk of explosion due to igniting hydrogen gas If there is a short circuit or sparks start to form when charging a battery, there is a danger of the hydrogen gas igniting. # # # # # # Take care that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. Never place metal objects or tools on a battery. When connecting and disconnecting the battery, always observe the sequence of battery terminals described. Always take care to connect only battery terminals of identical polarity when jump starting a vehicle. During starting assistance, it is essential to observe the sequence described for connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables. Do not connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. & WARNING Risk of explosion due to a mixture of explosive gases A mixture of explosive gases can escape from the battery during charging and jump starting. # # # Fire, open ames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoided. Make sure that there is su cient ventilation. Do not stand over the battery. & WARNING Risk of explosion from a frozen battery A discharged battery may freeze at temperatures slightly above or below freezing point. During starting assistance or battery charging, battery gas can be released. # Always allow a battery to thaw before charging it or performing starting assistance. If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be dramatically shortened. The starting char- Breakdown assistance 299 acteristics may be impaired, especially at low temperatures. It is recommended that you have a thawed battery checked at a quali ed specialist workshop. Vehicles with with plug-in hybr hybrid: id: If your vehicle has been started with starting assistance, it may not be possible to use the electric drive for approximately 30 minutes. Starting assistance is not considered to be a normal operating condition. All vvehicles ehicles * NOTE NOTE Damage caused by numerous or extended attempts to start the engine Numerous or extended attempts to start the engine may damage the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel. # Avoid numerous and extended attempts to start the engine. Observe the following points during starting assistance and when charging the battery: R Only use undamaged jumper cables/charging cables with a su cient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. R Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must not come into contact with other metal parts while the jumper cable/charging cable is connected to the battery/jump-start connection point. R The jumper cable/charging cable must not come into contact with any parts which may move when the engine is running. R Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. R Keep away from re and open ames. R Do not lean over the battery. Observe the additional following points when charging the battery: R Only use battery chargers tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery. Observe the additional following points during starting assistance: R Starting assistance may only be provided using vehicles, batteries or other jump start devices with a nominal voltage of 12 V. R The vehicles must not touch. R Vehicles wit withh a ggasoline asoline engine: Jump-start the vehicle only when the engine and exhaust system are cold. Star arting ting assistance assistance and cchar harging ging the the 12 V battery battery Req equir uirements: ements: R The vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake. R Vehicles with with automatic automatic transmission: transmission: The transmission is in position j. R The vehicle and all electrical consumers are switched o . R The hood is open. 300 Breakdown assistance # # # # # Example: engine compartment # # Slide cover 1 of positive contact 2 on the jump-starting connection point in the direction of the arrow. Connect positive contact 2 on your vehicle to the positive terminal of the donor battery using the jumper cable/charging cable. # Always begin with positive contact 2 on your own vehicle rst. During star During starting ting assistance: assistance: start the engine of the donor vehicle and run at idle speed. Connect the negative terminal of the donor battery and ground point 3 of your own vehicle by using the jumper cable/charging cable. Begin with the donor battery rst. During star During starting ting assistance: assistance: start the engine of your own vehicle. During the During the char charging ging pr process: ocess: start the charging process. During During star starting ting assistance: assistance: let the engines run for several minutes. During star During starting ting assistance: assistance: before disconnecting the jumper cable, switch on an electrical consumer on your own vehicle, e.g. the rear window heater or lighting. When the starting assistance/charging process is complete, perform the following steps: # First, remove the jumper cable/charging cable from ground point 3 and the negative termi- # nal of the donor battery, then from positive contact 2 and the positive terminal of the donor battery. Begin each time with the contacts on your own vehicle rst. A er removing the jumper cable/charging cable, close cover 1 of positive contact 2. Further information can be obtained at a quali ed specialist workshop. Replacing tthe he 12 V battery battery # Observe the notes on the 12 V battery (/ page 296). Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the 12 V battery replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Observe the following notes if you want to replace the battery yourself: R Always replace a faulty battery with a battery which meets the speci c vehicle requirements. Breakdown assistance 301 R R R The vehicle is equipped with an AGM technology battery (Absorbent Glass Mat) or a lithium-ion battery. Full vehicle functionality is only guaranteed with an AGM battery or lithium-ion battery. For safety reasons, MercedesBenz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Carry over detachable parts, such as vent hoses, elbow ttings or terminal covers from the battery being replaced. Make sure that the vent hose is always connected to the original opening on the side of the battery. Install any existing or supplied cell caps. Otherwise, gases or battery acid could escape. Make sure that detachable parts are reconnected in the same way. Tow st star arting ting or towing towing away Per ermitt mitted ed towing towing methods methods (non plug-in hhybr ybrid) id) * NOTE Damage from automatic braking If one of the following functions is switched on, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations: R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R HOLD function R Active Parking Assist To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situations: # During towing # In a car wash Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than towing it away. For towing, use a tow rope or tow bar with both axles on the ground. Do not use tow bar systems. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to towing away incorrectly # Observe the instructions and notes on towing away. Vehicles wit withh rear rear wheel drive drive Per ermitt mitted ed towing towing methods methods Both axles on the ground Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h) Front axle raised No Rear axle raised Yes, if the steering wheel is xed in the center position with a steering wheel lock 302 Breakdown assistance 4MATIC 4MA TIC vehicles vehicles R Permitt ermitted ed towing towing methods methods Both axles on the ground Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h) Front axle raised No Rear axle raised No To tow tow with with a raised raised axle: towing should be performed by a towing company. Towing tthe he vehicle vehicle with with bot bothh axles on the the gr ground ound # # Observe the notes on the permitted towing methods (/ page 301). Make sure that the battery is connected and charged. Observe the following points when the battery is discharged: R The engine cannot be started R The electric parking brake cannot be released or applied Vehicles with with automatic automatic transmission: transmission: The automatic transmission cannot be shi ed to position i or j % Vehicles with with automatic automatic transmission: transmission: If the automatic transmission cannot be shi ed to position i or if the display does not show anything, transport the vehicle (/ page 303). A towing vehicle with li ing equipment is required for vehicle transportation. * NOTE NOTE Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over long distances The drivetrain could be damaged when towing at excessively high speeds or over long distances. # A towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded. # A towing distance of 30 miles (50 km) must not be exceeded. & WARNING Risk of accident when towing a vehicle which is too heavy If the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away is heavier than the permissible gross mass of your vehicle, the following situations can occur: R The towing eye may become detached. R The vehicle/trailer combination may swerve or rollover. # Before tow-starting or towing away, check if the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away exceeds the permissible gross mass. If a vehicle must be tow-started or towed away, its permissible gross mass must not exceed the permissible gross mass of the towing vehicle. # Information on the permissible gross mass of the vehicle can be found on the vehicle identication plate (/ page 343). # Vehicles wit withh aut automatic omatic transmission: transmission: Do not open the driver's door or front passenger Breakdown assistance 303 # # door; the automatic transmission otherwise automatically shi s to position j. Install the towing eye (/ page 305). Fasten the towing device. * NOTE Damage due to incorrect connection of the tow bar # # # # # # # Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes. Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism (/ page 70). Do not activate the HOLD function. Deactivate the tow-away alarm (/ page 87). Deactivate Active Brake Assist (/ page 194). Vehicles with with automatic automatic transmission: transmission: Shi the automatic transmission to position i. Release the electric parking brake. & WARNING Risk of accident due to limited safety-related functions during the towing process Safety-related functions are limited or no longer available in the following situations: R The vehicle is switched o . R The brake system or power steering system is malfunctioning. R The energy supply or the on-board electrical system is malfunctioning. When your vehicle is towed away, signi cantly more e ort may be required to steer and brake than is normally required. # Use a tow bar. # Make sure that the steering wheel can move freely before towing the vehicle away. * NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive power If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the vehicles could be damaged. # Pull away slowly and smoothly. Loading the the vvehicle ehicle for for tr transport ansport # # # Observe the notes on towing away (/ page 302). Connect the towing device to the towing eye in order to load the vehicle. Vehicles wit withh automatic automatic transmission: transmission: Shi the automatic transmission to position i. % Vehicles with with aut automatic omatic transmission: transmission: The automatic transmission may be locked in position j in the event of damage to the electrical system. To shi to i, provide the onboard electrical system with power (/ page 299). # Load the vehicle onto the transporter. 304 Breakdown assistance # # # Vehicles with with aut automatic omatic tr transmission: ansmission: Shi the automatic transmission to position j. Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away. Only secure the vehicle by the wheels. Vehicles with with ADS PL PLUS US (Adap (Adaptiv tivee Damping Damping SysSystem PLUS) PLUS) & WARNING Risk of an accident when transporting vehicles with Adaptive Damping System PLUS When transporting vehicles with Adaptive Damping System PLUS, the vehicle/trailer combination may begin to rock and start to skid. # Load the vehicle correctly onto the transporter. # Secure the vehicle on all four wheels with suitable tensioning straps. # Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 35 mph (60 km/h) when transporting. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle from securing it incorrectly # # # A er loading, the vehicle must be secured on all four wheels. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. A minimum distance of 8 in (20 cm) upwards and 4 in (10 cm) downwards must be kept to the transport platform. Secure the vehicle on all four wheels a er loading. 4MATIC 4MATIC vehicles/v vehicles/vehicles ehicles with with aut automatic omatic transtransmission # Make sure that the front and rear axles come to rest on the same transportation vehicle. * NOTE Damage to the drive train due to incorrect positioning of the vehicle # Do not position the vehicle above the connection point of the transport vehicle. Towing eye eye st stor orag agee location The towing eye is located in the stowage space under the trunk oor. Breakdown assistance 305 Installing Inst alling and remo removing ving the the towing towing eye * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the towing eye or trailer hitch When a towing eye or trailer hitch is used to recover a vehicle, the vehicle may be damaged in the process. # Only use the towing eye or trailer hitch to tow away or tow start the vehicle. # Do not use the towing eye or trailer hitch to tow the vehicle during recovery. Tow -st -star arting ting the the vehicle vehicle Vehicles with with aut automatic omatic transmission transmission # # # Press the mark on cover 1 inwards and remove. Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten. Make sure that cover 1 engages in the bumper when you remove the towing eye. * NOTE NOTE Damage to the automatic transmission due to tow starting The automatic transmission may be damaged in the process of tow starting vehicles with automatic transmission. # Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow started. # Vehicles with an automatic transmission must not be tow-started. Electrical fuses Electrical Notes on electr electrical ical fuses & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric line could be overloaded. This could result in a re. # Always replace faulty fuses with specied new fuses containing the correct amperage. * NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses Electrical components or systems may be damaged by incorrect fuses, or their functionality may be signi cantly impaired. 306 Breakdown assistance # Only use fuses that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz and which have the correct fuse rating. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and the label. The fuse ratings and further information to be observed can be found in the fuse assignment diagram. Fuse assignment diagram: diagram: on the fuse box in the trunk (/ page 308). * NO NOTE TE Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to malfunction. # When the fuse box is open, make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box. # When closing the fuse box, make sure that the seal of the lid is positioned correctly on the fuse box. If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and recti ed at a quali ed specialist workshop. Ensure the following before replacing a fuse: R The vehicle is secured against rolling away. R All electrical consumers are switched o . R The vehicle is switched o . The electrical fuses are located in various fuse boxes: R Fuse box in the engine compartment on the driver's side (/ page 306) R Fuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit (/ page 307) R Fuse box in the front passenger footwell (/ page 307) R Fuse box in the trunk on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel (/ page 308) Opening and closing the the fuse bo boxx in the the engine compar compartment tment Req equir uirements: ements: R A dry cloth and a screwdriver are available. Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 305). Opening & WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers when the hood is open If the windshield wipers start moving when the hood is open, you could be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch o the windshield wipers and the vehicle rst if you need to open the hood. Breakdown assistance 307 # # # # # Insert lid 3 into the bracket at the rear of the fuse box. Fold down lid 3 of the fuse box and tighten screws 4. Insert cover 1 on both sides. Turn clips 2 on cover 1 a quarter-turn clockwise. Close the hood. Opening and closing the the fuse bo boxx in the the coc cockpit kpit R # # Turn clips 2 on cover 1 a quarter-turn to counter-clockwise. Pull cover 1 upwards in the direction of the arrow. # # Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth. Loosen screws 4 and remove fuse box lid 3 from the top. Closing Check whether the seal is positioned correctly in cap 3. # Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 305). The fuse box is on the driver's side on the side of the cockpit under a cover. # To open and close it, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Opening and closing the the fuse bo boxx in the the fr front ont passenger passenger foo footw twell ell Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 305). 308 Breakdown assistance # Fold cover 1 down in the direction of the arrow. The fuse assignment diagram is in a recess on the side of the fuse box. # # To open: open cover 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove it. To close: reinsert cover 1. Opening and closing the the fuse bo boxx in the the tr trunk unk Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 305). Wheels and tires 309 Notes on noise or unusual handling cchar haract acter erisistics Make sure there are no vibrations, noises or unusual handling characteristics when the vehicle is in motion. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. Hidden tire damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you suspect that a tire is malfunctioning, reduce your speed immediately and have the tires and wheels checked at a quali ed specialist workshop. Notes on regularl regularlyy inspecting wheels and tires tires & WARNING Risk of injury through damaged tires Damaged tires can cause tire pressure loss. # Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately. & WARNING Risk of hydroplaning due to insu cient tire tread Insu cient tire tread will result in reduced tire grip. In heavy rain or slush the risk of hydroplaning is increased, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the conditions. # Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tires. R R R Visually inspect wheels and tires for damage. Check the valve caps. Visual check of the tire tread depth and the tire contact surface across the entire width. The minimum tread depth for summer tires is â in (3 mm) and for winter tires ã in (4 mm). Minimum tread depth for: Summer tires: â in (3 mm) R M+S tires: ãin (4 mm) R # For safety reasons, replace the tires before the legally-prescribed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached. Carry out the following checks on all wheels regularly, at least once a month or as required, for example, prior to a long journey or driving o road: R Check the tire pressure (/ page 310). Six marks 1 show where the bar indicators (arrow) are integrated into the tire tread. They are visible once a tire tread depth of approximately á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. 310 Wheels and tires Notes on sno snow w chains chains & WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrectly installed snow chains If you have installed snow chains on the front wheels, they may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. # Never install snow chains on the front wheels. # Only install snow chains on the rear wheels in pairs. * NOTE Damage to components of the vehicle body or chassis due to mounted snow chains If you mount snow chains to the front wheels of 4MATIC vehicles, you may damage components of the vehicle body or chassis. # Only mount snow chains to the rear wheels of 4MATIC vehicles. Observe the following notes when using snow chains: R Snow chains are only permissible for certain wheel/tire combinations. You can obtain information about this from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that have been speci cally approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with the same quality standard. R If snow chains are installed, the maximum permissible speed is 30 mph (50 km/h). R Vehicles with with Activ Activee P Par arking king Assist Assist:: Do not use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are installed. R Vehicles with with level level control: control: If snow chains are installed, only drive at raised vehicle level (/ page 205). % You can deactivate ESP® to pull away (/ page 174). This allows the wheels to spin, achieving an increased driving force. Tir iree pr pressure essure Notes on tire tire pr pressure essure & WARNING Risk of accident due to insu cient or excessive tire pressure Underin ated or overin ated tires pose in particular the following risks: R The tires can burst. R The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired. # R R R Comply with the recommended tire pressures and check the tire pressure of all tires, including the spare wheel, regularly: Monthly When the load changes Before embarking on a longer journey Wheels and tires 311 R # If operating conditions change, e.g. o road driving Adjust the tire pressure, if necessary. Tire pressure which is too high or too low can: R Shorten the service life of the tires. R Cause increased tire damage. R Adversely a ect driving characteristics and thus driving safety, e.g. due to hydroplaning. & WARNING Risk of accident due to too low a tire pressure Tires with pressure that is too low can overheat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also su er from irregular wear, which can signi cantly impair the braking properties and the handling characteristics. # Avoid excessively low tire pressure. Tire pressure which is too low can cause: R Tire malfunctions as a result of overheating R R R Impaired handling characteristics Irregular wear Increased fuel consumption & WARNING Risk of accident due to too high a tire pressure Tires with excessively high pressure can burst. In addition, they also su er from irregular wear, which can signi cantly impair the braking properties and the handling characteristics. # Avoid excessively high tire pressures. Tire pressure which is too high can cause: Increased braking distance R Impaired handling characteristics R Irregular wear R Impaired driving comfort R Susceptibility to damage R & WARNING Risk of accident due to repeated pressure drop in the tires The wheels, valves or tires could be damaged. Too low a tire pressure can lead to the tires bursting. # Examine the tires for foreign objects. # Check whether the tire has a puncture or the valve has a leak. # If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a quali ed specialist workshop. You can nd information on tire pressure for the vehicle's factory-installed tires on the following labels: R Tire and Loading Information placard on the B‑pillar of your vehicle (/ page 316). R Tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel ller ap (/ page 312). Observe the maximum tire pressure (/ page 323). Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not 312 Wheels and tires permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure. Only correct tire pressure when the tires are cold. Conditions for cold tires: R The vehicle has been parked with the tires out of direct sunlight for at least three hours. R The vehicle has traveled less than 1 mile (1.6 km). The vehicle's tires heat up when driving. As the temperature of the tires increases, so too does the tire pressure. Vehicles with with a tire tire pressur pressuree monitor monitoring ing system: system: You can also check the tire pressure using the onboard computer. The tire pressure recommended for increased load/speed in the tire pressure table can a ect the ride comfort. & WARNING Risk of accident due to unsuitable accessories on tire valves If you mount unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. # Only screw standard valve caps or valve caps speci cally approved by MercedesBenz for your vehicle onto the tire valve. Tir iree pressur pressuree table table The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel ller ap. % The data shown in the images is example data. If one or more tire sizes precede a tire pressure, the following tire pressure information is only valid for those tire sizes and their respective load condition. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are de ned in the table for di erent numbers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may di er from this. Wheels and tires 313 Some tire pressure tables only show the rim diameter instead of the complete tire size, e.g. R18. R18 The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire side wall (/ page 324). R Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 316) R Maximum tire pressure (/ page 323) Checking Chec king tthe he tir tiree pressur pressuree manually # # # # # Read the tire pressure recommended for the current operating conditions from the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pressure table. Observe the notes on tire pressure. Remove the valve cap of the tire to be checked. Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve. Read the tire pressure. If the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value, increase the tire pressure to the recommended value. If the tire pressure is higher than the recommended value, release air. To do so, press down the metal pin in the valve, e.g. using the tip of a pen. Then, check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure gauge. # Screw the valve cap onto the valve. Further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 310) R Tire pressure table (/ page 312) R Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 316) # Tire ire pressur pressuree monit monitor oring ing system system Function of tthe he tir tiree pressur pressuree monitor monitoring ing system system & DAN ANGER GER Risk of accident due to incorrect tire pressure Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and in ated to the in ation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire in ation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a di erent size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire in ation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire in ation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is signi cantly under-in ated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and in ate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signi cantly under-in ated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-in ation also reduces fuel e ciency and tire tread life, and may a ect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-in ation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. 314 Wheels and tires Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will ash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. The system checks the tire pressure and the tire temperature of the tires installed on the vehicle by means of a tire pressure sensor. The tire pressure and the tire temperature appear in the on-board computer (/ page 314). If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the tire temperature is excessive, you will be warned with display messages (/ page 398) or the h warning lamp in the instrument cluster (/ page 420). The tire pressure monitoring system is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure suitable for the operating situation. In most cases, the tire pressure monitoring system will automatically update the new reference values a er you have changed the tire pressure. You can, however, also update the reference values by restarting the tire pressure monitoring system manually (/ page 315). System System limits The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R Incorrect reference values were taught in R Sudden pressure loss caused by a foreign object penetrating the tire, for example R There is a malfunction caused by another radio signal source Checking the tir tiree pressur pressuree with with the the tir tiree pressure pressure Checking the monit monitor oring ing system system Requir equirements: ements: The vehicle is switched on. R On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tires One of the following displays appears: R Current tire pressure and tire temperature of the individual wheels: R Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes Wheels and tires 315 R Tire Pressure Monitor Active: the teach-in process of the system is not yet complete. The tire pressures are already being monitored. Compare the tire pressure with the recommended tire pressure for the current operating condition (/ page 312). Additionally, observe the notes on cold tires (/ page 310). % The values displayed in the on-board computer may deviate from those of the tire pressure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high elevations, the tire pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressure. # Rest estar arting ting tthe he tire tire pressur pressuree monit monitor oring ing system system equir uirements: ements: Req R The recommended tire pressure is correctly set for the respective operating status on all of the wheels (/ page 310). Restart the tire pressure monitoring system in the following situations: R The tire pressure has changed. R The wheels or tires have been changed or newly installed. On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tires # Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the le -hand side of the steering wheel. The Use Current Pressures as New Reference Values message is shown in the Instrument Display. # To restart, press Touch Control on the le hand side of the steering wheel. The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message is shown in the Instrument Display. Current warning messages are deleted and the yellow h warning lamp goes out. A er you have been driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tire pressures are within the speci ed range. The current tire pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored. Be sure to also pay attention to the following related topic: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 310) Tire ire pr pressur essuree loss w war arning ning syst system em Function of the the tire tire pressur pressuree loss war warning ning syst system em The tire pressure loss warning system warns the driver by means of display messages when there is a severe tire pressure loss. System System limits The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R Incorrect reference values were taught in R Sudden pressure loss caused by a foreign object penetrating the tire, for example R An even pressure loss on more than one tire occurs The system has a restricted or delayed function particularly in the following situations: R Poor ground conditions, e.g. snow or gravel R Driving with snow chains R When adopting a very sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or sudden acceleration R Driving with a high load 316 Wheels and tires The tire pressure loss warning system is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure suitable for the operating situation and to check it. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 310) R Display messages about the tires (/ page 398) Restar estarting ting tthe he tir tiree pr pressur essuree loss war warning ning system system Requir equirements: ements: The recommended tire pressure is correctly set for the respective operating status on all wheels. R Restart the tire pressure loss warning system in the following situations: R The tire pressure has changed. R The wheels or tires have been changed or newly installed. On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tires # Swipe downwards on the Touch Control on the le -hand side of the steering wheel. The Tire Pressure Control System Active Restart message is shown in the display. # To begin restart, press the Touch Control on the le -hand side of the steering wheel. The Tire Pressure Now OK? message is shown in the display. # Select Yes. # To con rm restart, press the Touch Control on the le -hand side of the steering wheel. The Run Flat Indicator Restarted message is shown in the display. A er you have driven for a few minutes, the tire pressure loss warning system monitors the set tire pressures of all the tires. Be sure to also pay attention to the following related topic: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 310) Loading the the vvehicle ehicle Notes on Tir Tiree and Loading Infor Information mation placard & WARNING Risk of accident from overloaded tires Overloaded tires may overheat and burst as a consequence. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and handling characteristics and lead to brake failure. # Observe the load rating of the tires. # The load rating must be at least half the permissible axle load of the vehicle. # Never overload the tires by exceeding the maximum load. The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle. Wheels and tires 317 R R Maximum permissible load 3 comprises the gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load and luggage. Recommended tire pressure 1 for cold tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed. Please also note: R Information on permissible weights and loads on the vehicle identi cation plate (/ page 343). R Information on tire pressure in the tire pressure table (/ page 312). 1 Tire and Loading Information placard % The data shown in the illustration is example data. The Tire and Loading Information placard shows the following information: R Maximum number of seats 2 according to the maximum number of people permitted to travel in the vehicle. Further related subjects: Determining the maximum permissible load (/ page 317) R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 310). R Steps for for Deter Determining mining Correct Correct Load Limit The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575, pursuant to 318 Wheels and tires the "National Tra c and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". # (1): Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard. # (2): Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. # (3): Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. # (4): The resulting gure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be ve 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.) # (5): Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the availa- # ble cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. (6): If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. % Not all vehicles are permitted to tow a trailer. Towing a trailer is only permitted if a trailerhitch is installed. Please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealer if you have any questions about towing a trailer with your vehicle. Even if you have calculated the total load carefully, you should still make sure that the maximum permissible gross weight and the maximum gross axle weight rating of your vehicle are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehicle identi cation plate. # Have your loaded vehicle – including driver, occupants and load – weighed on a vehicle weighbridge. The measured values may not exceed the maximum permissible values stated on the vehicle identi cation plate. Further related subjects: Calculation example for determining the maximum load (/ page 318) R Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 316) R Tire pressure table (/ page 312) R Vehicle identi cation plate (/ page 343) R Calculation exam example ple for for deter determining mining tthe he maximum load The following table shows examples of how to calculate total and load capacities with varying seating con gurations and di erent numbers and sizes of occupants. The following examples use a maximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for for illus illustr tration ation purposes purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 316). The higher the weight of all the occupants, the smaller the maximum load for luggage. Wheels and tires 319 Step 1 Exam Ex ample ple 1 Exam Ex ample ple 2 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) Exam Ex ample ple 1 Exam Ex ample ple 2 Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants) 5 1 Distribution of the occupants Front: 2 Rear: 3 Front: 1 Weight of occupants Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg) Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg) Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg) Total weight of all occupants 750 lbs (340 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) Combined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard) Step 2 320 Wheels and tires Step 3 Permissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants) Exam Ex ample ple 1 Exam Example ple 2 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 200 lbs (91 kg) = 1300 lbs (589 kg) Wheels and tires 321 Tir iree labeling Overvie Over view w of tire tire labeling 5 Manufacturer 6 Tire characteristics (/ page 324) 7 Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating and load index (/ page 324) 8 Tire name % The data shown in the illustration is example data. Tir iree Quality Grading Grading In accordance with the US Department of Transportation's "Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards", tire manufacturers are required to grade their tires on the basis of the following three performance factors: 1 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards 2 DOT (Department of Transportation), (TIN) Tire Identi cation Number 3 Maximum tire load (/ page 323) 4 Maximum tire pressure (/ page 323) 1 Tread wear grade 2 Traction grade 3 Temperature grade % The data shown in the illustration is example data. % The classi cation is not legally stipulated for Canada, but it is generally stated. Tread wear wear grade grade The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a speci ed government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1\1/2\) times as 322 Wheels and tires well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart signi cantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. grade ade Traction gr & DAN ANGER GER Risk of accident due to inadequate traction The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests. # Always adapt your driving style and drive at a speed to suit the prevailing tra c and weather conditions. * NOTE Damage to the drivetrain from wheelspin # Avoid wheelspin. The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on speci ed government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. emperatur aturee grade grade Temper & WARNING Risk of accident from tire overheating and tire failure Excessive speed, underin ation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure. # Observe the recommended tire pressure. # Regularly check the pressure of all the tires. # Adjust the tire pressure, if necessary. The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a speci ed indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. DOT,, TTir DOT iree Identi cation Number (TIN) US tire regulations stipulate that every tire manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the side wall of each tire produced. Wheels and tires 323 % The data shown in the image is example data. The TIN is a unique identi cation number to identify tires and comprises the following: R DO DOTT (Depar (Department tment of Tr Transport ansportation): ation): tire symbol marks 1 indicating that the tire complies with the requirements of the US Department of Transportation. R Manuf Manufactur acturer er identi cation code: manufacturer identi cation code 2 contains details of the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. Further information on retreaded tires (/ page 328). R Tir iree size: identi er 3 describes the tire size. R Tir iree type code: tire type code 4 can be used by the manufacturer as a code to describe speci c characteristics of the tire. R Manufactur Manufacturing ing date: date: manufacturing date 5 provides information about the age of a tire. The 1st and 2nd positions represent the calendar week and the 3rd and 4th positions state the year of manufacture (e.g. "3208" represents the 32nd week of 2008). Infor Inf ormation mation on the the maximum tir tiree load Speci cations for maximum tir tiree pressure pressure % The data shown in the image is example data. Maximum tire load 1 is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specied load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (/ page 316). % The data shown in the illustration is example data. Never exceed maximum tire pressure 1 specied for the tire. Always observe the recommended tire pressure for your vehicle when adjusting the tire pressure (/ page 312). 324 Wheels and tires Infor Inf ormation mation on tire tire char charact acter eris istics tics Tir iree size designation, load-bearing load-bearing capacity, capacity, speed rating and load index & WARNING Risk of injury through exceeding the speci ed tire load-bearing capacity or the permissible speed rating % The data shown in the image is example data. This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in side wall 1 and under tire tread 2. Exceeding the speci ed tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire damage and to the tires bursting. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. # Observe the tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 First letter(s) Nominal tire width in millimeters Aspect ratio in % Tire code Rim diameter Load-bearing index Speed rating Load index % The data shown in the illustration is example data. Information about reading tire data can be obtained from any quali ed specialist workshop. Wheels and tires 325 First irst lett letter(s) er(s) 1: R Without: passenger vehicle tires according to European manufacturing standards. R "P": passenger vehicle tires according to US manufacturing standards. R "LT": light truck tires according to US manufacturing standards. R "T": compact emergency spare wheels with high tire pressure that are only designed for temporary use in an emergency. atio 3: Aspect rratio Ratio between tire height and tire width in percent (tire height divided by tire width). iree code 4 (tire (tire type): Tir R "R" radial tire R "D": bias ply tire R "B": bias belted tires R "ZR": radial tire with a maximum speed above 149 mph (240 km/h) (optional) Rim diameter diameter 5: The diameter of the bead seat (not the diameter of the rim ange). The rim diameter is speci ed in inches (in). Load-bearing index Load-bearing index 6: Numerical code that speci es the maximum loadbearing capacity of a tire (e.g. "91" corresponds to 1356 lbs (615 kg)). The load-bearing capacity of the tire must be at least half the gross axle weight rating of your vehicle. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the speci ed load limit. See also: R Maximum permissible load on the Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 316) R Maximum tire load (/ page 323) R Load index Speed rating rating 7: Speci es the approved maximum speed of the tire. % An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating. You can obtain information on the required speed rating from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. tires Summer tires Index Speed rating rating Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) W up to 168 mph (270 km/h) Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) 326 Wheels and tires Index Speed rrating ating ZR...Y1 up to 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR...(..Y)1 over 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR1 over 149 mph (240 km/h) R R R 1 2 Specifying the speed rating as the "ZR" index in tire code 4 is optional for tires up to 186 mph (300 km/h). If your tire code 4 includes "ZR" and there is no speed rating 7, nd out what the maximum speed is from the tire manufacturer. If load-bearing index 6 and speed rating 7 are in brackets, the maximum speed rating of your tire is above 186 mph (300 km/h). To nd out the maximum speed, ask the tire manufacturer. "ZR" stated in the tire code. Or "M+Si" for winter tires. All-weather All-weat her tires tires and winter winter tires tires Index Speed rating rating M+S2 up to 100 mph (160 km/h) T M+S2 up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H M+S2 up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V M+S2 up to 149 mph (240 km/h) Q Winter tires bear the i snow ake symbol and ful ll the requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow. index 8: Load index R No speci cation given: standard load (SL) tire R "XL" or "Extra Load": extra load tire or reinforced tire R "Light Load": light load tire R "C", "D", "E": a load range that depends on the maximum load that the tire can carry at a certain pressure De nition of ter terms ms for for tir tires es and loading Tir iree str structur ucturee and char charact acter eris istics: tics: describes the number of layers or the number of rubber-coated belts in the tire contact surface and the tire wall. These are made of steel, nylon, polyester and other materials. Bar: metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascal (kPa) is the equivalent of one bar. DOT (Department tment of Transport Transportation): ation): DOT-marked DOT (Depar tires ful ll the requirements of the US Department of Transportation. Aver agee w weight eight of the the vvehicle ehicle occupants: the Averag number of vehicle occupants for which the vehicle is designed, multiplied by 150 lb (68 kg). Unif nifor orm m TTir iree Quality Grading Grading Standar Standards: ds: a uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regard Wheels and tires 327 to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. The quality grading assessment is made by the manufacturer following speci cations from the U.S. government. The quality grade of a tire is imprinted on the side wall of the tire. Recommended tir tiree pr pressur essure: e: the recommended tire pressure is the tire pressure speci ed for the tires mounted to the vehicle at the factory. The tire and information table contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires, the maximum permissible load and the maximum permissible vehicle speed. The tire pressure table contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires under various operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed of the vehicle. Increased vehicle weight weight due to to optional optional eq equipuipIncreased vehicle ment: the combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not. Rim: the part of the wheel on which the tire is installed. GAWR (Gr (Gross oss Axle Weight Weight Rating): Rating): the GAWR is the maximum permissible axle load. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identi cation plate on the B‑pillar on the driver's side. Speed rating: rating: the speed rating is part of the tire identi cation. It speci es the speed range for which a tire is approved. GVW (Gross (Gross Vehicle Vehicle Weight): Weight): the gross vehicle weight comprises the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accessories installed, occupants, luggage and the trailer drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as speci ed on the vehicle identi cation plate on the B‑pillar on the driver's side. GVWR (Gross (Gross Vehicle Vehicle W Weight eight Rating): Rating): the GVWR is the maximum permitted gross weight of the fully laden vehicle (weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, luggage and the trailer drawbar noseweight if applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is speci ed on the vehicle identi cation plate on the B‑pillar on the driver's side. weight of the Maximum weight the laden vvehicle: ehicle: the maximum weight is the sum of the curb weight of the vehicle, the weight of the accessories, the maximum load and the weight of optional equipment installed at the factory. Kilopascal (kPa): (kPa): metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascal (kPa) equals 1 bar. Load index: index: in addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be imprinted on the side wall of the tire. This speci es the load-bearing capacity of the tire more precisely. Curb weight: weight: the weight of a vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air conditioning system and optional equipment if these are installed on the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage. Maximum tire tire load: the maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is approved. permissible tire Maximum permissible tire pressur pressure: e: maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire. 328 Wheels and tires Maximum load on one tire: tire: maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by two. PSI (pounds per squar inch): standard unit of squaree inch): measurement for tire pressure. atio: ratio between tire height and tire Aspect rratio: width in percent. Tire ire pressur pressure: e: pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to every square inch of the tire. The tire pressure is speci ed in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascals (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold. Cold tire pressure: e: the tires are cold when the tire pressur vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours without direct sunlight on the tires or the vehicle has been driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Tir iree cont contact act surface: surface: the part of the tire that comes into contact with the road. Tir iree bead: the purpose of the tire bead is to ensure that the tire sits securely on the wheel rim. There are several wire cores in the tire bead to prevent the tire from changing length on the wheel rim. wall: the part of the tire between the tread Side wall: and the tire bead. Weight of optional optional equipment: equipment: the combined weight of the optional equipment weighing more than the replaced standard parts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). This optional equipment, such as high-performance brakes, level control system, a roof luggage rack or high-performance batteries, is not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories. (Tiree Identi cation Number): a unique identi TIN (Tir cation number which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example, in a product recall, and thus identify the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date. Load-bearing ing inde index: x: the load-bearing index is a Load-bear code that contains the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Traction: action: traction is the grip resulting from friction Tr between the tires and the road surface. Wear indicator: indicator: narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire contact surface. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of 1/16 in (1.6 mm) has been reached. Distr ibution of vehicle vehicle occupants: distribution of Distribution vehicle occupants over designated seat positions in a vehicle. permissible missible pay payload load weight: weight: nominal Maximum per load and luggage load plus 150 lb (68 kg) multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle. Changing a wheel Notes on selecting, installing installing and replacing replacing tir tires es * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. & WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect wheel and tire dimensions If wheels and tires of the wrong size are installed, the service brakes or components in the Wheels and tires 329 brake system and in the wheel suspension may be damaged. # Always replace wheels and tires with ones that ful ll the speci cations of the original part. For wheels, pay attention to the following: R Designation R Type For tires, pay attention to the following: R Designation R Manufacturer R Type & WARNING Risk of injury through exceeding the speci ed tire load-bearing capacity or the permissible speed rating Exceeding the speci ed tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire damage and to the tires bursting. # # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. * NOTE Vehicle and tire damage through tire types and sizes that have not been approved For safety reasons, only use tires, wheels and accessories which have been specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. These tires are specially adapted to the active safety systems, such as ABS, ESP® and 4MATIC, and marked as follows: R MO = Mercedes-Benz Original R MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (run- at tire only for certain wheels) R MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tires) Otherwise, certain properties, such as handling characteristics, vehicle noise emissions, consumption, etc. could be adversely a ec- ted. Furthermore, other tire sizes could result in the tires rubbing against the body and axle components when loaded. This could result in damage to the tire or the vehicle. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been checked and recommended by Mercedes-Benz. * NOTE Risk to driving safety from retreaded tires Retreaded tires are neither tested nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tires. For this reason driving safety cannot be guaranteed. # Do not use used tires if you have no information about their previous usage. 330 Wheels and tires * NOTE Possible wheel and tire damage when driving over obstacles Large wheels have a smaller section width. As the section width decreases, the risk of wheels and tires being damaged when driving over obstacles increases. # Avoid obstacles or drive especially carefully. # Reduce your speed when driving over curbs, speed bumps, manhole covers and potholes. # Avoid particularly high curbs. * NOTE Possible wheel and tire damage when parking on curbs or in potholes Parking on curbs or in potholes may damage the wheels and tires. # If possible, park only on at surfaces. # Avoid curbs and potholes when parking. * NOTE Damage to electronic component parts from the use of tire-mounting tools Vehicles wit withh a tire tire pr pressur essuree monit monitor oring ing syssystem: Electronic component parts are located in the wheel. Tire-mounting tools should not be used in the area of the valve. This could otherwise damage the electronic component parts. # Have the tires changed at a quali ed specialist workshop only. * NOTE Damage to summer tires at low ambient temperatures At low ambient temperatures, tears could form when driving with summer tires, causing permanent damage to the tires. # At temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C) use i M+S tires. Accessory parts which are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which are not used correctly, can impair the operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a quali ed specialist workshop and inquire about: R Suitability R Legal stipulations R Factory recommendations & WARNING Risk of accident with high performance tires The special tire tread in combination with the optimized tire compound means that the risk of skidding and hydroplaning on wet roads is increased. In addition, the tire grip is greatly reduced at a low outside temperature and tire running temperature. # Switch on the ESP® and adapt your driving style accordingly. # Use i M+S tires at outside temperatures of less than 50 °F (10 °C). # Only use the tires for their intended purpose. Wheels and tires 331 Observe the following when selecting, installing and replacing tires: R Furthermore, the use of certain tire types in certain regions and areas of operation can be highly bene cial. R Only use tires and wheels of the same type (summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires) and the same make. R Only install wheels of the same size on one axle (le and right). It is only permissible to install a di erent wheel size in the event of a at tire in order to drive to the specialist workshop. R Vehicles with with a tire tire pressur pressuree monitor monitoring ing sy sysstem: All installed wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors for the tire pressure monitoring system. R At temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C) use winter tires or all-season tires marked i M+S for all wheels. Winter tires provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. R R R R R For M+S tires, only use tires with the same tread. Observe the maximum permissible speed for the M+S tires installed. If the tire's maximum speed is below that of the vehicle, this must be indicated by an appropriate label in the driver's eld of vision. Break in new tires at moderate speeds for the rst 60 miles (100 km). Replace the tires a er six years at the latest, regardless of wear. eplacing with with tires tires that that do not not featur featuree When rreplacing run- at char haract acter eris istics: tics: vehicles with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle with a TIREFIT kit a er replacing with tires that do not feature run- at characteristics, e.g. winter tires. For more information on wheels and tires, contact a quali ed specialist workshop. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 310) R R R R Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 316) Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating and load index (/ page 324) Tire pressure table (/ page 312) Notes on the emergency spare wheel (/ page 338) Notes on rot rotating ating the the wheels & WARNING Risk of injury through di erent wheel sizes Rotating the front and rear wheels can severely impair the driving characteristics. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. # Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tires are of the same dimensions. The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels di er: R Front wheels wear more on the tire shoulder 332 Wheels and tires R Rear wheels wear more in the center of the tire Do not drive with tires that have too little tread depth. This signi cantly reduces traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your vehicle documents. If this is not available, rotate the tires every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km), depending on the wear. Ensure that the direction of rotation is maintained. Observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" when doing so (/ page 332). Notes on stor storing ing wheels When storing wheels, observe the following notes: R A er removing wheels, store them in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. R Protect the tires from contact with oil, grease or fuel. Over Ov ervie view w of tthe he tire-c tire-chang hangee tool tool kit * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # % Depending on the model, the tire change tool kit may be located at other positions under the trunk oor. Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. Apart from some country-speci c variants, vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. For more information on which tire-changing tools are required and approved for performing a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a quali ed specialist workshop. You require the following tools, for example, to change a wheel: R Jack R Chock R Lug wrench R Alignment bolt The tire-change tool kit is located under the trunk oor. 1 2 3 4 5 Jack Lug wrench Alignment bolt Folding chock Ratchet for jack Prepar Pr eparing ing the the vvehicle ehicle for for a wheel cchange hange Req equir uirements: ements: R The vehicle is not on a slope. Wheels and tires 333 R R The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level ground. The required tire-change tool kit is available. % If your vehicle is not equipped with the tirechange tool kit, consult a quali ed specialist workshop to nd out about suitable tools. # Apply the electric parking brake manually. # Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead position. # Shi the transmission to position j. # Vehicles with with level level contr control ol syst system: em: Set the normal vehicle level (/ page 205). # Switch o the vehicle. # Make sure that the vehicle cannot be started. # Place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change. # If necessary, remove the wheel trim/hub caps (/ page 333). # Raise the vehicle (/ page 334). Removing emoving and inst installing alling the the wheel tr trim/hub im/hub caps Aluminum hub cap Requir equirements: ements: R The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change (/ page 332). Plastic tic hub cap Plas # To remov remove: e: turn the center cover of the hub cap counter-clockwise and remove the hub cap. # To install: install: make sure that the center cover of the hub cap is turned counter-clockwise. # Position the hub cap and turn the center cover clockwise until the hub cap engages physically and audibly. To rremov emove: e: position socket 2 from the tirechange tool kit on hub cap 1. # Position wheel wrench 3 on socket 2. # Using wheel wrench 3, turn hub cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove it. # To inst install: all: follow the instructions above in reverse order. % Speci ed tight tightening ening ttorq orque: ue: 18 lb- (25 Nm). # 334 Wheels and tires Raising the the vvehicle ehicle when cchanging hanging a wheel Req equir uirements: ements: R There are no persons in the vehicle. R The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel change (/ page 332). R The wheel trims and hub caps have been removed (/ page 333). Important notes on using the jack: R Use only a vehicle-speci c jack that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehicle. R The jack is only designed for raising and holding the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed and not for maintenance work under the vehicle. R The jack must be placed on a rm, at and non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large, at, load-bearing, non-slip underlay. R The foot of the jack must be positioned vertically under the jack support point. Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised: R Never place your hands or feet under the vehicle. R Never lie under the vehicle. R Do not start the vehicle and do not release the electric parking brake. R Do not open or close any doors or the trunk lid. # Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the screws completely. Wheels and tires 335 the jack must be positioned vertically under the jacking point of the vehicle. * NOTE Vehicle damage from the jack Position of jack support points * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. & WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect positioning of the jack If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip with the vehicle raised. # Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jack support point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. # The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack support points. # Take the ratchet out of the tire-change tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AUF" are visible. # # # # Position support 2 of jack 4 on jack support point 1. Turn ratchet 3 clockwise until support 2 sits completely on jack support point 1 and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. Turn ratchet 3 until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground. Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 336). 336 Wheels and tires Remo emoving ving a wheel & WARNING Risk of accident from losing a wheel Req equir uirements: ements: R The vehicle is raised (/ page 334). * NOTE NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force to the brake discs, as this could impair the level of comfort when braking. * NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on wheel bolts # # Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely. # # # Screw alignment bolt 1 into the thread instead of the wheel bolt. Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts completely. Remove the wheel. Installing Inst alling a new new wheel * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. Oiled, greased or damaged wheel bolt/wheel nut threads or wheel hub/wheel mounting bolt threads can cause the wheel bolts/wheel nuts to come loose. # Never oil or grease the threads. # In the event of damage to the threads, contact a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. # Have the damaged wheel bolts or damaged hub threads replaced. # Do not continue driving. # Observe the information on the choice of tires (/ page 328). For tires with a speci ed direction of rotation, an arrow on the side wall of the tire indicates the correct direction of rotation. Observe the direction of rotation when installing. # Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the alignment bolt and push it on. Wheels and tires 337 & WARNING Risk of injury from tightening wheel bolts and nuts If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip. # Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground. # # Be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" (/ page 328). For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz and for the wheel in question. * NOTE Damage to paintwork of the wheel rim when screwing in the rst wheel bolt If the wheel has too much play when screwing in the rst wheel bolt, the wheel rim paint can be damaged. # Press the wheel rmly against the wheel hub when screwing in the rst wheel bolt. # # # # Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated until they are nger-tight. Unscrew and remove the alignment bolt. Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is ngertight. Lower the vehicle (/ page 337). Lower Low ering ing tthe he vehicle vehicle a er a wheel cchange hange Requir equirements: ements: R The new wheel has been installed (/ page 336). # To lower lower the the vvehicle: ehicle: place the ratchet onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AB" are visible and turn counter-clockwise. # # Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 with an initial maximum force of 59 lb- (80 Nm). Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 with the speci ed tightening torque of 111 lb(150 Nm). & WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect tightening torque The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the prescribed torque. 338 Wheels and tires # # # Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are tightened to the prescribed tightening torque. If you are not sure, do not move the vehicle. Contact a quali ed specialist workshop and have the tightening torque checked immediately. Check the tire pressure of the newly installed wheel and adjust it if necessary. % The following does not apply if the new wheel is an emergency spare wheel. # Vehicles with with tir tiree pressur pressuree loss w war arning ning sy sysstem: Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (/ page 316). # Vehicles with with a tir tiree pressur pressuree monitor monitoring ing syssystem: Restart the tire pressure monitoring system (/ page 315). Emergency Emerg ency spare spare wheel Notes on the the emergency emergency spare spare wheel & WARNING Risk of accident caused by incorrect wheel and tire dimensions The wheel or tire sizes and the tire type of the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may di er. The emergency spare wheel or spare wheel can signi cantly impair driving characteristics of the vehicle. To prevent hazardous situations: # Drive carefully. # Never install more than one emergency spare wheel or spare wheel that di ers in size. # Only use an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel brie y. # Do not deactivate ESP®. # Have the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a di erent size replaced at the nearest quali ed specialist work- shop. The new wheel must have the correct dimensions. % The emergency spare wheel is secured in the emergency spare wheel bag in the trunk. Observe the following notes on installing an emergency spare wheel: R The maximum permissible speed with an emergency spare wheel installed is 50 mph (80 km/h). R Do not equip the emergency spare wheel with snow chains. R Replace the emergency spare wheel a er six years at the latest, regardless of wear. R Check the tire pressure of the emergency spare wheel installed. Correct the pressure as necessary. % The speci ed tire pressure is stated on the label of the emergency spare wheel. Wheels and tires 339 % Vehicles with with a tir tiree pr pressur essuree loss w war arning ning syssystem: If an emergency spare wheel is installed, the tire pressure loss warning system cannot function reliably. Only restart the system again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. with a tir tiree pressur pressuree monit monitor oring ing syssysVehicles with tem: If an emergency spare wheel is installed, the tire pressure monitoring system cannot function reliably. For a few minutes a er an emergency spare wheel is installed, the system may still display the tire pressure of the removed wheel. Only restart the system again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 310) R Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 316) R Tire pressure table (/ page 312) R Notes on installing tires (/ page 328) R Installing an emergency spare wheel (/ page 332) 340 Technical data Notes on ttec echnical hnical data * NO NOTE TE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. The data stated only applies to vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Vehicle electronics electronics Two-way o-way radios radios Notes on installing installing two-wa two-wayy radios radios & WARNING Risk of accident due to improper work on two-way radios If two-way radios are manipulated or retro tted incorrectly, the electromagnetic radiation from the two-way radios can interfere with the vehicle electronics and jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. # You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of accident due to improper operation of two-way radios If you use two-way radios in the vehicle improperly, their electromagnetic radiation can disrupt the vehicle's electronics. This is the case in the following situations, in particular: R The two-way radio is not connected to an exterior antenna. R The exterior antenna is installed incorrectly or is not a low-re ection antenna. This could jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. # Have the low-re ection exterior antenna installed at a quali ed specialist workshop. # When operating two-way radios in the vehicle, always connect them to the lowre ection exterior antenna. * NOTE Invalidation of the operating permit due to failure to comply with the instructions for installation and use The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of two-way radios are not observed. # Only use approved frequency bands. # Observe the maximum permissible output power in these frequency bands. # Only use approved antenna positions. Technical data 341 On the rear fenders, it is recommended that you install the antenna on the side of the vehicle closest to the center of the road. Use Technical Speci cation ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles – "EMCs for installation of a ermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when retro tting two-way radios. Comply with the legal requirements for detachable parts. If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply and antenna connectors provided in the pre-installation. Observe the manufacturer's supplements when installing. 1 2 3 4 Front roof area Rear roof area Rear fenders Trunk lid On vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof, installing an antenna to the front or rear roof area is not permitted. Two-wa o-wayy radio radio transmission transmission output The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the antenna must not exceed the values in the following table. Freq equency uency band and maximum transmission transmission output Frequency equency band Maximum transmistransmission output Short wave 3 - 54 MHz 100 W 4 m frequency band 74 - 88 MHz 30 W 2 m frequency band 144 - 174 MHz 50 W Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA) 380 - 460 MHz 10 W 70 cm frequency band 420 - 450 MHz 35 W Two-way radio (2G/3G/4G) 10 W 342 Technical data The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: R Two-way radios with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW R RF transmitters with transmitter frequencies in the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (TETRA) R Mobile phones (2G/3G/4G) There are no restrictions when positioning the antenna on the outside of the vehicle for the following frequency bands: R Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA) R 70 cm frequency band R 2G/3G/4G Regulator egulatoryy radio radio identi cation and notes notes Regulat egulator oryy radio radio identi cation of small com compoponents Manufacturer information about radio-based vehicle components can be found using the key phrase "Regulatory radio identi cation" in the Dig- ital Operator's Manual in the vehicle, on the Internet and in the app. Regulat egulator oryy radio radio identi cation – Indonesia Manufacturer information about radio-based vehicle components can be found using the key phrase "Regulatory radio identi cation – Indonesia" in the Digital Operator's Manual in the vehicle, on the Internet and in the app. % These are not small components. Information about small components can be found using the key phrase "Regulatory radio identi cation of small components". Infor Inf ormation mation on user separation separation distances distances Information on user separation distances of wireless vehicle components can be found using the key phrase "User separation distances" in the Digital Operator's Manual in the vehicle, on the Internet, and in the app. Furt urther her com component-speci ponent-speci c inf infor ormation mation Further component-speci c information can be found using the key phrase "further componentspeci c information" in the Digital Operator's Manual in the vehicle, on the Internet and in the app. Technical data 343 Vehicle identi cation plat plate, e, VIN and engine number over overview view Vehicle identi cation plate 1 2 3 4 5 Vehicle identi cation plate (USA only) Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight Maximum permissible front axle load Maximum permissible rear axle load Paint code VIN (vehicle identi cation number) 1 2 3 4 5 Vehicle identi cation plate (Canada only) Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight Maximum permissible front axle load Maximum permissible rear axle load Paint code VIN (vehicle identi cation number) The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the load. The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried on one axle (front or rear axle). 344 Technical data Do not exceed the maximum gross vehicle weight or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle. Additional plates plates VIN belo below w the the front front right-hand right-hand seat Operating Oper ating uids Notes on operating operating uids * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. & WARNING Risk of injury from operating uids harmful to your health 1 Plate with information about emissions test- 1 Imprinted VIN (vehicle identi cation number) 2 Floor covering ing, including con rmation of emissions guidelines at the U.S. federal level as well as for California 2 Engine number stamped into the crankcase 3 VIN (vehicle identi cation number) as a label at the lower edge of the windshield Operating uids may be poisonous and harmful to your health. # Observe the text on the original containers when using, storing or disposing of operating uids. # Always store operating uids sealed in their original containers. # Always keep children away from operating uids. Technical data 345 + ENVIRONMENT ONMENTAL AL NOTE NOTE Pollution of the ENVIR environment due to irresponsible disposal of operating uids Incorrect disposal of operating uids can cause considerable damage to the environment. # Dispose of operating uids in an environmentally responsible manner. Operating uids include the following: Fuels R Lubricants R Coolant R Brake uid R Windshield washer uid R Climate control system refrigerant R Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz. Damage caused by the use of products that have not been approved is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures. The operating uids approved by Mercedes-Benz can be identi ed by the following inscriptions on the container: R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) R MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51) Further information on approved operating uids: In the Mercedes-Benz Speci cations for Operating Fluids by entering the designation At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app R At a quali ed specialist workshop R & WARNING Risk of re or explosion from fuel Fuels are highly ammable. Fire, open ames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoided. # Before and during refueling, switch o the vehicle and, if installed, the stationary heater. # & WARNING Risk of injury from fuels Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health. # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. # Do not inhale fuel vapor. # Keep children away from fuel. # Keep doors and windows closed during the refueling process. If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: # Immediately rinse fuel o your skin with soap and water. # If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately. # If you swallow fuel, seek medical attention immediately. Do not induce vomiting. 346 Technical data # Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel. Flexible-fuel vehicles can be refueled with the following fuel types: R Unleaded premium grade gasoline R E85 fuel R A mixture of E85 fuel and unleaded premium grade gasoline Flexible-fuel vehicles can be identi ed by the Ethanol hanol up to to E85 sticker on the inside of the fuel Et ller ap. Depending on the country, the fuels you can use in your vehicle may di er from the information in the Operator's Manual. The fuels that have been approved for your vehicle can be found on the instruction label on the inside of the fuel ller ap. Fuel Notes on fuel quality quality for for vehicles vehicles wit withh a gasoline gasoline engine Observe the notes on operating uids (/ page 344). * NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel with low-sulfur spark-ignition engine fuel. This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol by volume. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R diesel R Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100 R Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100 R Gasoline with additives containing metal If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: # Do not switch on the vehicle. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. If the available fuel is not su ciently low in sulfur, this can produce unpleasant odors. Only refuel with fuel that has at least the octane number speci ed in the information label in the fuel ller ap. For maximum engine output: Only refuel using premium grade unleaded gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON. As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also refuel with regular unleaded gasoline with at least 87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine output and increase fuel consumption. Never refuel using gasoline with an even lower RON. * NOTE NOTE Premature engine wear through unleaded regular gasoline Impairment of the longevity and performance of the engine. If unleaded premium grade gasoline is unavailable and you have to refuel using unleaded regular gasoline: Technical data 347 # # # Only ll the fuel tank to half full with unleaded regular gasoline and re ll as soon as possible with unleaded premium grade gasoline. Do not drive at the maximum design speed. Avoid sudden acceleration and engine speeds over 3000 rpm. Further information on fuel is available at the following locations: R At a gas station R At a quali ed specialist workshop R On the https://www.mbusa.com (USA only) Notes on additives additives in gasoline gasoline Observe the notes on operating uids (/ page 344). * NOTE NOTE Damage from use of unsuitable additives Even small amounts of the wrong additive may lead to malfunctions occurring. # Only add cleaning additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use brandname fuels with additives. In some countries, the fuel available may not have su cient additives. Residue could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in consultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, mix the fuel with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Observe the notes and mixing ratios indicated on the tank. Tank content content and fuel reserv reservee (no (nott for for plug-in hybrid) ybrid) The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary, depending on the vehicle equipment. Total reservee fuel ttank ank Total capacity and reserv Model Total Total capacity E 450 4MATIC 21.1 gal (80.0 liters) All other models 17.4 gal (66.0 liters) Model Of which which reserve reserve E 450 4MATIC 3.2 gal (12.0 liters) All other models 1.8 gal (7.0 liters) Engine oil Notes on engine oil Observe the notes on operating uids (/ page 344). 348 Technical data * NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil lter, incorrect oil or additives # # # # Do not use engine oils or oil lters other than those which meet the speci cations necessary for the prescribed service intervals. Do not alter the engine oil or oil lter in order to achieve longer change intervals than prescribed. Do not use additives. Have the engine oil changed a er the prescribed intervals. Mercedes-Benz recommends having the oil changed at a quali ed specialist workshop. Only use engine oils approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Quality and capacity of engine oil (not or plug-in (not ffor hybr ybrid) id) Engine oil speci cations Gasoline engines All models MB-Freig MB-Freigabe abe or MBApprov Approval al 229.51, 229.52, 229.61, 229.71*, 229.72 * Recommended for the lowest possible fuel consumption. To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption, it is recommended to use the engine oil speci cations marked in the table for the lowest SAE viscosity class. Observe any possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes. Engine oil lling capacity Model Capacity E 350 7.0 US qt (6.6 liters) E 350 4MATIC 6.3 US qt (6.0 liters) E 450 4MATIC 9.0 US qt (8.5 liters) The speci ed lling capacity refers to an oil change with the oil lter. Notes on brak brakee uid Observe the notes on operating uids (/ page 344). & WARNING Risk of an accident due to vapor pockets forming in the brake system The brake uid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake uid. If the boiling point is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This causes the braking e ect to be impaired. Technical data 349 # Have the brake uid renewed at the speci ed intervals. Have the brake uid regularly replaced at a qualied specialist workshop. Only use a brake uid approved by MercedesBenz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0. Coolant Notes on coolant Observe the notes on operating uids (/ page 344). & WARNING ‑ Risk of re and injury from antifreeze If antifreeze comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compartment, it may ignite. # Allow the engine to cool down before adding antifreeze. # Make sure that no antifreeze spills out next to the ller opening. # Thoroughly clean o any antifreeze from component parts before starting the vehicle. * NOTE Damage caused by incorrect coolant Only use coolant that has been premixed with the required antifreeze protection. Information on coolant is available at the following locations: R In the Mercedes-Benz Speci cation for Operating Fluids 320.1 At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app R At a quali ed specialist workshop # * NOTE Overheating at high outside temperatures If an inappropriate coolant is used, the engine cooling system is not su ciently protected against overheating and corrosion at high outside temperatures. # # Only use coolant approved by MercedesBenz. Observe the instructions in the Mercedes-Benz Speci cations for Operating Fluids 320.1. Have the coolant regularly replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop. Proportion of antifreeze concentrate in the engine cooling system: R A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection down to about -35°F (-37°C)) R A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection down to -49°F (-45°C)) Coolant capacity Coolant (engine) Model Capacity E 450 4MATIC 13.7 US qt (13.0 liters) All other models 14.8 US qt (14.0 liters) 350 Technical data Notes on windshield washer washer uid Observe the notes on operating uids (/ page 344). & WARNING ‑ Risk of re and injury from windshield washer concentrate Windshield washer concentrate is highly ammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate spills out next to the ller opening. * NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windshield washer uid Unsuitable windshield washer uid may damage the plastic surface of the exterior lighting. # Only use windshield washer uid which is also suitable for use on plastic surfaces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit. * NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windshield washer uids # Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit with other windshield washer uids. Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Otherwise, the ll level sensor may be triggered erroneously. Recommended windshield washer uid: R Above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit R Below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the information on the antifreeze container. Mix washer uid with windshield washer uid all year round. Refr efrig iger erant ant Notes on rrefr efrig iger erant ant Observe the notes on operating uids (/ page 344). * NOTE Damage due to incorrect refrigerant If a non-approved refrigerant is used, the climate control system may be damaged. # US USA: A: use only R‑134a refrigerant. # Canada: use only R‑1234yf refrigerant. * NOTE Damage to the climate control system due to incorrect refrigerant compressor oil # # Only use refrigerant compressor oil that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Do not mix the approved refrigerant compressor oil with a di erent refrigerant compressor oil. Work on the climate control system may be carried out only by a quali ed specialist workshop. All applicable regulations, as well as SAE standard J639, must be adhered to. The information label for the climate control system regarding the refrigerant type and the refrigerant compressor oil (PAG oil) is located on the inside of the hood. Technical data 351 Filling capacity for for rrefr efrig iger erant ant and PA PAG G oil Capacity Model 1 2 3 4 5 6 Information label (example – USA/China) Hazard and service warning symbols Refrigerant lling capacity Applicable standards PAG oil part number GWP (global warming potential) of the refrigerant used Refrigerant type 1 2 3 4 5 6 Information label (example – Canada) Hazard and service warning symbols Refrigerant lling capacity Applicable standards PAG oil part number GWP (global warming potential) of the refrigerant used Refrigerant type Symbols 1 indicate the following: R Possible dangers R The need to have service work carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop only Refrig Refr iger erant ant E 450 4MATIC 20.8 ± 0.4 oz (590 ± 10 g) All other models 22.2 ± 0.4 oz (630 ± 10 g) Model PAG PAG oil E 450 4MATIC 4.9 ± 0.4 oz (140 ± 10 g) All other models 2.8 ± 0.4 oz (80 ± 10 g) Vehicle data Infor Inf ormation mation rreg egar arding ding the the vehicle vehicle data The vehicle data speci ed may vary as a result of the following factors: Factors: R Tires 352 Technical data R R R Load Condition of the suspension Optional equipment Items of optional equipment increase the curb weight and reduce the payload. Height when opened Vehicle dimensions (not (not for for plug-in hybr hybrid) id) Missing values were not available at the time of going to press. Height when opened Models Height when opened All models Model Turning Tur ning radius radius E 350 38.1 (11.6 m) All other models 39.0 (11.9 m) Weights and loads (not (not ffor or plug-in hybr hybrid) id) Missing values were not available at the time of going to press. Vehicle dimensions All models Vehicle length 194.5 in (4940 mm) Vehicle width including outside mirrors 81.3 in (2065 mm) Wheelbase 115.7 in (2939 mm) Vehicle height 1 Height when opened Turning urning rradius adius Model Vehicle height Vehicle E 350 57.5 in (1460 mm) All other models 57.8 in (1467 mm) Roof load Model All models Maximum roof roof load Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 353 Display messages Display messages Introduction Intr oduction Notes about display display messages messages Display messages appear on the instrument display. Display messages with graphic symbols are simpli ed in the Operator's Manual and may di er from the symbols on the instrument display. The instrument display shows high-priority display messages in red. Certain display messages are accompanied by a warning tone. Please act in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in the Operator's Manual. For some display messages, symbols will also be shown: R Õ Further information R ¨ Hide display message With the le -hand Touch Control, you can select the respective symbol by swiping to the le or right. Pressing Õ displays further information on the media display. Press the ¨ symbol to hide the display message. You can hide low-priority display messages by pressing the back button G or the le -hand Touch Control. The display messages will then be stored in the message memory. Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly as possible. High-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The instrument display will show these display messages permanently until the cause of the display message has been recti ed. Calling up saved display messages messages saved display On-board computer: 4 Service 5 1 Message If there are no display messages, No Messages will appear on the instrument display. # Scroll through the display messages by swiping upwards or downwards on the le -hand Touch Control. # To exit exit the the message message memory: memory: press the back button G. 354 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Occupant safety safety Displayy messages Displa messages 6 SRS Malfunction Service Required 6 Front Left Malfunction Service Required (example) 6 Left Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required (example) Possible causes/conseq Possible causes/consequences uences and M Solutions * The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 36). & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. * The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 36). & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. # * The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 36). & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the window curtain airbag The window curtain airbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. # Have the window curtain airbag checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 355 Displayy messages Displa messages Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual P Possible ossible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions * The front passenger airbag and the front passenger knee airbag have been disabled even though an adult or a person of adult stature is on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low. & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a disabled front passenger airbag If the front passenger airbag is disabled, the front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. # Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct. # # # # Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat. Check the status of automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 45). If necessary, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. * The front passenger airbag and the front passenger knee airbag will be enabled while the vehicle is in motion in the following situations: R Even when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the front passenger seat R Even when the front passenger seat is not occupied 356 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/conseq Possible causes/consequences uences and M Solutions The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat. & WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is enabled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. # Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct. NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. # # # # PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Operator's Manual Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat. Check the status of automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 45). If necessary, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. * The PRE‑SAFE® functions are malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 357 Displayy messages Displa messages PRE-SAFE Impulse Side Inoperative See Operator's Manual P Possible ossible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions * The PRE‑SAFE® Impulse Side system is malfunctioning or inoperative a er having already been triggered. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. SmartKey Smar tKey Displayy messages Displa messages Á Possible Possible causes/conseq causes/consequences uences and M Solutions * Have the SmartKey replaced. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Obtain a New Key Á Replace Key Battery * The SmartKey battery is discharged. # Replace the battery (/ page 66). 358 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages Á Key Not Detected (white display message) Á Key Not Detected (red display message) Possible causes/conseq Possible causes/consequences uences and M Solutions * The SmartKey is currently undetected. # Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. # If the SmartKey is still not recognized, place it in the marked space for starting with the SmartKey (/ page 144). * The SmartKey cannot be detected and may no longer be in the vehicle. The SmartKey is no longer in the vehicle and you switch o the vehicle: R You can no longer start the vehicle. R You cannot centrally lock the vehicle. # Ensure that the SmartKey is in the vehicle. If the SmartKey detection function has a malfunction due to a strong radio signal source: Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Place the SmartKey in the marked space for starting the engine with the SmartKey (/ page 144). # Á Don't Forget Your Key * A warning tone will also sound. This message reminds you to take your SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 359 Displayy messages Displa messages Á P Possible ossible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions * The vehicle is processing in order to teach in the new SmartKey. # Wait until processing is complete. Key Being Initialized Please Wait Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual * SmartKey detection is malfunctioning. # Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. # Place the SmartKey in the marked space for starting the engine with the SmartKey (/ page 144). Lights Displayy messag Displa messages es : Check Left Low Beam (example) Possible causes/conseq Possible causes/consequences uences and M Solutions * The corresponding light source is defective. # Drive on carefully. # Visit a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. % LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding light appears only when all the light-emitting diodes in the light are faulty. 360 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages : Possible causes/conseq Possible causes/consequences uences and M Solutions * The exterior lighting is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Malfunction See Operator’s Manual : * The light sensor for automatic driving lights is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. : * The active headlamps are malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. : * You are driving without low-beam headlamps. # Turn the light switch to the L or à position. Automatic Headlamp Mode Inoperative Active Headlamps Inoperative Switch On Headlamps Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 361 Displayy messages Displa messages : P Possible ossible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions * You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on. # Turn the light switch to the à position. Switch Off Lights : Intell. Light System Inoperative * The Intelligent Light System is malfunctioning. The lighting system continues to function properly without the functions of the Intelligent Light System. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 124). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available display message will appear. # Drive on. # Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist is available again. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative * Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on. or 362 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/conseq Possible causes/consequences uences and M Solutions # # # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Until then, operate the high beam manually. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 125). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Available Again display message will appear. # Drive on. # Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist Plus is available again. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Inoperative * Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is malfunctioning. # Drive on. or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Until then, operate the high beam manually. Hazard Warning Flashers Malfunctioning * The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 363 Vehicle Displayy messages Displa messages d Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting Head-up Display Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Possible Possible causes/conseq causes/consequences uences and M Solutions * You are leaving the vehicle in a ready-to-drive state. # Get out of the vehicle, secure it against rolling away and take the SmartKey with you. # If you do not leave the vehicle, switch o the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12‑V battery may discharge and starting the engine may be possible only with the help of a second battery (jump start). * The Head-up Display is temporarily unavailable. Possible causes: R Malfunctions in the power supply R Signal interference # # Head-up Display Inoperative Stop in accordance with the tra c conditions and switch the vehicle o and on again. If the display message still appears, consult a quali ed specialist workshop. * The Head-up Display has an internal error. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. 364 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages Ù Steering Malfunction Increased Physical Effort See Operator's Manual Ù Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately See Operator's Manual C Possible causes/conseq Possible causes/consequences uences and M Solutions * The power steering assistance is malfunctioning. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer. # If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully. # Visit or consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. * The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is signi cantly impaired. & WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. * At least one door is open. # Close all doors. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 365 Displayy messages Displa messages M P Possible ossible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions * The hood is open. & WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the hood unlocked The hood may open and block your view. Never release the hood when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked. # # # N Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Close the hood. * The trunk lid is open. & DAN ANGER GER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the vehicle is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch o the vehicle before opening the trunk lid. # Never drive with the trunk lid open. # Close the trunk lid. 366 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages _ Possible causes/conseq Possible causes/consequences uences and M Solutions * The seat backrest of the corresponding seat is not engaged. # Fold the seat backrest back until it engages. Rear Left Backrest Not Latched (example) ¥ * The washer uid level in the washer uid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. # Add washer uid (/ page 280). Wiper Malfunctioning * The windshield wipers are malfunctioning. # Restart the vehicle. Check Washer Fluid If the display message still appears: Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 367 Engine Displayy messages Displa messages Possible Possible causes/conseq causes/consequences uences and M Solutions To switch engine off, press and hold Start/Stop button for at least 3 seconds or press 3 times. * You have pressed the start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion. # Information about switching o the vehicle while driving (/ page 143). Cannot Start Engine See Operator's Manual * The vehicle cannot be started. # Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on # If the display message still appears, consult a quali ed specialist workshop. + Check Coolant Level See Operator's Manual * The coolant level is too low. * NOTE Engine damage due to insu cient coolant # # # Avoid long journeys with insu cient coolant. Add coolant (/ page 280). Have the engine cooling system checked at a quali ed specialist workshop. 368 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages ÿ Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off Possible causes/conseq Possible causes/consequences uences and M Solutions * The coolant is too hot. # Stop immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions and switch o the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of burns when opening the hood If you open the hood in the event of an overheated engine or re in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur: R You may come into contact with hot gases. R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating uids. # # # # # ÿ Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down. In the event of a re in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the re service. Wait until the engine has cooled down. Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed. Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking. * There is a malfunction in the engine cooling system. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 369 Displayy messages Displa messages 8 P Possible ossible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions * The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel. Fuel Level Low 8 Gas Cap Loose * The fuel ller cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. # Close the fuel ller cap. # If tthe he fuel ller cap w was as already already pr properl operlyy closed: consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Transmission Displayy messag Displa messages es Possible causes/conseq Possible causes/consequences uences and M Solutions Only Shift to 'P' when Vehicle is Stationary * It is possible to select the park position j only if the vehicle is stationary. # Depress the brake pedal to stop. # Shi the transmission to park position j when the vehicle is stationary. Apply Brake to Shift from 'P' * You have attempted to shi the transmission out of park position j and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission position h, k or neutral i. 370 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/conseq Possible causes/consequences uences and M Solutions To Deselect P or N, Depress Brake and Start Engine * You have attempted to shi the transmission out of park position j or neutral i and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Start the vehicle. # Change the transmission position. Apply Brake to Shift to D or R * You have attempted to select transmission position h or k. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission position h or k. Apply Brake to Shift to 'R' * You have attempted to select transmission position k. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission position k. Driver's Door Open & Transmission Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away * The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission position h, k or neutral i is selected. The vehicle may roll away. # Select park position j when switching o the vehicle. N Permanently Active Risk of Rolling Away * Neutral i has been selected while the vehicle is rolling or while you are driving. # Depress the brake pedal to stop. # Shi the transmission to park position j while the vehicle is stationary. # To continue driving, select transmission position h or k. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 371 Displayy messages Displa messages P Possible ossible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions Service Required Do Not Shift Gears Visit Dealer * The transmission is malfunctioning. It is no longer possible to change the transmission position. # If transmission position h is selected, consult a quali ed specialist workshop and do not change the transmission position. # For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop or breakdown service. Reversing Not Possible Service Required * The transmission is malfunctioning. It is not possible to select transmission position k. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Transmission Malfunction Stop * The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shi s to neutral i automatically. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Depress the brake pedal. # Engage park position j. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running Wait Transmission Cooling * The transmission is overheating. Pulling away may be temporarily impaired or not possible. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving. # Leave the engine running. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. Auxiliary Battery Malfunction (white display message) * Vehicles with with automatic automatic tr transmission: ansmission: The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. 372 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/conseq Possible causes/consequences uences and M Solutions # # Auxiliary Battery Malfunction (red display message) Vehicles with with aut automatic omatic transmission: transmission: Until then, always select park position j before you switch o the vehicle. Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake. * Vehicles with with aut automatic omatic transmission: transmission: The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Vehicles with with aut automatic omatic transmission: transmission: Until then, always select park position j before you switch o the vehicle. # Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 373 Brak Br akes es Displayy messag Displa messages es F (USA only) ! (Canada only) Parking Brake See Operator's Manual Possible causes/conseq Possible causes/consequences uences and M Solutions * The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply: apply: # Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on # Apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 168). If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake: Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away. * The yellow ! indicator lamp and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. release: To release: # Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on # Release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 168). or # Release the electric parking brake automatically (/ page 167). If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: # Do not continue driving. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # 374 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/conseq Possible causes/consequences uences and M Solutions * The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp is ashing. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. The electric parking brake could not be applied or released. # Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on To apply: apply: Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 168). # To release: release: Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually. # If the electric parking brake cannot be applied or the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp continues to ash: # Do not continue driving. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away. * The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp ashes for approximately ten seconds a er the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. If tthe he stat statee of charg chargee is ttoo oo low: low: # Charge the 12 V battery. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 375 Displayy messages Displa messages P Possible ossible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions To apply: apply: Switch o the vehicle. The electric parking brake will be applied automatically. # If you do not want the electric parking brake to be applied, e.g. at an automatic car wash or when the vehicle is being towed, leave the vehicle switched on. This does not include having the vehicle towed with the rear axle raised. If the electric parking brake is not applied automatically: # Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on # Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 168). If it is still not possible to apply the electric parking brake: Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away. # To release: release: If the conditions for automatic release are ful lled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically, release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 168). # If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: Do not continue driving. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # 376 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages F (USA only) ! (Canada only) Please Release Parking Brake Possible causes/conseq Possible causes/consequences uences and M Solutions * The red F indicator lamp (USA only) or ! indicator lamp (Canada only) is ashing. The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving: R A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been ful lled (/ page 167). R You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (/ page 168). # # Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake. Release the electric parking brake manually. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 377 Displayy messages Displa messages F (USA only) P Possible ossible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp is lit. You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the vehicle switched o . # Switch on the vehicle. ! (Canada only) Turn On the Ignition to Release the Parking Brake $ (USA only) J (Canada only) Check Brake Fluid Level * There is insu cient brake uid in the brake uid reservoir. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake uid level If the brake uid level is too low, the braking e ect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Do not add brake uid. 378 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages Check Brake Pads See Operator's Manual Possible causes/conseq Possible causes/consequences uences and M Solutions * The brakepads have reached the wear limit. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Driving Dr iving systems systems Displayy messages Displa messages ë Possible causes/conseq Possible causes/consequences uences and M Solutions * The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not ful lled. # Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (/ page 174). Off é ATTENTION ASSIST Inoperative * ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 379 Displayy messages Displa messages é ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break! h P Possible ossible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions * ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver (/ page 176). # If necessary, take a break. * Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are ful lled. # Observe the activation conditions for cruise control (/ page 178). - - - mph Cruise Control Inoperative * Cruise control is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Cruise Control Off * Cruise control has been deactivated. If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically (/ page 177). ç - - - mph * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are ful lled. # Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 182). 380 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages ç Possible causes/conseq Possible causes/consequences uences and M Solutions * If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system will switch to passive mode (/ page 179). Suspended ç * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has deactivated automatically (/ page 182). Off Active Distance Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 179). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on. or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. Active Distance Assist Inoperative * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Drive on. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 381 Displayy messages Displa messages P Possible ossible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions or # # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Active Distance Assist Now Available * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again. # Switch on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 182). Active Steering Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 186). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on # Check the tire pressure if necessary. Active Steering Assist Inoperative * Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Active Steering Asst. Currently Unavailable Due to Multiple Emergency Stops * Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops. # Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the tra c conditions. 382 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/conseq Possible causes/consequences uences and M Solutions # Beginning Emergency Stop Ø Active Stop & Go Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on Active Steering Assist is available once more. * Your hands are not on the steering wheel. An emergency stop is being initiated (/ page 188). # Put your hands back on the steering wheel. You can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions: R Steering R Braking or accelerating R Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC * Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits (/ page 186). You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time. # Take over the steering and drive on in accordance with the tra c conditions. * Active Stop-and-Go Assist is temporarily unavailable. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 186). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 383 Displayy messages Displa messages P Possible ossible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Stop & Go Assist Inoperative See Operator's Manual * Active Stop-and-Go Assist is malfunctioning. Active Stop-and-Go Assist has been deactivated. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available. # Drive on. or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear, consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Traffic Sign Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Tra c Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on Traffic Sign Assist Inoperative * Tra c Sign Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 199). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. 384 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/conseq Possible causes/consequences uences and M Solutions # Drive on or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. Blind Spot Assist Inoperative * Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 199). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative * Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 385 Displayy messages Displa messages P Possible ossible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions # # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 202). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative * Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop. 386 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages ¸ à ç Ä Temporarily Unavailable Sensors are Dirty Possible causes/conseq Possible causes/consequences uences and M Solutions * Front and corner radar sensors (herea er "sensors") are malfunctioning. Possible causes: R The sensors are dirty R Heavy rain or snow R Extended country driving without other tra c, e.g. in the desert Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steering and drive system will continue to function normally. # Drive on Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again and the corresponding symbols will be switched o . If the display message does not disappear: # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Clean all sensor covers from outside (/ page 170). # Restart the vehicle. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 387 Displayy messages Displa messages á Ã Ä Ø Ô Temporarily Unavailable Camera View Restricted P Possible ossible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions * The view of the multifunction camera is restricted. Possible causes: R Dirt on the windshield in the eld of vision of the multifunction camera R Heavy rain, snow or fog R Condensation on the inside of the windshield: in certain weather conditions, condensation can form on the inside of the windshield during cold times of year in particular. % This condensation on the windshield will be removed automatically within a short time with the aid of a heater. The restriction is temporary. Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steering and drive system will continue to function normally. # Drive on Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again and the corresponding symbols will be switched o . If the display message does not disappear: # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Clean the windshield, especially in the position of the multifunction camera (/ page 170). # Restart the vehicle. 388 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages ä Malfunction Drive at Max. 50 mph É Stop Vehicle Vehicle Too Low Possible causes/conseq Possible causes/consequences uences and M Solutions * AIR BODY CONTROL is functioning only to a limited extent. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be a ected. # Drive in a manner appropriate for the current level, but do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. * DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be a ected. # Do not drive at speeds greater than 50 mph (80 km/h). # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. * You have pulled away despite the vehicle level being too low. # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. If the display message does not disappear and a warning tone also sounds, AIR BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning: Do not drive at speeds greater than 50 mph (80 km/h) and consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. # * NOTE The tires on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movements # # Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds. If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions, and set a higher vehicle level if possible. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 389 Displayy messages Displa messages P Possible ossible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions # ¢ Lowering Set a higher vehicle level (/ page 205). Depending on the malfunction, the vehicle will be raised. * The vehicle level will lower for the following reasons: R You have selected a di erent drive program. R You have exceeded the speed limit. R You have changed the vehicle level by pressing the button. É * Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected. É * The vehicle level is too low. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. É * You are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level. # To adjust the vehicle level, you must not drive at speeds greater than 37 mph (60 km/h). Vehicle Rising Vehicle Rising Please Wait Drive More Slowly 390 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Operator's Manual Possible causes/conseq Possible causes/consequences uences and M Solutions * Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings. or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message still appears, consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Driving Dr iving safety safety systems systems Displayy messag Displa messages es ! ÷ Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Possible Possible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions * ABS and ESP® are temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be temporarily unavailable. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning The wheels may lock during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o . Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 391 Displayy messages Displa messages P Possible ossible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions # # ! ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph (30 km/h). If the display message does not disappear, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully. * ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive on carefully. # Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. 392 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages ÷ Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual Possible causes/conseq Possible causes/consequences uences and M Solutions * ESP® is temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning® If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph (30 km/h). # If the display message does not disappear, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully. * ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP® checked at a quali ed specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 393 Displayy messages Displa messages T ! ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual Active Brake Assist Functions Currently Limited See Operator's Manual P Possible ossible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions * EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. & WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. * Vehicles with with tthe he Driving Driving Assist Assistance ance Pack Packag age: e: Active Brake Assist with cross-tra c function, Evasive Steering Assist or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available. Vehicles without without tthe he Driving Driving Assistance Assistance Pack Packag age: e: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable. # Drive on. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. 394 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages Active Brake Assist Functions Limited See Operator's Manual Possible causes/conseq Possible causes/consequences uences and M Solutions * For vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package, the following functions may be temporarily unavailable or only partially available: R Active Brake Assist with cross-tra c function R Evasive Steering Assist R PRE‑SAFE® PLUS Vehicles without without the the Driving Driving Assist Assistance ance Pack Packag age: e: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable or only partially available. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz Mer cedes-Benz emergency emergency call syst system em Displayy messag Displa messages es G Inoperative Possible Possible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions * The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is malfunctioning. The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 395 Displayy messages Displa messages Device Detected at Diagnostics Connection See Operator's Manual P Possible ossible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions * The vehicle functions for malfunction detection are restricted. At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system is malfunctioning. # Observe the notes on the diagnostics connection (/ page 26). # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Battery Batt ery Displayy messages Displa messages # 12 V Battery See Operator's Manual # See Operator's Manual Possible Possible causes/conseq causes/consequences uences and M Solutions * The vehicle is o and the charge level is too low. # Switch o electrical consumers that are not required. To charge the 12 V battery: Leave the vehicle running for a few minutes, or drive an extended distance. * If the message appears while the vehicle is switched on, this indicates an on-board electrical system malfunction. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # * The 12 V battery is not being charged. * NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving # Do not continue driving under any circumstances. 396 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/conseq Possible causes/consequences uences and M Solutions # # # # Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual * NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving # # # # Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running Stop immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions and switch o the vehicle. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. * The 12 V battery is no longer being charged and the state of charge is too low. # # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving. Switch o the vehicle. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. * The 12 V battery charge level is too low. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving. # Leave the engine running. # If the display message disappears: drive on. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 397 Displayy messages Displa messages Û 48 V Battery See Operator's Manual Ý Please Wait Charging 48 V Battery… P Possible ossible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions * The 48 V on-board electrical system has function restrictions. Comfort functions may be restricted. # Visit a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. * The 48 V battery is discharged. You have switched on the vehicle while the 12 V battery was being charged with a suitable charger or while another vehicle was providing starting assistance. The discharged 48 V battery is charged automatically via the voltage converter. A er a few minutes, the Engine Can Now Be Started display message will be shown on the instrument display. # Start the vehicle. # Drive the vehicle for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery a er disconnecting the charger from the vehicle. If the Engine Can Now Be Started display message does not appear a er a few minutes: Try to start the vehicle. # If the vehicle does not start, consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Cannot Start Engine See Operator's Manual * The state of charge of the 48 V battery is too low. You can no longer start the vehicle. # Switch o electrical consumers that are not required. 398 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/conseq Possible causes/consequences uences and M Solutions # Engine Can Now Be Started Connect a suitable charger approved for Mercedes-Benz with su cient charge output to the jump-start connection point of the 12 V battery (/ page 299). The 48 V battery is charged via the voltage converter in the vehicle. * The 48 V battery has been charged automatically via the voltage converter. # Start the vehicle and drive for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery. Tir iree pr pressur essuree monit monitor or Displayy messag Displa messages es Possible Possible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions Tire Press. Monitor Currently Unavailable * There is interference from a powerful radio signal source As a result, no signals from the tire pressure sensors are being received. The tire pressure monitoring system is temporarily unavailable. The tire pressure monitoring system will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been recti ed. # Drive on. Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative * The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. & WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning The tire pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires. Tires with insu cient tire pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking. # Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a quali ed specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 399 Displayy messages Displa messages Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors h Wheel Sensor(s) Missing h Check Tires P Possible ossible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions * The wheels installed do not have suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitoring system is deactivated. # Install wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors. * There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or more wheels. No pressure value is displayed for the a ected tire. # Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop. * The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped signi cantly. The wheel position is displayed. A warning tone will also sound. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to insu cient tire pressure R R R The tires can burst. The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. Observe the recommended tire pressures. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary. # # # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. Check the tire pressure (/ page 310) and the tires. 400 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages h Please Correct Tire Pressure h Warning Tire Malfunction Possible causes/conseq Possible causes/consequences uences and M Solutions * The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the di erence in tire pressure between the individual wheels is too great. # Check the tire pressure and add air, if necessary. # When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure monitor (/ page 315). * The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position will be displayed. & WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a at tire R R The tires can overheat and be damaged. The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Do not drive with a at tire. # Do not exceed the maximum permissible driving distance in emergency mode and the maximum permissible speed with a at MOExtended tire. # Observe the notes on at tires. Notes in the event of a at tire (/ page 290). Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Check the tires. # Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 401 Displayy messages Displa messages P Possible ossible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions Tires Overheated * At least one tire is overheating. The a ected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tires are displayed in yellow. & WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires Overheated tires can burst. # Reduce speed so that the tires cool down. Decrease Speed * At least one tire is overheating. The a ected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tires are displayed in yellow. & WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires Overheated tires can burst. # Reduce speed so that the tires cool down. Tir iree pr pressur essuree loss war warning ning syst system em Displayy messag Displa messages es Check Tire Pressure Soon Possible causes/conseq Possible causes/consequences uences and M Solutions * Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a signi cant loss of pressure. 402 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages Possible causes/conseq Possible causes/consequences uences and M Solutions & WARNING Risk of an accident due to insu cient tire pressure R R R The tires can burst. The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. Observe the recommended tire pressures. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary. # # # # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. Check the tire pressure (/ page 310) and the tires. When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure loss warning system (/ page 315). Check Tire Pressure Then Restart Run Flat Indicator * Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since. # When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure loss warning system (/ page 315). Run Flat Indicator Inoperative * Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 403 Engine oil Displayy messages Displa messages 5 Check Engine Oil At Next Refueling 5 Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart) Possible Possible causes/conseq causes/consequences uences and M Solutions * The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insu cient engine oil # # Avoid long journeys with insu cient engine oil. Check the engine oil level when next refueling. Add engine oil (/ page 278). Notes on engine oil (/ page 347). * Display message only for certain engines: The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insu cient engine oil # # Avoid long journeys with insu cient engine oil. When next refueling, add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (/ page 278). Notes on engine oil (/ page 347). 404 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Displayy messages Displa messages 5 Engine Oil Reduce Oil Level Possible causes/conseq Possible causes/consequences uences and M Solutions * Display message only for certain engines: The engine oil level is too high. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil # # 5 Engine Oil Level Low Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil level reduced. * Display message only for certain engines: The engine oil level is too low. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insu cient engine oil # # # # # Avoid long journeys with insu cient engine oil. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving. Switch o the vehicle. Add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (/ page 278). Check the engine oil level. Notes on engine oil (/ page 347). Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 405 Displayy messages Displa messages 5 Engine Oil Pressure Stop Switch Off Engine P Possible ossible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions * Display message only for certain engines: The oil pressure is too low. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insu cient oil pressure # # # # 5 Avoid driving with insu cient oil pressure. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving. Switch o the vehicle. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. * The electrical connection to the oil level sensor has been interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Engine Oil Level Cannot Be Measured War arning ning and indicator indicator lam lamps ps Over Ov ervie view w of indicator indicator and war warning ning lamps lamps Some systems will perform a self-test when the vehicle is switched on. Some indicator and warn- ing lamps may brie y light up or ash. This behavior is non-critical. These indicator and warning lamps indicate a malfunction only if they light up or ash a er the vehicle has been started or during a journey. 406 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Instr Ins trument ument display 8 F ! ! é Depending on the display setting, the positions of the indicator lamps on the instrument display may di er from the example shown. Indicat Indicator or and w war arning ning lamps: lamps: 6 Restraint system (/ page 407) ü Seat belt (/ page 407) Ù Power steering (/ page 408) ÿ Coolant temperature (/ page 409) ; Check Engine (/ page 409) # Electrical malfunction (/ page 409) J $ J L Ó ê ä ä ! Reserve fuel with fuel ller ap location indicator (/ page 409) USA: electric parking brake (red) (/ page 413) Canada: electric parking brake (red) (/ page 413) Electric parking brake (yellow) (/ page 413) USA: Recuperative Brake System (/ page 413) Canada: brakes (yellow) (/ page 413) USA: brakes (red) (/ page 413) Canada: brakes (red) (/ page 413) Distance warning (/ page 416) Active Brake Assist (/ page 416) Active Brake Assist (/ page 416) AIR BODY CONTROL (/ page 416) DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL (/ page 416) ABS (/ page 417) ÷ å h ESP® (/ page 417) ESP® OFF (/ page 417) Tire pressure monitoring system (/ page 420) T Parking lights (/ page 119) L Low beam (/ page 119) K High beam (/ page 120) #! Turn signal lights (/ page 120) R Rear fog light (/ page 119) Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 407 Occupant safety safety Warning/indicat arning/indicator or lamp 6 Restraint system warning lamp P Possible ossible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions * The restraint system red warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is on. The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 36). & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. # # # # ü Seat belt warning lamp ashes Drive on carefully. Note the messages on the instrument display. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. * The red seat belt warning lamp ashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds. The driver or front passenger has not fastened his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 40). There are objects on the front passenger seat. # Remove the objects from the front passenger seat. 408 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps War arning/indicat ning/indicator or lamp ü Seat belt warning lamp lights up Possible Possible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds once the vehicle has started. In addition, an intermittent warning tone may sound. The red seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 40). If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the red seat belt warning lamp may remain lit. Vehicle War arning/indicat ning/indicator or lamp Ù Power steering warning lamp (red) Possible Possible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning. & WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # # Note the messages on the instrument display. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 409 Engine Warning/indicat arning/indicator or lamp P Possible ossible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions Coolant warning lamp (red) * The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes: R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning R The coolant level is too low R The air supply to the radiator is obstructed R The radiator fan is faulty R The engine coolant pump is faulty ÿ If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded the maximum permissible temperature. & WARNING Risk of burns when opening the hood If you open the hood in the event of an overheated engine or re in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur: R You may come into contact with hot gases. R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating uids. # # # Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down. In the event of a re in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the re service. Stop immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions and switch o the vehicle. Do not continue driving. 410 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps War arning/indicat ning/indicator or lamp Possible Possible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions # Note the messages on the instrument display. the coolant ttem If the emper peratur aturee display display is at tthe he lower lower end of the the ttem emper peratur aturee scale: Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # the coolant ttem If the emper peratur aturee display display is at the the upper end of tthe he ttem emper peratur aturee scale: Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine has cooled down. # Check the coolant level (/ page 280). # Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below the red area. # ÿ Coolant warning lamp (yellow) * The yellow coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes: R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning R The charge air, transmission oil or battery cooling is faulty R The radiator shutters are blocked or defective # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 411 War arning/indicat ning/indicator or lamp ; Engine diagnosis warning lamp Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow Check Engine warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system. The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency mode. In some states, legal requirements stipulate that you must immediately consult a quali ed specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. # Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a quali ed specialist workshop. # * The red electrical malfunction warning lamp is lit. There is a malfunction in the electrics. # Note the messages on the instrument display. 8 * The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while you are driving. There has been pressure loss in the fuel system. The fuel ller cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. # Close the fuel ller cap. Electrical malfunction warning lamp Fuel reserve warning lamp ashes If the fuel ller cap has already been closed correctly: Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # 412 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps War arning/indicat ning/indicator or lamp 8 Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up Possible Possible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 413 Brak Br akes es Warning/indicat arning/indicator or lamp F Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) (USA only) ! Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) (Canada only) ! The electric parking brake (yellow) indicator lamp P Possible ossible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red electric parking brake indicator lamp ashes or is lit. The yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp is also lit in the event of a malfunction. # Note the messages on the instrument display. 414 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps War arning/indicat ning/indicator or lamp é Recuperative Brake System warning lamp (USA only) J Brakes warning lamp (yellow) (Canada only) Possible Possible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions *The yellow é warning lamp (USA only) or the yellow J brake warning lamp (Canada only) is lit while the vehicle is running. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. # # # Adjust your speed and drive on carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front. If the instrument display shows a display message, observe it. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 415 War arning/indicat ning/indicator or lamp $ Brake warning lamp (USA only) J Brake system warning lamp (Canada only) Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red brake warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. Possible causes: R The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be a ected. R There is insu cient brake uid in the brake uid reservoir. # Note the messages on the instrument display. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations. # Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake uid level If the brake uid level is too low, the braking e ect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Do not add brake uid. 416 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Driving Dr iving systems systems War arning/indicat ning/indicator or lamp Possible Possible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions Warning lamp for distance warning function * The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected. If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed. # Be prepared to brake immediately. # Increase the distance. Ó * The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on. Due to dirty sensors or a malfunction, the system is not available or the range of functions is restricted. # Note the messages on the instrument display. L Active Brake Assist warning lamp ê Active Brake Assist warning lamp Function of Active Brake Assist (/ page 190). * The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on. The system is switched o or the range of functions has been automatically restricted. This may be the case if the driver is not wearing a seat belt or another driving system has been activated. # Observe the notes on Active Brake Assist (/ page 190). Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 417 War arning/indicat ning/indicator or lamp Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Suspension warning lamp (yellow) * The yellow AIR BODY CONTROL warning lamp is lit. The yellow DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL warning lamp is lit. A malfunction has occurred in the AIR BODY CONTROL. A malfunction has occurred in the DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL. # Note the messages on the instrument display. ä Driving Dr iving safety safety systems systems War arning/indicat ning/indicator or lamp ! ABS warning lamp Possible Possible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. ABS is malfunctioning. If an additional warning tone sounds, EBD is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the instrument display. & WARNING There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning The wheels may lock during braking. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o . 418 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps War arning/indicat ning/indicator or lamp Possible Possible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions # # Drive on carefully. Have the brake system checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. ÷ * The yellow ESP® warning lamp ashes while the vehicle is in motion. One or more wheels have reached their grip limit (/ page 172). # Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. ÷ * The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the instrument display. ESP® warning lamp ashes ESP® warning lamp lights up & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP® checked at a quali ed specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 419 War arning/indicat ning/indicator or lamp å ESP® OFF warning lamp Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. ESP® is deactivated. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative. & WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivated ESP® does not act to stabilize the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited. # Drive on carefully. # Deactivate ESP® only for as long as the situation requires. If ESP® cannot be activated, ESP® is malfunctioning. # Have ESP® checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. # Observe the notes on deactivating ESP® (/ page 172). 420 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Tir iree pressur pressuree monitor monitor War arning/indicat ning/indicator or lamp h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp ashes h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up Possible Possible causes/consequences causes/consequences and M Solutions *The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) ashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning. & WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning The tire pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires. Tires with insu cient tire pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking. # Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a quali ed specialist workshop. * The yellow tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit. The tire pressure monitoring system has detected tire pressure loss in at least one of the tires. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to insu cient tire pressure R R R The tires can burst. The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. Observe the recommended tire pressures. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary. # Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 421 War arning/indicat ning/indicator or lamp Possible causes/consequences Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. Check the tire pressure and the tires. 422 Index 1, 2, 3 ... 4MA 4MATIC TIC Function................................................ 160 battery ery 12 V batt see On-board electrical system battery (12 V) 12 V socket see Socket (12 V) on-boardd electrical electrical system system 48 V on-boar Operating safety...................................... 23 115 V socket see Socket (115 V) 360° Camera Function................................................ 208 A A/C function Activating/deactivating (control panel)... 136 Activating/deactivating (MBUX multimedia system)....................................... 137 (Anti-lockk Br Braking aking System) System).................... 172 ABS (Anti-loc Acceler cceleration ation see Kickdown Accident and Breakdo Breakdown wn Manag Management ement Mercedes me connect........................... 259 coustic locking locking veri eri cation signal Acoustic Activating/deactivating............................ 65 Active ctive Blind Spot Spot Assist Brake application................................... 201 Function................................................ 199 System limitations.................................. 199 Activ ctivee Brak Brakee Assist Function/notes...................................... 190 Setting................................................... 194 Activ ctivee Distance Distance Assist Assist DIS DISTR TRONIC ONIC Active Emergency Stop Assist................ 188 Active Lane Change Assist..................... 189 Calling up a speed................................. 182 Function................................................ 179 Increasing/decreasing the speed........... 182 Route-based speed adaptation............... 184 Storing a speed...................................... 182 Switching o /deactivating..................... 182 Switching on/activating......................... 182 System limitations.................................. 179 Active ctive Emergency Emergency Stop Stop Assist...................... Assist 188 Active ctive headlamps headlamps......................................... 122 Activ ctivee Lane Change Change Assist Activating/deactivating.......................... Function................................................ ctivee Lane Keeping Keeping Assist Activ Activating/deactivating.......................... Activating/deactivating the warning....... Function................................................ Setting the sensitivity............................. System limits......................................... Activ ctivee Par Parking king Assist Automatic braking function.................... Exiting a parking space.......................... Function................................................ Maneuvering brake function................... Parking.................................................. Pausing.................................................. System limitations.................................. Activ ctivee Service Ser vice Syst System em PLUS PLUS see ASSYST PLUS ctivee Speed Limit Assist Activ Display................................................... Function................................................ Activ ctivee Steer Steering ing Assist Activating/deactivating.......................... 190 189 203 204 202 204 202 220 219 216 221 217 219 216 183 183 188 Index 423 Active Emergency Stop Assist................ Active Lane Change Assist..................... Function................................................ System limits......................................... Activ ctivee Tr Traa c Jam Assist Activating/deactivating.......................... Function................................................ daptiv tivee cruise cruise control control Adap see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Adap daptiv tivee Highbeam Assist Activating/deactivating.......................... Function................................................ Adap daptiv tivee Highbeam Assist Assist Plus Function................................................ Switching on/o .................................... Additives dditives Engine oil............................................... Fuel....................................................... Additives dditives (engine oil) see Additives Additives dditives (fuel) see Fuel 188 189 186 186 186 186 125 124 125 126 347 347 PLUS damping ADS PLUS damping system system see AIR BODY CONTROL er-sales -sales service ser vice A er see ASSYST PLUS Air bag Reduced protection.................................. 43 AIR BOD BODYY C CONTR ONTROL OL Setting................................................... 205 Suspension............................................ 204 Air conditioning menu Calling up.............................................. 136 Air distr ibution distribution Setting................................................... 135 Setting (MBUX multimedia system)......... 137 freshener system Air freshener system see Fragrance system Air inlet see Air-water duct Air pr pressure essure see Tire pressure Air suspension see AIR BODY CONTROL Air vents vents Adjusting (front)..................................... 140 Adjusting (rear)...................................... 141 Glove box............................................... 141 Air vents vents see Air vents Air-conditioning -conditioning syst system em Air see Climate control Air Air-r -recir ecirculation culation mode mode.................................. 138 Air-w ater er duct Air-wat Keeping free.......................................... 281 Airbag Activation................................................ 36 Automatic co-driver airbag shuto ............ 44 Front airbag (driver, front passenger)........ 41 Installation locations................................ 41 Knee airbag............................................. 41 Overview.................................................. 41 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps...... 45 Protection................................................ 42 Side airbag.............................................. 41 Window curtain airbag.............................. 41 Air ow Setting................................................... 135 424 Index Alarm see Panic alarm Alarm system Alarm system see ATA (anti-the alarm system) All-wheel drive drive see 4MATIC Ambient lighting Setting (MBUX multimedia system)......... 128 Android Auto Android Auto see Smartphone integration Animals Pets in the vehicle.................................... 62 Anti-loc Anti-lockk br braking aking system system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) hains Anti-skid cchains see Snow chains Anti-the Anti-the protection protection Immobilizer.............................................. 85 Anti-the protection ection Anti-the prot see ATA (anti-the alarm system) Anticipator protection ection Anticipatoryy occupant prot see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) Apple CarPlay® see Smartphone integration Assistance systems Assistance systems see Driving safety system ASSYSTT PLUS PLUS ASSYS Battery disconnection periods................ 275 Displaying the service due date.............. 274 Function/notes...................................... 274 Regular maintenance work..................... 274 Special service requirements................. 274 ATA (anti-the ATA (anti-the alar alarm m system) system) Activating/deactivating the interior motion sensor.......................................... 88 Arming/disarming the tow-away alarm..... 87 Deactivating the alarm............................. 87 Function.................................................. 86 Interior motion sensor function................ 87 The tow-away alarm function.................... 87 ATTENTION ASSIST Function................................................ 176 Setting................................................... 177 System limitations.................................. 176 Att ttention ention assist assistant ant see ATTENTION ASSIST uthor horized ized Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz Center Center Aut see Quali ed specialist workshop Aut uthor horized ized work workshop shop see Quali ed specialist workshop Aut utomatic omatic co-driv co-driver er airbag shut shutoo Function of co-driver airbag shuto .......... 44 utomatic omatic dist distance ance contr control ol Aut see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Aut utomatic omatic dr driving iving lights lights................................ 120 Aut utomatic omatic engine st start art see ECO start/stop function Aut utomatic omatic engine stop stop see ECO start/stop function Aut utomatic omatic front front passeng passenger er airbag shut shutoo PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps...... 45 utomatic mirr mirror or ffolding olding function Automatic Activating/deactivating.......................... 134 Automatic utomatic seat adjus adjustment tment Setting..................................................... 96 Index 425 Automatic utomatic transmission transmission DIRECT SELECT lever............................. Drive program display............................ Drive programs...................................... DYNAMIC SELECT switch....................... Engaging drive position.......................... Engaging reverse gear............................ Kickdown............................................... Manual gearshi ing................................ Selecting park position........................... Steering wheel paddle shi ers................ Transmission position display................. Transmission positions........................... 156 155 154 154 158 157 159 158 158 158 156 156 B Back seat Back see Seats Bad weat her light......................................... light 123 weather BAS (Brak (Brakee Assist Assist Syst System) em)........................... 172 Batter eryy (Smar (SmartKe tKey) y) Batt Replacing................................................. 66 Batt Batter eryy (v (vehicle) ehicle) Charging (Remote Online)...................... 144 Notes..................................................... 296 Notes (starting assistance and charging)........................................................ 298 Belt see Seat belt Spott Assist Blind Spo Activating/deactivating.......................... Function................................................ System limitations.................................. Blower Blower see Climate control Br Brak akee Assist Assist System System see BAS (Brake Assist System) Brak Brakee uid Notes..................................................... Brakee for Brak force ce dis distr tribution ibution EBD (electronic brake force distribution)....................................................... Brak akes es Br ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).............. Active Brake Assist................................. BAS (Brake Assist System)..................... Breaking-in notes................................... Driving tips............................................ 202 199 199 348 174 172 190 172 145 147 EBD (electronic brake force distribution)....................................................... 174 HOLD function....................................... 174 Limited braking e ect (salt-treated roads).................................................... 147 New/replaced brake linings/brake discs...................................................... 145 Braking assistance Braking assistance see BAS (Brake Assist System) Breakdo wn Breakdown Changing a wheel................................... 332 Overview of the help functions................. 16 Roadside Assistance................................ 22 Tow-starting........................................... 305 Towing away.......................................... 302 Transporting the vehicle......................... 303 Breakdo wn Breakdown see Flat tire Breaking-in eaking-in notes notes......................................... 145 Br Butt Buttons ons Steering wheel....................................... 225 426 Index C Calls Mercedes me......................................... Camera Information............................................ Camera see 360° Camera see Dashcam see Rear view camera Car key see SmartKey Car wash wash see Care Car wash (care) e)............................................ wash (car Car-t Car-to-X o-X-Communication -Communication Displaying hazard warnings.................... Care Air-water duct........................................ Automatic car wash............................... Carpet................................................... Decorative foil........................................ Display................................................... EASY-PACK trunk box............................. 256 170 281 249 281 281 286 284 286 286 Exterior lighting...................................... 285 Head-up Display..................................... 286 Headliner............................................... 286 Paint...................................................... 283 Plastic trim............................................ 286 Power washer........................................ 282 Real wood/trim elements...................... 286 Rear view camera................................... 285 Seat belt................................................ 286 Seat cover............................................. 286 Sensors................................................. 285 Steering wheel....................................... 286 Surround view camera........................... 285 Tailpipes................................................ 285 Washing by hand.................................... 283 Wheels/rims.......................................... 285 Windows................................................ 285 Wiper blades.......................................... 285 Cargo go tie-down tie-down rrings ings.................................... 110 Car Carpe pett (Care) (Care)............................................... 286 Car Chang Changee of address address......................................... 22 Change ownership ship...................................... 22 Change of owner Changing a wheel Preparation............................................ 332 Raising the vehicle................................. 334 Changing a wheel see Emergency spare wheel Changing ggears ears Manually................................................ 158 Changing hub caps....................................... 333 caps Charging Charging Notes on wireless charging.................... 116 On-board electrical system battery (12 V).................................................... 299 USB port................................................ 116 level el (AIR BOD BODYY C CONTR ONTROL) OL) Chassis lev Setting................................................... 205 Child safe safety ty lock Rear door................................................. 61 Rear side windows................................... 62 Child seat Attaching (notes)...................................... 53 Basic instructions.................................... 49 Front-passenger seat (notes).................... 59 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) (installing)................ 54 Notes on risks and dangers...................... 50 Securing on the front passenger seat....... 59 Securing on the rear seat......................... 58 Index 427 Top Tether................................................ 56 Children en Childr Avoiding dangers in the vehicle................ 50 Basic instructions.................................... 49 Special seat belt retractor........................ 53 Chock Storage location..................................... 332 Chock see Chock City lighting.................................................. lighting 123 Cleaning see Care Climate Climate control control Activating/deactivating.......................... 136 Activating/deactivating the A/C function (control panel)................................. 136 Activating/deactivating the A/C function (MBUX multimedia system).............. 137 Activating/deactivating the synchronization function (control panel)............. 137 Activating/deactivating the synchronization function (MBUX multimedia system).................................................. 138 Air-recirculation mode............................ 138 Automatic control.................................. Calling up the air conditioning menu....... Climate style function............................ Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control....................................... Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control....................................... Defrosting the windshield....................... Filling capacity for refrigerant and PAG oil................................................... Front air vents........................................ Glove box air vent.................................. Information on the windshield heater...... Inserting/removing the acon (fragrance system)...................................... Ionization............................................... Note...................................................... Rear air vents......................................... Refrigerant............................................. Removing condensation from the windows...................................................... Residual heat......................................... Setting (MBUX multimedia system)......... Setting the air distribution...................... Setting the air ow.................................. Setting the climate style......................... 137 136 137 135 135 135 351 140 141 140 139 138 135 141 350 138 138 136 135 135 137 Setting the fragrance system.................. 138 Setting the vehicle interior temperature....................................................... 135 Switching the rear window heater on/o ................................................... 135 Ventilating the vehicle (convenience opening).................................................. 79 Climat Climatee ssty tyle le Function................................................ 137 Setting................................................... 137 Co-driv er airbag shuto shuto Co-driver see Automatic co-driver airbag shuto Cockpit Cockpit Overview.................................................... 6 Co ee cup symbol see ATTENTION ASSIST detection ection (park (parked ed vvehicle) ehicle) Collision det Setting................................................... 168 Combination switch..................................... 120 switch Component-speci infor ormation mation................... 342 Component-speci c inf Comput er Computer see On-board computer Connecting tthe he parcel parcel net............................ net 110 428 Index Convenience closing...................................... Convenience closing 79 Convenience opening..................................... 79 Convenience opening Coolant (engine) Capacity................................................ 349 Level check............................................ 280 Notes..................................................... 349 Cooling see Climate control Copyr Copyrights ights License.................................................... 34 Trademarks.............................................. 34 Corner nering ing light............................................. light 122 Cor Cr Cross oss tr traa c (w (war arning) ning) see Maneuvering assistance Cross oss Tra Tra c Alert........................................ Alert 221 Cr Crosswind Crosswind Assist Function/notes...................................... 173 Cruise control ol Cruise contr Activating............................................... 178 Buttons.................................................. 178 Calling up a speed................................. 178 Deactivating........................................... 178 Function................................................ 177 Requirements:....................................... 178 Selecting............................................... 178 Setting a speed...................................... 178 Storing a speed...................................... 178 System limitations.................................. 177 Customer Assistance Center Center (CA (CAC) C)................ 28 Customer Assistance Customer omer Relations Relations Department Depar tment..................... 28 Cust D Dashcam Notes..................................................... 251 Selecting a USB device.......................... 251 Starting/stopping a video recording....... 251 Data acquisition uisition Data acq Vehicle..................................................... 29 Data protection ection rights rights Data prot Data storage............................................ 32 Dataa stor storage age Dat Data protection rights.............................. 32 Electronic control units............................ 29 Online services........................................ 32 Vehicle..................................................... 29 Daytime rrunning Daytime unning lamp lamp mode see Daytime running lamps Daytime ytime rrunning unning lamps lamps Da Activating/deactivating.......................... 127 Deactivating the alarm alarm (AT (ATA) A)........................... 87 Deactivating the Dealership Dealership see Quali ed specialist workshop Declaration ation of conf confor ormity mity Declar Wireless vehicle components................... 25 Decorativ ativee ffoil oil (cleaning instr instructions) uctions)........... 284 Decor De nitions (tir (tires es and loading)....................... loading) 326 Destination tination entry Des Entering a POI or address....................... 246 Detecting Detecting inattentiv inattentiveness eness see ATTENTION ASSIST Diagnostics tics connection connection.................................. 26 Diagnos Digital Digital Oper Operat ator's or's Manual............................... Manual 18 Dinghy towing Dinghy towing see Tow-bar system lever er DIRECT SELECT lev Engaging drive position.......................... 158 Engaging neutral.................................... 157 Index 429 Engaging park position automatically...... Engaging reverse gear............................ Function................................................ Selecting park position........................... Displayy (care) (care)............................................... Displa Displayy (MBUX multimedia system) system) Displa Home screen......................................... Operating.............................................. Display Display (on-board (on-board comput computer) er) Displays on the instrument display......... Display the windshield Display in the see Head-up Display Displayy message Displa Calling up (on-board computer).............. Notes..................................................... Display messages Display messages ç - - - mph........................................ h - - - mph........................................ # 12 V Battery See Operator's Manual.................................................. Û 48 V Battery See Operator's Manual.................................................. 158 157 156 158 286 232 233 227 353 353 379 379 395 397 : Active Headlamps Inoperative....... é ATTENTION ASSIST Inoperative..... é ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break!.................................................... : Automatic Headlamp Mode Inoperative............................................. $ Check Brake Fluid Level................ + Check Coolant Level See Operator's Manual......................................... 5 Check Engine Oil At Next Refueling...................................................... 5 Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart).................................................... : Check Le Low Beam (example)... h Check Tires.................................. ¥ Check Washer Fluid...................... ÿ Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine O ...................................... ! Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual......................................... 360 378 379 360 377 367 403 403 359 399 366 368 390 ÷ Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual......................................... Á Don't Forget Your Key................... É Drive More Slowly......................... 5 Engine Oil Level Cannot Be Measured.............................................. 5 Engine Oil Level Low Stop Vehicle Turn Engine O ................................. 5 Engine Oil Pressure Stop Switch O Engine.............................................. 5 Engine Oil Reduce Oil Level........... 6 Front Le Malfunction Service Required (example)................................ 8 Fuel Level Low.............................. 8 Gas Cap Loose............................. ! Inoperative See Operator's Manual.................................................. ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual.................................................. 392 358 389 405 404 405 404 354 369 369 391 392 430 Index T Inoperative See Operator's Manual.................................................. G Inoperative................................... : Intell. Light System Inoperative..... Á Key Being Initialized Please Wait.... Á Key Not Detected (red display message)............................................... Á Key Not Detected (white display message)............................................... 6 Le Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required (example)...... ¢ Lowering....................................... ä Malfunction Drive at Max. 50 mph....................................................... : Malfunction See Operator’s Manual.................................................. Á Obtain a New Key......................... ç O ................................................ ë O ................................................ 393 394 361 359 358 358 354 389 388 360 357 380 378 F Parking Brake See Operator's Manual.................................................. h Please Correct Tire Pressure......... F Please Release Parking Brake........ Ý Please Wait Charging 48 V Battery…..................................................... _ Rear Le Backrest Not Latched (example)................................. Á Replace Key Battery...................... # See Operator's Manual................. 6 SRS Malfunction Service Required................................................ Ù Steering Malfunction Increased Physical E ort See Operator's Manual.... Ù Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately See Operator's Manual....... # Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running....................................................... # Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual.................................................. 373 400 376 397 366 357 395 354 364 364 396 396 É Stop Vehicle Vehicle Too Low........ ç Suspended................................... : Switch O Lights........................... : Switch On Headlamps................... á Temporarily Unavailable Camera View Restricted...................................... ¸ Temporarily Unavailable Sensors are Dirty......................................... F Turn On the Ignition to Release the Parking Brake................................... d Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition O Before Exiting................. É Vehicle Rising Please Wait............. É Vehicle Rising............................... h Warning Tire Malfunction.............. h Wheel Sensor(s) Missing............... Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual........ Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative........ 388 380 361 360 387 386 377 363 389 389 400 399 384 384 Index 431 Active Brake Assist Functions Currently Limited See Operator's Manual..... Active Brake Assist Functions Limited See Operator's Manual.......................... Active Distance Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual........ Active Distance Assist Inoperative.......... Active Distance Assist Now Available...... Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual........ Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative... Active Steering Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual........ Active Steering Assist Inoperative........... Active Steering Asst. Currently Unavailable Due to Multiple Emergency Stops........................................... Active Stop & Go Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual........ 393 394 380 380 381 385 385 381 381 381 382 Active Stop & Go Assist Inoperative See Operator's Manual.......................... Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual........ Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative.... Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual.................................................. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Inoperative................................................... Apply Brake to Shi from 'P'................... Apply Brake to Shi to 'R'...................... Apply Brake to Shi to D or R................. Auxiliary Battery Malfunction (red display message)........................................ Auxiliary Battery Malfunction (white display message).................................... Beginning Emergency Stop..................... Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual..................... 383 361 361 362 362 369 370 370 372 371 382 383 Blind Spot Assist Inoperative.................. 384 Cannot Start Engine See Operator's Manual.......................................... 367, 397 Check Brake Pads See Operator's Manual.................................................. 378 Check Tire Pressure Soon...................... 401 Check Tire Pressure Then Restart Run Flat Indicator......................................... 402 Cruise Control Inoperative...................... 379 Cruise Control O .................................. 379 Decrease Speed.................................... 401 Device Detected at Diagnostics Connection See Operator's Manual.............. 395 Driver's Door Open & Transmission Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away...... 370 Engine Can Now Be Started................... 398 Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual................................. 355 Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual................................. 355 432 Index Hazard Warning Flashers Malfunctioning......................................................... Head-up Display Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual..................... Head-up Display Inoperative................... N Permanently Active Risk of Rolling Away...................................................... Only Shi to 'P' when Vehicle is Stationary................................................... Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Operator's Manual............... Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual.......................... PRE-SAFE Impulse Side Inoperative See Operator's Manual.......................... PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Operator's Manual.................................................. Reversing Not Possible Service Required................................................ Run Flat Indicator Inoperative................. 362 363 363 370 369 390 359 357 356 371 402 Service Required Do Not Shi Gears Visit Dealer............................................ Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running Wait Transmission Cooling...................... Tire Press. Monitor Currently Unavailable....................................................... Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative............... Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors....................................... Tires Overheated.................................... To Deselect P or N, Depress Brake and Start Engine.................................... To switch engine o , press and hold Start/Stop button for at least 3 seconds or press 3 times............................ Tra c Sign Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual..................... Tra c Sign Assist Inoperative................. Transmission Malfunction Stop............... Wiper Malfunctioning............................. 371 371 398 398 399 401 370 367 383 383 371 366 Dist Distance ance contr control ol see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC DISTR ONIC DISTRONIC see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Door Child safety lock (rear door)..................... 61 Locking/unlocking (emergency key)......... 71 Opening (from inside)............................... 68 Power closing function............................. 70 Unlocking (from inside)............................ 68 control panel......................................... Door control panel 14 DOT DOT,, Tir Tiree Identi cation Number (TIN) (TIN)............ 322 Drawbar wbar Dra see Tow-bar system Dr Drinking inking and dr driving iving..................................... 147 Driv ivee Awa Awayy Assist Assist......................................... 220 Dr Driv Drivee position Inserting................................................ 158 Driv program am display.................................. display 155 Drivee progr Driv ivee progr programs ams Dr see DYNAMIC SELECT Index 433 Driv Dr iver's er's seat see Seat Driving iving safety safety system system Dr ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).............. Active Brake Assist................................. BAS (Brake Assist System)..................... Cameras................................................ EBD (electronic brake force distribution)....................................................... ESP® Crosswind Assist.......................... Overview................................................ Radar and ultrasonic sensors................. Responsibility......................................... STEER CONTROL................................... Driving system em Driving syst DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL.................... Driving system Driving system see 360° Camera see Active Blind Spot Assist see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC see Active Emergency Stop Assist see Active Lane Change Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist see Active Parking Assist see Active Speed Limit Assist 172 190 172 170 174 173 171 170 170 174 204 see Active Steering Assist see AIR BODY CONTROL see ATTENTION ASSIST see Blind Spot Assist see Cruise control see Driving safety system see HOLD function see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC see Rear view camera see Tra c Sign Assist Dr Driving iving tips Breaking-in notes................................... Drinking and driving............................... General driving tips................................ Optimized acceleration.......................... Drowsiness detection Drowsiness detection see ATTENTION ASSIST DYN YNAMIC AMIC BODY BODY C CONTR ONTROL OL Suspension............................................ Dynamic handling control system control system see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) DYN YNAMIC AMIC SELECT Calling up the fuel consumption indicator...................................................... Con guring drive program I.................... Displaying engine data........................... Displaying vehicle data........................... Drive program display............................ Drive programs...................................... Function................................................ Operating (DYNAMIC SELECT switch)..... Selecting the drive program................... 145 147 147 146 204 156 E E10.............................................................. E10 Easy entry feature entr y feature Function/notes...................................... Setting................................................... Easy exit feature exit feature Function/notes...................................... Setting................................................... EASY-PAC K trunk trunk box EASY-PACK Adjusting the height to any position........ Care...................................................... Installing/removing................................ EBD (electronic brakee ffor orce ce distr distribution) ibution) (electronic brak Function/notes...................................... 155 156 156 155 154 154 155 155 346 101 102 101 102 111 286 112 174 434 Index ECO EC O Assist Function/notes...................................... ECO ECO display Function................................................ ECO O star start/st t/stop op function EC Switching o /on.................................... Electric par Electric parking king brake brake Applying automatically........................... Applying/releasing manually.................. Emergency braking................................ Releasing automatically.......................... Electronic Stability Progr Program am Electronic Stability see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Emergency Emergency First-aid kit (so sided).......................... Overview of the help functions................. Re ective safety vest............................. Removing the warning triangle............... Setting up the warning triangle............... Emergency ency br braking aking...................................... Emerg Emergency braking Emergency braking see BAS (Brake Assist System) 152 152 151 166 168 168 167 290 16 289 289 290 168 Emerg Emergency ency call see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Emergency ency key Emerg Locking/unlocking the doors................... 71 Emergency ency operation operation mode Emerg Starting the vehicle................................ 144 Emergency release Emergency release Trunk lid (from inside)............................... 77 Emergency spare wheel Emergency spare Notes..................................................... 338 Emergency Tensioning Devices Devices Emergency Tensioning Activation................................................ 36 Engine Engine number....................................... 343 Starting (emergency operation mode).... 144 Starting (Remote Online)........................ 145 Engine data Displaying.............................................. 156 Engine number number............................................. 343 Engine oil Additives................................................ 347 Capacity................................................ 348 Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick.................................................. Checking the oil level using the onboard computer..................................... MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval.................. Quality................................................... Re lling.................................................. Error Error message see Display message (Electronic onic St Stability ability Control) Control) ESC (Electr see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ESP® Crosswind Assist.................................... ® (Electronic onic St Stability ability Progr Program) am) ESP (Electr Activating/deactivating.......................... Function/notes...................................... Exter ior lighting Exterior Care...................................................... Exter ior lighting Exterior see Lights Exter Exterior ior mirr mirrors ors Automatic mirror folding function........... Parking position..................................... 277 278 348 348 278 173 174 172 285 134 133 Index 435 F Fatigue detection detection see ATTENTION ASSIST Firs irst-aid t-aid kit (so sided) sided)................................. 290 Flacon Inserting/removing................................ 139 Flat tire Changing a wheel................................... 332 MOExtended tires.................................. 291 Notes..................................................... 290 TIREFIT kit.............................................. 292 Flat towing towing see Tow-bar system Floor mats................................................... 118 mats Fog light (enhanced)..................................... (enhanced) 123 covering ing Foil cover Radar and ultrasonic sensors................. 170 Fragr Fragrance ance see Fragrance system Fragr ance system system Fragrance Inserting/removing the acon................ 139 Free Free so w ware are................................................. 34 Freq equencies uencies Two-way radio........................................ 341 Front (driver er,, front front passenger) passenger).............. 41 Front airbag (driv Front passenger Front passenger seat see Seat Fuel Additives................................................ 347 E10........................................................ 346 Fuel reserve........................................... 347 Gasoline................................................ 346 Quality (gasoline)................................... 346 Refueling............................................... 160 Sulfur content........................................ 346 Tank content.......................................... 347 consumption indicator indicator Fuel consumption Calling up.............................................. 156 Function seat see Door control panel Fuses Before replacing a fuse.......................... 305 Dashboard fuse box............................... 307 Fuse assignment diagram....................... 305 Fuse box in the engine compartment...... 306 Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell........................................................ 307 Fuse box in the trunk............................. 308 Notes..................................................... 305 Fuses see Fuses G Garag agee door opener Gar Clearing the memory.............................. 166 Gar Garag agee door openers Opening/closing the door...................... 166 Programming buttons............................. 164 Resolving problems................................ 166 Synchronizing the rolling code................ 165 Gasoline...................................................... 346 Gasoline Gearshi ecommendation........................... 159 Gearshi recommendation Genuine parts par ts................................................ 20 Glide mode.................................................. mode 159 Glove Glove box Air vent.................................................. 141 436 Index H Handbr Handbrake ake see Electric parking brake Handling (unusual)....................................... 309 (unusual) ACCESS CCESS................................... 75 HANDS-FREE A Hazar Hazardd w war arning ning lights................................... lights 121 Hazardous substances ances Hazardous subst Information.............................................. 23 Head rres estr traint aint Front (adjusting mechanically).................. 94 Rear (adjusting)........................................ 95 Rear (removing/installing)........................ 95 Head-up Display Adjusting brightness (on-board computer).................................................... 228 Adjusting display elements (on-board computer).............................................. 228 Care...................................................... 286 Function................................................ 227 Menu (on-board computer)..................... 228 Operating the memory function.............. 103 Setting the position (on-board computer).................................................... 228 Switching on/o .................................... 229 Headlamps ps Headlam see Automatic driving lights (care)........................................... 286 Headliner (care) Heating see Climate control Help call see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system High beam Activating/deactivating.......................... 120 High beam see Adaptive Highbeam Assist see Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus High-beam asher asher........................................ 120 Highway Highway mode mode............................................. 123 star artt assist............................................. assist 175 Hill st HOLD function Function/notes...................................... 174 Switching on/o .................................... 175 Home screen display) screen (media display) Overview................................................ 232 Hood Opening/closing.................................... 275 I Identi cation plate Engine................................................... 343 Refrigerant............................................. 350 Vehicle.................................................. 343 Ignition key see SmartKey Immobilizer Immobilizer.................................................... 85 Indicator Indicator lamp see Warning/indicator lamp driv ivee pr progr ogram am Individual dr Con guring............................................ 155 Selecting............................................... 155 Inside rear rearvie view w mirror mirror Anti-glare mode (automatic)................... 132 Inside rear view w mirror mirror rearvie see Outside mirrors Inspection see ASSYST PLUS Index 437 Instr Ins trument ument cluster cluster Function/notes.............................. 223, 224 Instr ument display Instrument Function/notes...................................... 224 Instrument cluster.................................... 10 Overview of displays............................... 227 Warning/indicator lamps........................ 405 Ins Instr trument ument display display and on-board on-board comput puter er Function/notes...................................... 223 Intellig elligent ent Light Syst System em Int Activating/deactivating.......................... 123 Active headlamps................................... 122 Adaptive Highbeam Assist...................... 124 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............... 125 Bad weather light................................... 123 City lighting............................................ 123 Cornering light....................................... 122 Fog light (enhanced).............................. 123 Highway mode....................................... 123 Overview................................................ 122 Inter erior ior lighting Int Adjusting............................................... 127 Ambient lighting..................................... 128 Reading lamp......................................... 127 Switch-o delay time.............................. 128 Int Inter erior ior motion motion sensor Activating/deactivating............................ 88 Function.................................................. 87 Inter erne nett radio radio Int see TuneIn Ionization Activating/deactivating (MBUX multimedia system)....................................... 138 iPhone® see Smartphone integration J Jack Storage location..................................... 332 Jump-st artt connection Jump-star General notes........................................ 298 K KEYLESS-GO Deactivating a function............................ 65 Locking/unlocking the vehicle................. 68 Problem................................................... 69 Unlocking setting..................................... 65 Kickdo wn Kickdown Using..................................................... 159 Knee airbag.................................................... 41 airbag L Labeling (tires) (tires) see Tire labeling Lamp see Interior lighting Lam Lampp (ins (instr trument ument display) display) see Warning/indicator lamp Lane detection (automatic) omatic) detection (aut see Active Lane Keeping Assist Keeping eeping Assist Lane K see Active Lane Keeping Assist Language Notes..................................................... 243 Setting................................................... 243 LATCH-type child seat anc anchor hor LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child Installing.................................................. 54 438 Index Level Lev el control control system system see AIR BODY CONTROL Light switch Overview................................................ Lighting see Interior lighting see Lights Lights Active headlamps................................... Adaptive Highbeam Assist...................... Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............... Automatic driving lights.......................... Bad weather light................................... City lighting............................................ Combination switch............................... Cornering light....................................... Fog light (enhanced).............................. Hazard warning lights............................. High beam............................................. High-beam asher.................................. Highway mode....................................... Intelligent Light System.......................... Light switch........................................... Low beam.............................................. Parking lights......................................... 119 122 124 125 120 123 123 120 122 123 121 120 120 123 122 119 119 119 Rear fog light......................................... 119 Responsibility for lighting systems.......... 119 Setting the exterior lighting switch-o delay time.............................................. 127 Standing lights....................................... 119 Switching the Intelligent Light System on/o ................................................... 123 Switching the surround lighting on/o ... 127 Turn signal light...................................... 120 Limited Warr Limited Warranty anty Vehicle..................................................... 29 Live Tra c Inf Infor ormation mation Live Tra Switching the tra c information display on................................................... 249 indexx (tires) (tires)......................................... 324 Load inde Load-bearing ing capacity (tires) (tires)........................ 324 Load-bear Loading Cargo tie-down rings.............................. 110 De nitions............................................. 326 Notes..................................................... 104 Roof luggage rack.................................. 113 Loading guidelines....................................... 104 guidelines Loading infor mation table table............................. 316 information Loads Fixing..................................................... 104 Locking/unloc king Locking/unlocking Emergency key......................................... 71 KEYLESS-GO............................................ 68 Switching the automatic locking feature on/o .............................................. 70 Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside................................................. 68 Low beam Low Activating/deactivating.......................... 119 Lubr ubricant icant additives additives see Additives uggage age Lugg Parcel net.............................................. 110 Securing................................................ 104 Lumbar support see Lumbar support (4-way) supportt (4-way) (4-way)................................. 93 Lumbar suppor M Maintenance Maintenance Vehicle..................................................... 22 Index 439 Maintenance Maintenance see ASSYST PLUS Malfunction Restraint system...................................... 36 Maneuver ering ing aid Maneuv see Maneuvering assistance Maneuv Maneuver ering ing assistance assistance Activating/deactivating.......................... 222 Cross Tra c Alert.................................. 221 Drive Away Assist................................... 220 Maneuvering brake function................... 221 Maneuver ering ing brak brakee function......................... function 221 Maneuv Map Displaying online map contents.............. 249 Displaying weather information.............. 249 Moving................................................... 248 Selecting the map orientation................ 248 Setting the map scale............................ 248 Switching freeway information on/o ..... 248 Massag Massagee progr program am Overview.................................................. 97 Massage progr ograms ams Massage pr Resetting the settings.............................. 97 Selecting the front seats.......................... 97 rating.................................... Maximum load rating permissible missible load Maximum per Calculation example............................... Determining........................................... Maximum tire pressure................................. tire pressure MBUX Int Inter erior ior Assist Assistant ant Overview................................................ Switching the reading light on/o (contactless).......................................... Switching the search light on/o (contactless).......................................... MBUX multimedia system system Activating/deactivating standby mode... Con guring drive program I.................... Home screen......................................... Notes..................................................... Operating the touchscreen..................... Overview................................................ Restoring (factory settings).................... Setting collision detection (parked vehicle).................................................. Setting route-based speed adaptation.... Setting the air distribution...................... Setting the fragrance system.................. 323 318 317 323 236 237 237 169 155 232 230 233 230 244 168 185 137 138 Standby mode function.......................... 169 Switching ionization on/o .................... 138 system MBUX multimedia system see Display (MBUX multimedia system) see MBUX Interior Assistant Mechanical Mechanical key Inserting/removing.................................. 66 Media Overview of the functions and symbols... 266 Media mode Connecting Bluetooth® audio equipment...................................................... 267 Medical aids................................................... 27 aids Memoryy function Memor Function................................................ 102 Head-up Display..................................... 103 Operating.............................................. 103 Outside mirrors...................................... 103 Seat....................................................... 103 Steering wheel....................................... 103 (on-boardd comput computer) er) Menu (on-boar Head-up Display..................................... 228 Overview................................................ 225 440 Index Mercedes Mer cedes me app Information............................................ Mercedes Mercedes me calls Arranging a service appointment............ Calling the Mercedes-Benz customer center.................................................... Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center a er automatic accident or breakdown detection............................. Information............................................ Making a call via the overhead control panel..................................................... Transferred data..................................... Mercedes Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management... Information............................................ Transferred data..................................... Mer Mercedescedes-AMG AMG vehicles vehicles Notes..................................................... Mercedes-Benz emergency call syst system em Mercedes-Benz emergency Automatic emergency call...................... Information............................................ Information about data transfer.............. Manual emergency call.......................... 260 257 256 257 256 256 258 259 259 260 142 264 263 265 264 Overview................................................ Message Message (instr (instrument ument displa display) y) see Display message Messag Messagee memory......................................... memory Mirrors Mirrors see Outside mirrors Mobile phone Notes on wireless charging.................... Mobile phone see Smartphone integration see Telephone Model type see Vehicle identi cation plate MOExtended tires........................................ MOExtended tires MULTIBEAM MULTIBEAM LED.......................................... LED steer eering ing wheel Multifunction st Overview of buttons............................... Multifunction steer ing wheel steering see Steering wheel system em Multimedia syst see MBUX multimedia system 263 353 116 291 122 225 N Navig vigation ation Notes..................................................... Overview................................................ Showing/hiding the menu...................... Switching on.......................................... Navig ation Navigation see Destination entry see Map see Route eutral al Neutr Engaging................................................ O Occupant safety safety see Airbag see Automatic co-driver airbag shuto see Child seat see Pets in the vehicle see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) see PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) 244 245 244 244 157 Index 441 see Restraint system see Seat belt Oil see Engine oil On-board computer er On-board comput Displaying the service due date.............. 274 Head-up Display menu........................... 228 Instrument display................................. 227 Menu overview....................................... 225 Operating.............................................. 225 On-boar On-boardd diagnostics diagnostics interf interface ace see Diagnostics connection On-boar On-boardd electrical electrical system system batter batteryy (12 V) Charging................................................ 299 Replacing............................................... 300 Starting assistance................................ 299 On-boardd electronics electronics On-boar Notes..................................................... 340 Two-way radios...................................... 340 Online ser services vices Data storage............................................ 32 Open-source ce so ware ware.................................... 34 Open-sour the tr Opening the trunk unk lid using your your ffoot oot HANDS-FREE ACCESS............................. 75 Operating ating uids Oper Additives (fuel)....................................... 347 Brake uid............................................. 348 Coolant (engine).................................... 349 Engine oil............................................... 347 Fuel (gasoline)........................................ 346 Notes..................................................... 344 Refrigerant (air conditioning system)...... 350 Windshield washer uid.......................... 350 Oper Operating ating safety safety 48 V on-board electrical system............... 23 Declaration of conformity (wireless vehicle components)................................ 25 Information.............................................. 23 Operating system Operating system see On-board computer Operat ator's or's Manual Oper Vehicle equipment................................... 21 Operator's Operat or's Manual (digital) (digital)............................. 18 Optimized acceleration Optimized acceleration Activating............................................... 146 mirrors Outside mirrors Anti-glare mode (automatic)................... 132 Folding in/out........................................ 131 Operating the memory function.............. 103 Setting................................................... 131 Over erhead head contr control ol panel Ov Overview.................................................. 12 P Paint (cleaning instr instructions) uctions)......................... 283 Paint code................................................... code 343 Panel heating Setting..................................................... 99 Panic alarm Arming/disarming.................................... 65 anorama ama rroof oof with with power power tilt/sliding Panor panel see Sliding sunroof arkk position Par Engaging................................................ 158 Selecting automatically.......................... 158 Par arking king see Electric parking brake 442 Index Par arking king aid see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC arking king Assist Assist P PARK ARKTR TRONIC ONIC Par Activating....................................... 214, 215 Adjusting warning tones......................... 215 Function................................................ 211 Switching o .................................. 214, 215 System limitations.................................. 211 Par arking king assistance assistance syst systems ems see Active Parking Assist Par arking king brake brake see Electric parking brake arking king for for an eext xtended ended period period..................... 169 Par Par arking king lights............................................... lights 119 Par arking king option option Selecting............................................... 249 arking king position Par Exterior mirrors...................................... 133 Storing the position of the frontpassenger outside mirror using reverse gear........................................... 133 Par arking king service ser vice Selecting parking options....................... 249 PASSENGER ASSENGER AIR BAG BAG status status display see Automatic front passenger airbag shuto Payload load Pay Calculation example............................... 318 Determining the maximum..................... 317 erfume fume Per see Fragrance system Per erfume fume atomizer atomizer Setting................................................... 138 Per erfume fume vial see Fragrance system Per eriod iod out of use Activating/deactivating standby mode... 169 Standby mode function.......................... 169 Permissible ermissible to towing wing methods methods......................... 301 Pets the vvehicle ehicle.......................................... 62 Pets in the Plastic Plastic trim trim (Car (Care) e)........................................ 286 Power er closing function Pow Door........................................................ 70 Pow Power er supply Switching on (start/stop button)............ 142 Power washer (care) (care)..................................... 282 Power washer PRE-S PRE-SAFE AFE® (anticipator (anticipatoryy occupant protection) protection) Function.................................................. 48 PRE-SAFE® Sound................................... 48 Reversing measures................................. 48 PRE-SAFE Impulse Side PRE-SAFE® Impulse Activation................................................ 36 Function.................................................. 49 PRE-S PRE-SAFE AFE® PLUS PLUS (anticipator (anticipatoryy occupant protection protection plus) Function.................................................. 48 Reversing measures................................. 48 Prevent Prev entativ ativee occupant protection protection system system see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) Proo le Pr Creating a new pro le............................ 239 Notes..................................................... 238 Selecting pro le options......................... 239 Progr Programs ams see DYNAMIC SELECT Index 443 Protecting the Protecting the en envir vironment onment Notes....................................................... 20 Protection ection agains againstt collision Prot see Maneuvering brake function Pulling away see Driving tips Q QR code Rescue card............................................. 29 Quali ed specialis specialistt work workshop shop......................... 27 R ultrasonic sensors Radar and ultrasonic Damage................................................. 170 Radio Overview of the functions and symbols... 268 Rain-closing ffeature eature Sliding sunroof......................................... 83 Reading lamp see Interior lighting Reading light Switching on/o (contactless)............... 237 Real wood wood (Car (Care) e).......................................... 286 Rear door (child (child safe safety ty lock) lock)........................... 61 Rear fog fog lamp Switching on/o .................................... 120 Rear seat see Seats Rear view view camera Care...................................................... 285 Function................................................ 206 Rear window Roller sunblind......................................... 85 Rear window window heat heater er...................................... 135 Re ective safe safety ty vest vest.................................... 289 Refr efrig iger erant ant (air conditioning syst system) em) Notes..................................................... 350 Refueling Refueling the vehicle.............................. 160 Regulat egulator oryy radio radio identi cation Indonesia............................................... 342 Small components................................. 342 Regulat egulator oryy radio radio infor information mation Installation clearances........................... 342 Remot emotee Online Charging the starter battery................... 144 Cooling/heating the vehicle interior....... 144 Starting the vehicle................................ 145 Repor eporting ting safety safety defects defects................................. 28 Rescue card card................................................... 29 Reserve Fuel....................................................... 347 esett function (MBUX multimedia system) system).... 244 Rese Residual heat heat............................................... 138 Rest estor oring ing (f (fact actor oryy settings) settings) see Reset function (MBUX multimedia system) Restr estraint aint system system Basic instructions for children.................. 49 Function in an accident............................ 36 Functionality............................................ 35 Malfunction............................................. 36 Protection................................................ 35 Reduced protection.................................. 35 Self-test................................................... 35 Warning lamp........................................... 35 Rev Rever erse se gear gear Engaging................................................ 157 444 Index Rims (care) (care).................................................. 285 Roadside Assistance Assistance (br (breakdo eakdown) wn).................. 22 Roll away away protection protection see HOLD function Roller sunblind Rear window............................................ 85 Side windows........................................... 84 Sliding sunroof......................................... 80 Roof load..................................................... load 352 luggagee rack rack Roof luggag Loading.................................................. 113 Securing................................................ 113 Route Calculating............................................. 247 Selecting options................................... 247 Route oute guidance wit withh augmented augmented reality reality Activating............................................... 247 Displaying street names and house numbers................................................ 247 Route-based oute-based speed adapt adaptation ation Function................................................ 184 Setting................................................... 185 Run- at charact haracter eristics istics MOExtended tires.................................. 291 S Safety systems Safety systems see Driving safety system Satellit ellitee rradio adio Sat Logging in.............................................. 272 Setting music and sport alerts................ 272 Search Search light Switching on/o (contactless)............... 237 Seat 4-way lumbar support.............................. 93 Adjusting (electrically).............................. 93 Adjusting (manually and electrically)......... 90 Adjusting (Seat Comfort).......................... 92 Automatic adjustment.............................. 96 Con guring settings................................. 95 Correct driver's seat position................... 89 Folding back the backrest (rear passenger compartment)....................... 109 Locking the backrest (rear passenger compartment)........................................ 109 Massage program overview...................... 97 Operating the memory function.............. 103 Panel heating........................................... 99 Resetting the settings.............................. 97 Setting options......................................... 14 Workout program overview....................... 97 Seat belt Adjusting the height................................. 40 Care...................................................... 286 Fastening................................................. 40 Protection................................................ 37 Warning lamp........................................... 41 adjustment tment Seat belt adjus Activating/deactivating............................ 40 Function.................................................. 40 Seat belt w war arning ning see Seat belt Seat belts Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment.............................................. 40 Reduced protection.................................. 38 Releasing................................................. 41 Seat belt adjustment (function)................ 40 Seat cover (Care) e)......................................... 286 cover (Car Index 445 Seat heating Activating/deactivating............................ 97 Seat ventilation ventilation Activating/deactivating............................ 99 Seats Folding the backrest forwards (rear passenger compartment)....................... 107 gear Selecting a gear see Changing gears Selector Selector lever lever see DIRECT SELECT lever Self-test est Self-t Automatic front passenger airbag shut o ............................................................ 45 Sensors Sensors (care) (care)............................................. 285 Service vice Ser see ASSYST PLUS Ser Service vice Center Center see Quali ed specialist workshop Service vice interv interval al display Ser see ASSYST PLUS Se Setting tting a speed see Cruise control Se Setting tting the the map scale see Map Shi paddles see Steering wheel paddle shi ers Shi ing gears Gearshi recommendation..................... 159 airbag Side airbag..................................................... 41 Side windows Child safety lock in the rear passenger compartment.......................... 62 Closing using the SmartKey...................... 79 Convenience closing................................ 79 Convenience opening............................... 79 Opening with the SmartKey...................... 79 Opening/closing...................................... 77 Problem................................................... 80 Roller sunblind......................................... 84 Size designation (tires) (tires)................................. 324 Sliding sunroof sunroof Automatic functions................................. 83 Closing.................................................... 80 Closing using the SmartKey...................... 79 Opening................................................... 80 Opening with the SmartKey...................... 79 Problem................................................... 84 Rain-closing feature................................. 83 SmartKey Smar tKey Acoustic locking veri cation signal........... 65 Battery..................................................... 66 Deactivating a function............................ 65 Energy consumption................................ 65 Function overview.................................... 64 Key ring attachment................................. 66 Mechanical key........................................ 66 Panic alarm.............................................. 65 Problem................................................... 67 Unlocking setting..................................... 65 SmartKey Smar tKey see SmartKey Smar Smartphone tphone see Smartphone integration see Telephone Smartphone tphone integr integration ation Smar Overview................................................ 261 Snow chains Snow chains................................................ 310 Socket Socket (12 V) Front center console.............................. 115 446 Index Socket (115 V) Socket Rear passenger compartment................ 115 ware are update So w System updates..................................... 240 Sound PRE-SAFE® Sound................................... 48 Wheels and tires.................................... 309 Wheels/tires.......................................... 309 Sound menu Functions overview................................ 273 Spare Spare wheel see Emergency spare wheel Special seat belt retr actor or.............................. 53 retract Specialis Specialistt work workshop shop see Quali ed specialist workshop indexx (tires) (tires)....................................... 324 Speed inde St Standb andbyy mode Activating/deactivating.......................... 169 Function................................................ 169 Standing anding lights............................................. lights 119 St Star Start-o t-o assist see Optimized acceleration Start/st ar t/stop op butt button on Parking the vehicle................................. 162 Starting the vehicle................................ 143 Switching on the power supply/vehicle.. 142 Star t/stop op function Start/st see ECO start/stop function Start er batt battery ery Starter Charging (Remote Online)...................... 144 Star Starting ting see Vehicle Star ting assist assistance ance Starting see Jump-start connection Star ting-o aid Starting-o see Hill start assist STEER C CONTR ONTROL OL Function/notes...................................... 174 Steer ing wheel Steering Adjusting (electrically)............................ 100 Adjusting (manually)................................. 99 Buttons.................................................. 225 Care...................................................... 286 Operating the memory function.............. 103 Steering wheel heater............................ 101 Steer eering ing wheel heater heater Switching on/o .................................... Steer eering ing wheel paddle shi ers...................... ers St St Stor orag agee ar areas eas see Storage space Stor agee compar compartments tments Storag see Storage space Stor Storag agee space Armrest................................................. Center console...................................... Door...................................................... Glove box............................................... Stowag agee ar areas eas Stow see Loading Stow Stowag agee com compar partments tments see Loading Str tree eett names and house numbers Displaying.............................................. Sugges Suggestions tions Con guring............................................ Sulfur content content.............................................. Surround Surround lighting Switching on/o .................................... 101 158 107 107 107 107 247 239 346 127 Index 447 Surround View Surround View see 360° Camera Surround ound view view camera Surr Care...................................................... Selecting a view..................................... Suspension Adjusting the chassis level (AIR BODY CONTROL)............................................. Damping characteristics......................... DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL.................... Suspension see AIR BODY CONTROL Switch-o Switch-o delay delay time Exterior.................................................. Interior................................................... Switching hing on the the ignition Switc see Vehicle Sync Synchr hronization onization function Activating/deactivating (control panel)... Activating/deactivating (MBUX multimedia system)....................................... System em settings settings Syst Overview of the system settings menu.... 285 211 205 204 204 127 128 137 138 240 Reset function (MBUX multimedia system)....................................................... 244 System settings System settings see Language T (care)............................................. Tailpipes (care) Tank cont content ent Fuel....................................................... Reserve (fuel)......................................... Tec echnical hnical data Component-speci c information............ Information............................................ Regulatory radio identi cation (Indonesia).................................................... Regulatory radio identi cation of small components.................................. Regulatory radio information.................. Telephone Connecting a mobile phone (Passkey).... Connecting a mobile phone (Secure Simple Pairing)....................................... Functions in the telephone menu............ Notes..................................................... 285 347 347 342 340 342 342 342 255 255 255 252 Notes on wireless charging (mobile phone)................................................... Operating modes................................... Telephone menu overview...................... Wireless charging (mobile phone)........... Telephon elephonyy oper operating ating modes Bluetooth® Telephony............................. emper perature ature Tem Setting the vehicle interior temperature....................................................... Tem emper peratur aturee grade grade....................................... Themes Fastening............................................... Through-loading eature Through-loading ffeature see Seats TIN (T (Tir iree Identi cation Number) Number).................... ire and Loading Infor Information mation placard............ placard Tire Tire ire char charact acter eris istics tics....................................... Tir iree in ation com compr pressor essor see TIREFIT kit Tir iree infor information mation table table................................... 116 254 254 118 254 135 321 239 322 316 324 316 448 Index Tir iree labeling Characteristics....................................... DOT, Tire Identi cation Number (TIN)..... Load index............................................. Load-bearing capacity............................ Maximum tire load................................. Maximum tire pressure.......................... Overview................................................ Speed rating.......................................... Temperature grade................................. Tire Quality Grading............................... Tire size designation.............................. Traction grade........................................ Tread wear grade................................... Tir iree load (maximum)..................................... (maximum) Tir iree pr pressure essure Checking (manually)............................... Checking (tire pressure monitoring system).................................................. Maximum............................................... Notes..................................................... Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system............................................. Restarting the tire pressure monitoring system............................................. 324 322 324 324 323 323 321 324 321 321 324 321 321 323 313 314 323 310 316 315 Tire pressure loss warning system (function)............................................... Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... Tire pressure table................................. TIREFIT kit.............................................. iree pressur pressuree loss w war arning ning system system Tir Function................................................ Restarting.............................................. Tir iree pressur pressuree monit monitor or Checking the tire pressure..................... Checking the tire temperature................ Function................................................ Restarting.............................................. Tir iree pressur pressuree ttable able....................................... Tir iree Quality Grading Grading...................................... Tir iree ttem emper perature ature Checking (tire pressure monitoring system).................................................. Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... iree tr tread ead..................................................... Tir Tir ire-c e-chang hangee ttool ool kit Overview................................................ 315 313 312 292 315 316 314 314 313 315 312 321 314 313 309 332 TIREFIT kit Storage location..................................... 292 Using..................................................... 292 ires es Tir Characteristics....................................... 324 Checking............................................... 309 Checking the tire pressure (manually)..... 313 Checking the tire pressure (tire pressure monitoring system)......................... 314 De nitions............................................. 326 DOT, Tire Identi cation Number (TIN)..... 322 Flat tire.................................................. 290 Installing................................................ 336 Load index............................................. 324 Load-bearing capacity............................ 324 Maximum tire load................................. 323 Maximum tire pressure.......................... 323 MOExtended tires.................................. 291 Noise generation.................................... 309 Notes on installing................................. 328 Overview of tire labeling......................... 321 Removing............................................... 336 Replacing....................................... 328, 332 Replacing the wheel trim........................ 333 Index 449 Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system............................................. Restarting the tire pressure monitoring system............................................. Rotating................................................. Selection............................................... Snow chains.......................................... Speed rating.......................................... Storing................................................... Temperature grade................................. Tire and Loading Information placard..... Tire pressure (notes).............................. Tire pressure loss warning system (function)............................................... Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... Tire pressure table................................. Tire Quality Grading............................... Tire size designation.............................. TIREFIT kit.............................................. Traction grade........................................ Tread wear grade................................... Unfamiliar handling................................ system Toll system Windshield............................................. 316 315 331 328 310 324 332 321 316 310 315 313 312 321 324 292 321 321 309 134 Tool see Vehicle tool kit Tether...................................................... 56 Top Tether Touc ouchh Contr Control ol On-board computer................................ 225 Operating.............................................. 233 Touc ouchpad hpad Operating.............................................. 233 Touc ouchscr hscreen een Operating.............................................. 233 Tow-awa Tow -awayy alarm Activating/deactivating............................ 87 Function.................................................. 87 Tow Tow-bar -bar system system............................................ 222 Tow-st arting ting................................................. 305 Tow -star To Towing wing away................................................. away 302 Towing wing eye To Installing................................................ 305 Storage location..................................... 304 Towing methods........................................... 301 Towing methods Traction grade.............................................. 321 Traction grade Tra c inf infor ormation mation Switching on the display......................... 249 Tra data service ser vice Tra c light data Display in the Instrument Display........... 197 Turning the display on/o ...................... 199 Traa c Sign Assist Tr Function/notes...................................... 195 Setting................................................... 196 System limits......................................... 195 Transmission Transmission Engaging neutral.................................... 157 Transmission Transmission position display....................... display 156 Transpor ting Transporting Vehicle.................................................. 303 Tread w Tread wear ear grade grade......................................... 321 Trim (Care)...................................... 286 Trim element (Care) Trunk Trunk box see EASY-PACK trunk box Trunk unk lid Tr Closing.................................................... 72 Emergency release (from inside)............... 77 HANDS-FREE ACCESS............................. 75 Locking separately................................... 76 450 Index Opening................................................... 71 TuneIn Calling up.............................................. 271 Tur urnn signal indicator indicator..................................... 120 urnn signal light Tur Activating/deactivating.......................... 120 Tw Two-wa o-wayy radios radios Frequencies........................................... 341 Notes on installation.............................. 340 Transmission output (maximum)............. 341 U Unloc nlocking king see Locking/unlocking Updat pdates es Important system updates...................... 240 USB port Front storage compartment.................... 107 Rear passenger compartment................ 116 V Vehicle Activating/deactivating standby mode... 169 Collision detection (parked vehicle)........ 168 Correct use.............................................. 27 Data acquisition....................................... 29 Data storage............................................ 29 Diagnostics connection............................ 26 Equipment............................................... 21 Limited Warranty...................................... 29 Locking (automatically)............................ 70 Locking/unlocking (emergency key)......... 71 Locking/unlocking (from inside)............... 68 Locking/unlocking (KEYLESS-GO)............ 68 Lowering................................................ 337 Maintenance............................................ 22 Medical aids............................................ 27 Parking for an extended period............... 169 Problem noti cation................................. 28 QR code rescue card............................... 29 Quali ed specialist workshop................... 27 Raising................................................... 334 Standby mode function.......................... 169 Starting (emergency operation mode).... 144 Starting (Remote Online)........................ 145 Starting (start/stop button)................... 143 Switching o (start/stop button)............ 162 Switching on (start/stop button)............ 142 Towing................................................... 222 Ventilating (convenience opening)............ 79 Vehicle batt battery ery see On-board electrical system battery (12 V) Vehicle camera Information............................................ 170 Vehicle data Displaying (DYNAMIC SELECT)............... 156 Notes..................................................... 351 Roof load............................................... 352 Turning radius........................................ 352 Vehicle height........................................ 352 Vehicle length........................................ 352 Vehicle width......................................... 352 Wheelbase............................................. 352 Vehicle dat dataa stor storage age Event data recorders................................ 33 MBUX multimedia system/Mercedes me connect............................................. 33 Vehicle dimensions dimensions...................................... 352 Vehicle emerg emergency ency start start............................... 305 Vehicle identi cation number see VIN Index 451 Vehicle identi cation plate Paint code............................................. 343 VIN........................................................ 343 interior ior Vehicle inter Cooling or heating (Remote Online)........ 144 Vehicle maintenance maintenance see ASSYST PLUS Vehicle operation operation Outside the USA or Canada...................... 22 Vehicle sensors Information............................................ 170 tool kit Vehicle tool TIREFIT kit.............................................. 292 Towing eye............................................. 304 Ventilating Convenience opening............................... 79 Ventilation see Climate control Vents see Air vents VIN Identi cation plate................................. 343 Seat....................................................... 343 Windshield............................................. Vision Removing condensation from the windows...................................................... Windshield heater.................................. Control System System Voice Control Function................................................ Starting................................................. W arning ning lamp War see Warning/indicator lamp War arning ning system system see ATA (anti-the alarm system) arning ning triangle triangle War Removing............................................... Setting up.............................................. War arning/indicat ning/indicator or lamp ! ABS warning lamp......................... Ó Active Brake Assist warning lamp.. J Brake system warning lamp (Canada only)......................................... 343 138 140 235 235 289 290 417 416 415 $ Brake warning lamp (USA only)..... J Brakes warning lamp (yellow) (Canada only)......................................... ÿ Coolant warning lamp (red)........... ÿ Coolant warning lamp (yellow)....... ! Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) (Canada only)........................ F Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) (USA only)............................. # Electrical malfunction warning lamp...................................................... ; Engine diagnosis warning lamp...... å ESP® OFF warning lamp................ ÷ ESP® warning lamp ashes........... ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up......... 8 Fuel reserve warning lamp ashes......... 8 Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up.......................................................... 415 414 409 410 413 413 411 411 419 418 418 411 412 452 Index Ù Power steering warning lamp (red)...................................................... 408 é Recuperative Brake System warning lamp (USA only)........................ 414 6 Restraint system warning lamp...... 407 ü Seat belt warning lamp ashes...... 407 ü Seat belt warning lamp lights up.... 408 ä Suspension warning lamp (yellow)....................................................... 417 ! The electric parking brake (yellow) indicator lamp................................. 413 h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp ashes............................. 420 h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up........................... 420 L Warning lamp for distance warning function.................................... 416 Overview................................................ 405 PASSENGER AIR BAG............................... 45 Warranty arranty........................................................ 29 Washer uid see Windshield washer uid (care)................................ Washing bbyy hand (care) Water ater ttank ank see Air-water duct eather her inf infor ormation mation..................................... Weat Web browsers browsers Overview................................................ Wheel change change Lowering the vehicle.............................. Mounting a new wheel........................... Removing a wheel.................................. Removing/installing hub caps................ rotation............................................. Wheel rotation Wheels Care...................................................... Checking............................................... Checking the tire pressure (manually)..... Checking the tire pressure (tire pressure monitoring system)......................... De nitions............................................. DOT, Tire Identi cation Number (TIN)..... Flat tire.................................................. Installing................................................ 283 249 261 337 336 336 333 331 285 309 313 314 326 322 290 336 Load index............................................. 324 Load-bearing capacity............................ 324 Maximum tire load................................. 323 Maximum tire pressure.......................... 323 MOExtended tires.................................. 291 Noise generation.................................... 309 Notes on installing................................. 328 Overview of tire labeling......................... 321 Removing............................................... 336 Replacing....................................... 328, 332 Replacing the hub cap............................ 333 Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system............................................. 316 Restarting the tire pressure monitoring system............................................. 315 Rotating................................................. 331 Selection............................................... 328 Snow chains.......................................... 310 Speed rating.......................................... 324 Storing................................................... 332 Temperature grade................................. 321 Tire and Loading Information placard..... 316 Tire characteristics................................ 324 Tire pressure (notes).............................. 310 Tire pressure loss warning system (function)............................................... 315 Index 453 Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 313 Tire pressure table................................. 312 Tire Quality Grading............................... 321 Tire size designation.............................. 324 TIREFIT kit.............................................. 292 Traction grade........................................ 321 Tread wear grade................................... 321 Unfamiliar handling................................ 309 Wi-Fi Setting................................................... 241 indow w curtain curtain airbag.................................... airbag 41 Windo Window indow li er see Side windows Windows Care...................................................... 285 Windows see Side windows Windshield Defrosting.............................................. 135 Infrared re ective................................... 134 Radio waves........................................... 134 Replacing the wiper blades..................... 129 Windshield see Windshield heater........................................ 140 Windshield heater Windshield heater heater see Windshield heater washer uid Windshield washer Notes..................................................... 350 Windshield washer washer syst system em Re lling.................................................. 280 Windshield wipers Activating/deactivating.......................... 129 Replacing the wiper blades..................... 129 Winter inter oper operation ation Snow chains.......................................... 310 Wiper blades Care...................................................... 285 Replacing (windshield)............................ 129 Wireless ireless cchar harging ging Function/notes...................................... 116 Mobile phone......................................... 118 Wireless ireless vehicle vehicle com components ponents Declaration of conformity......................... 25 Work orkout out progr program am Overview.................................................. 97 orkshop shop Work see Quali ed specialist workshop